. 
 
 
 A TAMIL HAND-BOOK 
 
 OE 
 
 FULL INTRODUCTION TO THE COMMON 
 DIALECT OF THAT LANGUAGE, 
 
 QLLENDOBr 
 
 t^. 
 THE REV. G. U. POPE, D.D. 
 
 Difficulties will vanish as you learn on. PROV. 
 
 THE FOURTH EDITION. 
 
 LONDON : 
 W. H. ALLEN & CO., 13 WATERLOO PLACE. 
 
 PUBLISHEES TO THE INDIA OFFICE. 
 
 1883. 
 
 (All rights reamed.)
 
 LOWEON : 
 PRINTED BY W. H. ALLEN & CO., 13 WATERLOO PJ.ACB.
 
 If / 
 
 J2 y / S*l .. 
 
 7 ^/0 a*---/* ^/- /4 !/,/ / 
 
 o 
 
 HAND-BOOK 
 
 OF THE ORDINARY DIALECT OF THE 
 
 TAMIL LANGUAGE, 
 
 IN THREE PARTS. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 (I.) INTRODUCTION : 
 
 1. HISTORY OF THE LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. 
 
 2. ORTHOGRAPHY, PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 (II.) GRAMMATICAL LESSONS, VOCABULARIES, AND EXERCISES, 
 1-274. 
 
 (III.) GENERAL INDEX. 
 
 BY 
 
 THE EEV. G. U. POPE, D.D. 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 W. H. ALLEN & CO., 13 WATERLOO PLACE, 
 PALL MALL. S.W. 
 
 PUBLISHERS TO THE INDIA OFFICE. 
 
 1883.
 
 ft. 
 
 PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 No apology is necessary for offering to the Tamil student a book 
 which has long been wanted. In regard to the imperfections which 
 detract from its value, the writer can only say, he has done^srfiat he 
 could. He has tried to state the FACTS of this ofelo4Snguage suc- 
 cinctly and clearly. The examples, with few exceptions, have been 
 selected from books in universal use in the Tamil country. Should 
 a second edition be published, these examples will be considerably 
 increased in number. 
 
 No work can remove from the elements of a language like Tamil 
 all that may embarass the learner. There are difficulties in it which 
 must be met bravely ; but there are, certainly, none which a very 
 moderate degree of attention will not enable anyone, however 
 unpractised in such studies, to overcome. 
 
 The following hints may be of use to those who use this book : 
 
 1. Do not proceed too quickly. An entirely new language requires 
 great accuracy in the mastering of its elements. 
 
 2. Write down everything from the very beginning. Eead always 
 with pen, or pencil, in hand. 
 
 3. Eead aloud all the exercises with a Tamil teacher ; and be very 
 careful in ascertaining the correctness of what you have written. 
 
 4. At first, whenever you meet with a new word, look for it in the 
 Vocabulary, and decline or conjugate it in full. 
 
 5. Begin to talk though with stammering lips as soon as pos- 
 sible the very first day. Never speak English to a native if you 
 can help it. Why say " salt," when you can say " S.LJL/ " ? Do not 
 be afraid of making mistakes. 
 
 6. Be very careful in noting down differences in idiom, between 
 Tamil and your own language. If you hear much Christian or 
 Cutcherry Tamil, beware of thinking all you hear to be really Tamil. 
 Try to cultivate a Tamil ear, so as to detect an unidiomatic expres- 
 sion, as you would a false note in music. You should understand all 
 you hear : you need not use any expression that is not good Tamil. 
 
 3d 1 5*3.0$
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 This little work has been written with a deep feeling of the vast 
 importance of the acquisition by ALL who sojourn in the land, of the 
 language of the people among whom they dwell. Two hours a day 
 for a year will enable most people to converse freely on ordinary 
 topics with those around them. 
 
 It is proposed in due time to publish a second part* in which the 
 p'oetry of the language will be illustrated. 
 
 The author would scarcely have ventured to publish, in this 
 country, a book requiring such peculiar attention to accuracy in 
 type and arrangement, had he not been zealously seconded by 
 Mr. P. R. HUNT, the able superintendent of the American Mission 
 Press, to whose efforts to improve Tamil typography all who use the 
 language are indebted. 
 
 The earnest wish and prayer of the writer is that his efforts may 
 tend, in however small a degree, to facilitate free intercourse between 
 Hindus and their brethren from the West, and so aid in the imparta- 
 tion to the former, of all that God has bestowed upon the latter. 
 
 TANJORE MISSION HOUSE, 
 October 5th, 1855. 
 
 PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 
 
 THE work has been entirely re-written and greatly enlarged. A key 
 has been published and can be had at the printer's. This will be of 
 great use, if consulted prudently. 
 
 The author has to offer his sincere acknowledgements to many 
 kind friends for very valuable suggestions. 
 
 OOTACAMUND GRAMMAR SCHOOL, 
 
 March, 1859. 
 
 * See Tamil Poetical Anthology and Third Grammar.
 
 PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION. 
 
 THIS Hand-book has been thoroughly revised, and changes intro- 
 duced, the result of many years' experience. It is now a specimen of 
 Tamil printing executed in England with surprising accuracy. It is 
 issued in three parts, which can be had separately. The Third 
 Part contains what, it is believed, will be found to be a sufficient 
 dictionary for the majority of students. No word is found there 
 which has not been tested by the author's own experience. The key 
 will form a reading-book by itself, and has notes on analysis. 
 
 Notes on the @/rxsfr have been added. 
 
 The author would fain hope that his humble efforts may be 
 permanently useful to those who study a language which will repay 
 anyone who will thoroughly master it. 
 
 To the able co-operation of Mr. F. Pincott it is owing that this 
 work has been issued in England with such neatness and accuracy. 
 
 135, BUBY NEW EOAD, 
 
 HIGHEE BROTJGHTON, MANCHESTER. 
 June, 1883.
 
 A TAMIL HAND-BOOK. 
 
 INTRODUCTION, 
 
 I. OP THE TAMIL LANGUAGE IN GENERAL. 
 
 1. The Tamil (SSL&LP from Sans. Dravida) is the vernacular speech 
 of about ten millions of people, inhabiting the great plain of the 
 Carnatic. The limits within which it prevails are thus defined in 
 the Nannul (a standard native grammar) : " The eastern boundary 
 is the eastern sea (the Bay of Bengal), the southern boundary is 
 Cape Comorin, the western boundary is the west sea, the northern 
 boundary is Vengadam (or Tripety, a town about 80 miles N.W. of 
 Madras, nearly on the same parallel with Pulicat)." Here the western 
 boundary from Comorin [{gjusfft] to Trivandrurn [^(TTJO^^^L^LD] is 
 correctly stated, but from Trivandrum northward the Tamil country 
 is confined to the eastern side of the Ghats. The Tamil region thus 
 includes a portion of south Travancore, the entire Zillahs of Tinevelly, 
 
 i Madura (including the dominions of the Tondiman Raja), Trichino- 
 
 j poly, Coimbatoor, a great part of Salem and of North Arcot, with 
 
 j the whole of South Arcot and Chingleput. North Ceylon also is a 
 
 Tamil Colony. Tamil communities are to be found in most of the 
 
 British cantonments in the Dekkan. * / . 
 
 2. The principal languages cognate to Tamil are the Telugu, the 
 Kanarese, and the Malayalam. 
 
 The Telugu is bounded north by the Uriya (beginning with the 
 district of Ganjam), on the north-west by Marathi, on the south-west 
 by Kanarese, and on the south by Tamil. It differs from the Tamil 
 more widely than do the other cognate dialects.
 
 INTRODUCTION. I. 
 
 The Kanarese is the language of the table-land of Mysore, of part 
 of the Nizam's territory, and of a part of Kanara. 
 
 The Malayalam is spoken on the western side of the Malaya 
 mountains from Mangalore to Trivandrum. It seems to be but a 
 corrupt Tamil. 
 
 Minor cognate dialects are (1.) the Tuluva, which is a dialect 
 spoken in the neighbourhood of Mangalore, and is nearly allied to 
 the Kanarese. 
 
 (2.) The various dialects spoken by the rude inhabitants of the 
 Nilagiris, of which the Tuda is more allied to Tamil, and the Kota 
 [GOHATA] to the Kanarese. The Burgher [BADAGA] is simply old 
 Kanarese, much corrupted. 
 
 (3.) The Grond and Ku, in Gondwtlna and the adjoining hills. The 
 rude languages of some other mountain tribes in Central and North- 
 western India possess more or less resemblance to Tamil in idiom 
 and structure. 
 
 To this family of languages the epithet " Dravidian " has been 
 applied. This is hardly correct, as that term must include Marathi. 
 They have also been styled " Tamilian," from Tamil, their chief 
 member. 
 
 3. The origin and affinities of the South Indian group of languages 
 have been much discussed. 
 
 On the one hand, the more deeply they are studied the more close 
 will their affinity to Sanskrit be seen to be, and the more evident will 
 it appear that they possess a primitive and very near relationship to 
 the languages of the Indo-European group. 
 
 Yet they are certainly not mere Prakrits, or corruptions of Sanskrit. 
 Some have supposed that their place is among the members of the 
 last-mentioned family, and that they are probably " disjecta membra" 
 of a language coeval with Sanskrit, and having the same origin 
 with it. 
 
 They certainly contain many traces of a close connection with the 
 Greek, the Gothic, the Persian, and other languages of the same 
 family, in points even where Sanskrit presents no parallel. 
 
 On the other hand, Professor Rask, Mr. Norris, and more recently 
 Dr. Caldwell, have shown that the original language of the nomadic 
 tribes from whom the races of South India have sprung was pro- 
 bably what they term " Scythian," that is, a member of that group
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 of tongues in which are included the " Finnish, Turkish, Mongolian, 
 and Tungusian families." 
 
 4. Grammars of the Tamil may be divided into two classes : those 
 composed by Native scholars, and those written by Europeans to 
 facilitate the acquisition of the languages by foreigners. 
 
 (1.) In the first class it is only necessary to mention the following: 
 
 (a.) Ayastya's Sutrams. It seems very doubtful whether the book 
 which now goes under the name of QUIT ^S^^IUJLD is really an 
 ancient composition. As a whole this work is not extant, but frag- 
 ments of it have been published. 
 
 (6.) The Tolfappiam, written by Sgljrem j^ina ITS l soft of the town of 
 Q^rreu&iTULSijj&tgu^, south of Madura. A part of this is in print. 
 
 (c.) The rsesr^ir&o (/F6u=good, ^ireo), composed by Pavananti of 
 the town of &sr<5&. Of this very able work many editions have 
 been published, and a copious commentary has been added by 
 &K)$ir pLa&l<3ijijujiT of Tinevelly. The whole of the Nan-nul, with 
 a plain prose Commentary, Vocabulary, and Summaries in English, 
 has been published as the Second part of my Third Grammar. I 
 would recommend the learner, who may wish to carry his studies 
 beyond the present work, to read over this Third Grammar, as intro- 
 ductory to the Nannul. I venture to hope that he will find that 
 after mastering that work, the writings of the Tamil Grammarians 
 will present scarcely any difficulties. 
 
 (d.) The Q ^ rr ssr ggin sv (Q^/reu = ancient, = preu= scientific treatise), 
 compiled under the direction of the learned Jesuit, R. J. C. Beschius. 
 This is a very comprehensive work ; but its author imitates the 
 Native writers not in their excellencies only. It can hardly be con- 
 sidered an original work, though the chapters on Composition and 
 Prosody are more so than the former part. 
 
 (2.) (a.) The earliest Grammars published by Europeans were 
 those of the Rev. Father Beschius, of which there are two, one of 
 the common dialect (QSIT^^LII^) and the other of the poetical 
 (Q&/5<uSLp). They were written in Latin. 
 
 A translation of the common Tamil Grammar was published by 
 Mr. Horst, and subsequently with corrections by the Rev. Mr. Mahon. 
 It has been superseded in a great measure by later publications, yet 
 is deserving of an attentive perusal by every Tamil student. 
 
 The Shen Tamil Grammar was translated and published by Mr.
 
 INTRODUCTION. I. 
 
 Babington. This is an exceedingly correct and scholarlike edition 
 of a most masterly work. A reprint of the original was issued by 
 Dr. Burnell. 
 
 (6.) The early Missionaries of Tranquebar are said to have pub- 
 lished a Tamil Grammar, but I have not been able to meet with any 
 account of it. 
 
 (c.) A Grammar was published in Europe by Mr. Anderson, of the 
 Madras Civil Service. This is an able work, but its usefulness is 
 lessened by its strict imitation of the native grammars. 
 
 (d.) The next work was by the late Eev. C. T. E. Ehenius, of 
 Palamcottah. This is a very clear and useful work, and was founded 
 upon that of Beschius. It has gone through three editions, and 
 though not a philosophical grammar, is a plain, useful manual. 
 
 The Syntax is deficient, and the examples were mostly made for 
 the grammar, and not taken from standard Tamil authors. 
 
 (e.) Dr. Graul, late director of the Leipzig Lutheran Mission, has 
 very recently published a small manual, which, while it contains 
 nothing new, is an elegant and scholarlike compendium. 
 
 It is to be regretted that the author should have allowed himself 
 to speak as though he had been the first to " introduce Tamil into 
 the sphere of European studies." 
 
 (/.) Since the publication of the first edition of this work a 
 Comparative Grammar of the Dravidian Languages has been pub- 
 lished by the Eev. Dr. (now Bishop) Caldwell, which throws great 
 light upon every part of the subject. No real student of the 
 language should be without it. 
 
 5. The native Tamil literature, though greatly inferior in extent 
 and intrinsic value to the Sanskrit, contains many works which will 
 amply repay the careful student. The names of a few of these, 
 in the order of their difficulty, I subjoin. I venture to mention the 
 " Poetical Anthology," as containing the choicest bits of Tamil poetry 
 with the necessary apparatus. 
 
 (1.) The writings of Auvei (Lesson 97). 
 
 When the student is able to read plain prose Tamil with ease he 
 will find the little works of this far-famed poetess the best introduc- 
 tion to the study of the poetical Tamil. They consist of, 
 a. The Atti-sudi (^^(ajif ), 
 
 6. The Kondrei-veynthan (Q&rresnsQnr) Qeuuj^^eyr"), and 
 c. The Mudurei
 
 INTRODUCTION. I. 
 
 The two former of these consist of Ethical and Miscellaneous 
 maxims, arranged in alphabetical order. The last work is not 
 altogether a genuine production of the authoress ; but the greater 
 number of the verses are of considerable antiquity and of undeniable 
 merit. 
 
 They have been published by the Eev. P. Percival, under the title 
 of " Minor Poets," in a beautiful little volume. 
 
 (2.) The Kurral of Tiruvalluvar^ *^ ^*f ^/ 
 This work was intended by its author to be a compendium of all 
 wisdom, and to stand in the place of the Vedas lo the Tamil people. 
 It is divided into three parts, viz : 
 
 a. ^{D&giLjun'eo, the division (LJ/TSU) which treats of VIBTUE (.-gy/rxi, 
 
 131. d). 
 
 This contains 38 chapters of 10 stanzas each, which are divided 
 into, 
 
 (a.) Introduction, 1-4. 
 (6.) Domestic virtue, 5-24. 
 (c.) Ascetic virtue, 25-37. 
 (d.) Destiny, 38. 
 
 b. QurrQjL-un~j, the division which treats of WEALTH, (0u/r0sfr, 
 
 131. App. xi. (iii.)). 
 In this are included 70 chapters, which are thus classified, 
 
 (a.) The functions of Eoyalty, 39-63. 
 
 (6.) The necessary adjuncts of Royalty, 64-95. 
 
 (c.) Miscellaneous, 96-108. ^ fg/>^ ^ ^ 
 
 The third part treats of sensual pleasure^ and -much of it is not fit- 
 
 / r 
 (3.) The Ramayanani of Kamban. 
 
 Nothing can exceed the sweetness and harmony of the versification 
 of this real poet. 
 
 The first portion, or ufrsv<S!r<sssri-Ln (the canto which relates to the 
 youth of Rama, the hero ; Sans. BALA, a youth, KANDAM, a chapter), 
 is deserving of careful study. 
 
 (4.) The Naladi-nanurru (prrd), four, cgyif, line, ptrggurgu, four 
 hundred (172)= the four hundred quatrains). 
 
 This work consists of 40 chapters on the same subjects as the 
 Kurral. It seems to be a collection of verses by various Jain authors,
 
 INTRODUCTION. I. 
 
 and is of undoubted antiquity. The Tamil is pure, and many of the 
 verses are of singular beauty. 
 
 (5.) The Naishad'ham, a poetical version, by King A4ivirarama- 
 pandiyan, of the History of Nala. Of this work it is proverbially 
 said, " the Naishad'ham is the nectar of poets." 
 
 (6.) The ivaga Qintamani, an Epic grounded on the history of 
 King Sivagan. This is a difficult work, but without doubt the finest 
 Tamil composition extant. 
 
 (7.) The Tembavani (QpLouir, unfading, ^srofi, a garland) of Beschi 
 must not be omitted in this enumeration. 
 
 This work contains a kind of summary of the Bible, mingled with 
 legends. It is a close imitation of the Qintamani, from which much 
 of its poetical diction and most of its figures are borrowed. Some 
 verses are brilliantly poetical. 
 
 There are many prose works in Tamil, which are translations or 
 adaptations from the Sanskrit. All of these are, more or less, 
 unsafe models of style, being full of foreign idioms and pedantic 
 expressions. The following are much read, and will be useful to the 
 discriminating student. 
 
 (1.) The sfiru^^fffl (s^.r, fable, Lafjjj&fl, cluster). 
 
 (2.) The &igiT!<dj5<gtTLa6Bti! (S. Qintaniani, a gem supposed to 
 
 yield whatever its possessors wish for). 
 
 (3.) The u<i5f>ff ;5 is Stirrs &<5<5 (LJ^^, five, <5JEJ5$aic,, method of 
 acting), grounded upon the Sanskrit Hitopadesa. 
 
 6. There is a large and rapidly increasing translated literature in 
 Tamil. These works had better be studied sparingly by the learner, 
 until his progress in the language shall enable him to detect un- 
 idiomatic forms and expressions.
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 II. 
 
 [The following pages are intended to assist the student who reads with a 
 native teacher. Throughout the work all matter included in brackets, or printed 
 in small type, should be left by the learner to the second or third perusal.] 
 
 I. The Tamil letters (sr-^^-^i) are 30 in number. 
 Of these 12 are vowels, and 18 consonants. 
 
 igT [The characters by which these are represented are evidently derived 
 from the Grantham, which is itself derived from the ancient cave character, the 
 earlier form of the Devanagari.] 
 
 II. The vowels are : 
 
 1. Short (<-nSIj). 
 
 2. Long (Q/F-^eu). 
 
 3. Diphthongs. 
 
 1. 
 
 jy, a. 
 
 6. 
 
 ^, a ( ^ added). 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 $, i- i 7. 
 
 @ or FF, i. 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 gL,U. 
 
 8. 
 
 eoc, u. 
 
 
 
 4. 
 
 OT, e. 
 
 9. 
 
 gr. 6. 
 
 11. 
 
 gg, ai. 
 
 1 5< 
 
 9, o. 
 
 10. 
 
 & 6. 
 
 12. 
 
 9<sw, ou. 
 
 [A vowel is catted a_-ti9fr 
 
 = life-letter.'] 
 
 To pronounce 
 
 y, merely open the mouih. Example : America. 
 
 , is the same sound lengthened. Ex. Father. 
 ), is i as in pin. T&e German i : holiness. 
 
 , is the same, lengthened, as in machine. 
 
 ., is to be pronounced nearly like oo in cook. The Italian u, full. 
 en-, like u ift. rule, or oo in school. 
 
 , awo! 57, Zi'&e fAe e awci a ira enable, respectively. 
 
 , emd ^, ZiA;e o iw. opinion and in opium, respectively. 
 g, as a general rule, like eye ; or as ai in aisle, awd sometimes as 
 
 ai m maid. 
 jiar, like ow m fowl. 
 
 The sound of the Oriental vowels is remarkably 
 pure and simple. The most careful attention is neces- 
 sary in order to catch the sounds.
 
 INTRODUCTION. II. 
 
 III. The consonants as arranged by the Tamilians 
 
 are, 
 
 
 Class 
 
 
 Trans- 
 
 No. 
 
 [g)-8TiiJ 
 
 Equivalent. 
 
 Pronunciation. 
 
 Organ. 
 
 literated 
 
 by 
 
 1 
 
 c& 
 
 y, *, sr'A, 
 
 As g and k in gone, king 
 
 Guttural 
 
 g,* 
 
 j 
 
 1 ] Vh. 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 u 
 
 wgr . . As ng iw long 
 
 Guttural 
 
 ng 
 
 3 
 
 ( & s, c'h, j, Pronounced as nearly as 
 
 Palatal . 
 
 ? 
 
 
 2 < fh. possible as a dental. 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 ( \gn,jn . 
 
 Only to be learned from 
 
 Palatal . 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 examples. 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 CiL d . 
 
 When doubled iLtL = tt. 
 
 Linqual 
 
 d, ft 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 The sharp sound of iL . 
 
 (Cerebral). 
 
 
 6 
 
 (SOT 
 
 n . 
 
 . 
 
 Lingual 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 
 (Cerebral). 
 
 
 7 
 
 (* 
 
 tf,M[this], 
 
 (d, in Sanskrit derivatives 
 
 Dental . 
 
 t,d 
 
 
 4 
 
 d. 
 
 only.) 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 U 
 
 n . 
 
 
 
 Dental . 
 
 n 
 
 9 
 
 fu 
 
 P> P'h, *>, 
 
 
 Labial . 
 
 *1 
 
 
 5] 
 
 Vh. 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 u 
 
 m . 
 
 . 
 
 Labial . 
 
 m 
 
 11 
 
 fil 
 
 I 
 
 y 
 
 
 
 Palatal . 
 
 y 
 
 12 
 13 
 
 ' 
 
 6-1 
 
 60 
 
 ' ) Very soft as nearly ( 
 1 C dental as possible . 1 
 
 Lingual . 
 Dental . 
 
 r 
 I 
 
 14 
 
 \^&1 
 
 v . . . 
 
 Labial . 
 
 V 
 
 15 
 
 frf> 
 
 rrr . 
 
 Something like the Welsh 
 
 Lingual . 
 
 r. 
 
 
 7] 
 
 11 
 
 
 
 v 
 
 (_ sfr 
 
 I 
 
 Lingual . 
 
 I 
 
 17 
 
 f/D 
 
 rr . 
 
 When doubled, pp = tt. 
 
 Palatal . 
 
 rr 
 
 
 8] 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 
 18 
 
 u 
 
 n . . The English sound . 
 
 Palatal . 
 
 n 
 
 [A consonant is called QLcnu-GT-(Lp<&- < gi, body-letter.]
 
 INTRODUCTION. II. 
 
 [The more advanced student will find it useful 
 to study the following arrangement of the consonants. 
 (Comp! Pope's III Grammar, 68-70.)] 
 
 In Tamil the consonants are divided into 
 
 1 i J6e$evru>, ) r ^ strong, g)anr/i= class], which includes 
 (. Strong class, ) 
 
 &, &, i_, p, u, p [<&&i-pu{D\. These are surds. 
 ^ One of these cannot end a word. 
 
 2. j ">W66W">, r Quj6 o =80 ft], which includes 
 (. Soft class, J 
 
 IEI, (&5, 65sr, F) u>, sir [ffi?^5ar^Losw]. These are nasals. 
 
 Here each letter is the corresponding nasal to the one 
 above. 
 
 igT Of these @, /, /i onZy are initial. All except isi may be final. 
 ^ middle], wAic^ mc?^e 
 
 uj) IT, ), <su, Lfi, sir [jL/irsusuLpar]. These are semi-vowels. 
 [Oj these LU and eu only are initial : all are finalJ] 
 
 /--_ /TL- /*-".-* *** 
 
 A j/^^jr 
 
 AV-*-*-*-*-*-^-^-
 
 INTRODUCTION. II. 
 
 The following will be found useful by the more ad- 
 vanced student. The consonants of the Sanskrit alphabet 
 are arranged as under. The corresponding Tamil letters 
 are subjoined. 
 [Comp. Bopp, 12-25.] 
 
 <B 
 
 > 
 
 SUED (Hard). SOSAXT (Soft). 
 
 SURD. 
 
 Thin or Tenues. 
 
 Aspi- 
 rates. 
 
 Media?. 
 
 Aspi- 
 rates. 
 
 Nasals. 
 
 Semi- 
 vow, and 
 Aspir. 
 
 Sibi- 
 lants. 
 
 III. LlNGUALSl II. I. 
 
 (CEREBRALS).) PALATALS. | GUTTURALS. 
 
 K 
 
 1 WJien either 
 = *j Initial, Mute, 
 (or Doubled. 
 
 K'H 
 
 Not in 
 Tarn, a 
 is u$ed. 
 
 G 
 
 ( When 
 \ Sinqle 
 (in Mid. 
 
 G'H 
 
 4 used. 
 
 NG 
 
 151 
 
 H 
 
 [Not in 
 Tarn. <&, 
 
 Fjords)' 
 
 ^~ 
 
 f 
 
 CH 
 
 C When 
 <F-I Doubled or 
 ( after il, jb. 
 
 CH'H 
 
 f is 
 used. 
 
 J 
 
 & After @ 
 sometimes 
 &. 
 
 J'H 
 
 &orz> 
 used. 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 Y 
 
 (L 
 
 T 
 
 " ( When Ini- 
 L- \tial, Mute or 
 ( Doubled. 
 
 T'H 
 
 L- IS 
 
 used. 
 
 P 
 
 " ( When 
 L-\ Single 
 (in Mid. 
 
 P'H 
 
 L-used. 
 
 N 
 
 SSST 
 
 R 
 
 /r, p, tp 
 
 SH 
 
 ^ 
 
 V. 1 IV. 
 LABIALS. | DENTALS. 
 
 T 
 IWhen Mute 
 or 
 Doubled. 
 
 T'H 
 
 pis 
 
 used. 
 
 D 
 
 ( When 
 04 Single 
 (in Mid. 
 
 D'H 
 
 5 used. 
 
 N 
 
 ^ or ssr 
 
 L 
 
 ei), err 
 
 S 
 
 A, # 
 or 
 
 P 
 
 I When Ini- 
 u \ tial, Mute or 
 ( Doubled. 
 
 P'H 
 
 u is 
 used. 
 
 B 
 
 f When 
 u\ Single 
 
 ( m ri;,i. 
 
 BH 
 
 u used. 
 
 M 
 
 LD 
 
 V 
 
 H 
 
 
 (a.) The circle or dot L/errsrf? (or *) above a consonant 
 makes it mute. Remove the dot and it is sounded with 
 short a : ka, & sa. To indicate that a letter is not 
 mute, a horizontal line is sometimes put over it ; but 
 this is unnecessary, and is seldom used. 
 (b.) Some of these letters when used to express a 
 Sanskrit or other foreign word would vary in sound. 
 For such cases no general rules can be laid down, 
 (c.) , p, u, are pronounced sharp or hard (1) in the 
 beginning of a word, (2) when they are mute, and (3) 
 
 10
 
 INTRODUCTION. II. 
 
 when they are doubled ; but soft or flat in all other cases. 
 These letters are surd at the beginning of a word, and 
 when doubled ; but sonant when they occur singly, in the 
 middle of a word. 
 
 (kan), an eye. 
 
 (pak-kam), a side. LO&SST (ma-ghan), a son (as in Ger- 
 
 man Tag). 
 
 (ta-vam), penance. LO<SLCI (ma-lam), a sect (th in this). 
 o (sat-tam), a sound. \SJLMA (ta-b ham), penance (another 
 form of ^a/ji}. _ iP Almost Wee b, a slight aspiration. 
 
 ~ 
 
 ^IU-ULG (ap-pam), bread, rice-cake. 
 
 [Compare the Hebrew use of the Dagesh. Nordheimer, 26.] 
 
 (d.) <F<? = ch in church. 
 ^f-fLa (a-cham),/ear. 
 
 (c after L! or jb=ch). 
 <=^il-? (ad-chi), possession. 
 (Lp-iLirb-!sFl (mu-yarr-chi), effort. 
 >l<g)-& (an-ju),/ear thou ; five. 
 
 (e.) The first five classes (in.) consist of a guttural 
 (*), a palatal (almost a dental) (<?), a cerebral (/_), a 
 dental (,#), and a labial (u). Each of these has its nasal 
 (/E/, ^5, em, IB, LD), by which it is accompanied : ^)]i5i-Qs, 
 there; u^-m, cotton; &,<sG3f'i_ijssT ) he saw; j)fc-& } this; 
 , an arrow. 
 
 (/.) There are three r sounds ; "nT, p, tJp. 
 IT (as nearly-s dental as may be) : Bring the tip of the tongue to 
 the insertion of the upper teeth, and pronounce a gentle r [ 
 
 . 
 
 p (palatal) : Apply the tip of the tongue to the ridge of the palate, 
 and pronounce a rough rr [tn/Dii, u/rjj/]. 
 
 tp (cerebral) : Apply the tip of the tongue, as far back as you can, 
 to the palate, and pronounce a rough rrr, in which a z sound will 
 mingle. In the South, unable to articulate this letter, they use a 
 strong 1 (sfr) instead. In the North in the same way they use uj 
 for Lfi. (Com. 123.) 
 i^- These are never initial. The IT and LP are never doubled. 
 
 (g.) There are three n sounds : /B, ear, &%T. 
 js (dental): Bring the tip of the tongue to the lower edge of the 
 
 upper teeth and pronounce a soft n [/S&LZ, aj/^.Tsar]. 
 GST (palatal) : Apply the tip of the tongue to the ridge of the palate 
 and pronounce a distinct n [/-ascrii, LJSUSJT]. 
 
 11
 
 
 INTRODUCTION, fc II. 
 
 asjr (cerebral) : Turn the tip of the tongtte as far back as you can, 
 and pronounce a strong n \_L&GSBTLQ, ^rrsssr']. 
 ^i p is seldom (or never) final, ear and sssr never initial. 
 
 (h.) There are three t sounds : -s, p<b, L.L.. 
 45 (dental) : Tongue to the lower edge of the upper teeth [-sirzsr, 
 ~ 
 
 (palatal) : Tongue to the ridge of the palate \_(Lf>p!DLb~\- \ 
 (cerebral): Tongue curled round as far back as possible 
 
 <g> is never final. 
 
 [,5 single, in the middle of a word, is sounded like th in this, not like 
 th in thin, and not like d : which is a very common mistake.'] 
 
 (i.) There are two I sounds : GO, err. 
 &o (palatal): Tongue to the ridge of the palate and pronounce a 
 
 Soft 1 [6u]. 
 
 &r (cerebral) : Tongue curled round as far back as possible [<srr]. 
 gg- These are never properly initial. 
 
 (j.) GST p is pronounced ndr, i.e. a d sound is intro- 
 duced for the sake of euphony. <sr6sr-(yesr (en-drdn), he 
 said. 
 
 l^f 33 If the consonants are arranged according to the 
 place where they are pronounced, we shall have, 
 SB, Ki, [iu], guttural. 
 <, , [/r], dental. 
 
 il, essr, LP, gfr, cerebral. *[Cacuminals, linguals.] 
 u, us, a;, labial. 
 ev, n), err, palatal. 
 &, @ I should call, palatal-dental. 
 
 IV. When a vowel follows a consonant it is attached 
 to that consonant, and forms with it, what in Tamil is 
 called, a Vowel-consonant [&-uS!rrQu>iL>=a living body]. 
 
 (a.) Remove the sign ( or ) and jy is inherent in the 
 consonant, ka, & sa, p ta, &c. (As in Hebrew, San- 
 skrit, &c.) 
 
 (b.) <&/,, when it follows a consonant, is changed into 
 
 (These two forms are the same, really. The intermediate form is 
 found in Malayalam, &c.) /r ka, fir sa, fir ta, &c. The latter form 
 is only used in these three cases : 
 
 But compare Max Mailer's note to " Proposals for a Miss. Alph." p.
 
 INTBODUCTION. II. 
 
 (c.) When ) is added to a consonant, only the /? is 
 joined to the upper part of the consonant. 
 
 =L $-- (Here there is a slight variation.) 
 (d.) - is changed into (j) joined to the under part of 
 the consonant, or / singly added, or with a loop ^M. 
 
 changes in the consonants are 
 
 _=<*. > i , 
 
 . _ Q \ only such as are necessary. 
 
 LO + a. = (ip, &c. See the table. 
 
 (e.) *>m is the preceding, with an additional stroke or 
 loop. 
 
 :=<ffii- (irregular). 
 
 il -f- 
 
 (/.) <or and <57 are changed into Q and Q respectively, 
 and prefixed to the consonant. 
 
 [They were formerly joined, thus: & + &=&, and there ivas no 
 difference in form between the long and the short. The same may be 
 said of 9 and p.] 
 
 (g.) go becomes <s& and precedes the consonant. 
 [This also was formerly joined, thus : L& + gg = entp.] 
 & + gQ=G<<, a hand. To all those letters which begin with a loop 
 it is still joined ; thus : Ssasr, &c. 
 
 (h.) <>, & become. Q-ir and Q-ir respectively, the 
 consonant standing between. 
 
 < s + fi 5 =G,f5fr ) (In old alphabets, Qa.r is GV and Qssr is Gx?~ . 
 &-\-Q=(o<gs[r ) Compare the English &.) 
 
 (i.) $>Grr become Q-srr : 
 
 + 9srr=Q<ssrr. (These combinations are rarely used.) 
 
 (j.) The number of these vowel - consonants is 
 18x12 = 216. These are shown in the following table : 
 
 13
 
 INTRODUCTION. II. 
 
 Table of 
 
 
 
 jzy 
 a 
 
 & 
 
 d 
 
 9 
 
 i 
 
 FT 
 
 i 
 
 2_ 
 U 
 
 oetr 
 U 
 
 < 
 
 k 
 
 as 
 
 tea 
 
 <fB/r 
 M 
 
 ' Q 
 U 
 
 3 
 U 
 
 1 
 
 3h. 
 
 ku 
 
 m 
 n 
 
 IEI 
 
 nja 
 
 lEIfT 
 
 nfd 
 
 v8 
 
 nji 
 
 off 
 
 ty 
 
 2 
 
 nfu 
 
 & 
 
 nfu 
 
 <fF 
 
 5 
 
 <f 
 $a 
 
 <?IT 
 q& 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 & 
 tf 
 
 * 
 
 fW 
 
 @ 
 
 & 
 
 <5 
 
 n 
 
 (SJ 
 
 no, 
 
 (Sj/r 
 nd 
 
 ^ 
 
 ni 
 
 ni 
 
 ^ 
 nu 
 
 *** 
 
 nu 
 
 L- 
 
 d 
 
 i 
 da 
 
 I IT 
 
 dd 
 
 '9- 
 di 
 
 ISL 
 
 di 
 
 
 du 
 
 (2 
 
 du 
 
 &&T 
 
 
 
 essr 
 na 
 
 <2B> 
 
 nd 
 
 Q 
 
 633/7 
 
 ni 
 
 wff 
 ni 
 
 6tt)l 
 
 nu 
 
 ^oprr 
 nu 
 
 P 
 
 t 
 
 P 
 
 ta 
 
 pir 
 
 ta 
 
 fi 
 
 ti 
 
 $ 
 ti 
 
 & 
 in 
 
 &ir 
 tu 
 
 fS 
 
 n 
 
 fB 
 
 na 
 
 rsrr 
 nd 
 
 18 
 
 ni 
 
 i 
 ni 
 
 S* 
 nu 
 
 J&T 
 
 nu 
 
 u 
 
 LD 
 
 m 
 
 u 
 pa 
 
 urr 
 pd 
 
 i9 
 
 pi 
 
 i3 
 
 pi 
 
 H 
 
 pu 
 
 U> 
 pu 
 
 l> 
 
 ma 
 
 Ld/r 
 md 
 
 iS 
 
 mi 
 
 i 
 
 mi 
 
 OP 
 
 mu 
 
 % 
 
 uj 
 
 y 
 
 ILJ 
 
 ya 
 
 UJfT 
 
 yd 
 
 u9 
 yi 
 
 iff 
 
 yi 
 
 <H 
 yu 
 
 B 
 yu 
 
 rr 
 r 
 
 jr 
 ra 
 
 ffir 
 rd 
 
 rf? 
 
 ri 
 
 f 
 ri 
 
 (5 
 ru 
 
 
 
 ru 
 
 6V 
 I 
 
 &) 
 la 
 
 6\)/r 
 Id 
 
 69 
 
 u 
 
 < 
 U 
 
 & 
 
 lu 
 
 g*r 
 lu 
 
 61) 
 V 
 
 &J 
 va 
 
 SUfT 
 
 vd 
 
 eQ 
 vi 
 
 eff 
 vi 
 
 o/ 
 vu 
 
 & 
 vu 
 
 & & 
 
 r ra 
 
 PIT 
 
 rd 
 
 # 
 
 ri 
 
 If 
 ri 
 
 & 
 
 ru 
 
 <& 
 
 ru 
 
 err 
 I 
 
 6TT 
 
 la 
 
 errrr 
 Id 
 
 afi 
 U 
 
 of 
 
 li 
 
 & 
 lu 
 
 f 
 
 P 
 rr 
 
 P 
 rra 
 
 0? 
 rrd 
 
 # 
 
 rri 
 
 / 
 rri 
 
 
 rru 
 
 &ir 
 rru 
 
 <ssr 
 n 
 
 G8T 
 
 na 
 
 
 nd 
 
 eS 
 ni 
 
 5 s 
 
 ni 
 
 ^y 
 nu 
 
 &yr 
 nu 
 
 ^ In expressing these letters in English a " cerebral," or " lingual," 
 
 14
 
 INTRODUCTION. II. 
 
 Vo wel-conso nants. 
 
 <5T 
 
 e 
 
 6T 
 e 
 
 m 
 
 ai 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 $ 
 6 
 
 $>srr 
 f>u 
 
 QdB 
 
 Tee 
 
 <?* 
 
 u 
 
 <s&& 
 kai 
 
 Qxn- 
 ko 
 
 <?*/r 
 led 
 
 Qassrr 
 kou 
 
 GlEl 
 
 nje 
 
 QlEJ 
 
 rife 
 
 G2D 
 
 nfai 
 
 QiEJtr 
 nio 
 
 (olElfT 
 
 M 
 
 Q/E/6TT 
 
 rujou 
 
 Q* 
 ge 
 
 GO 
 
 ne 
 
 CV 
 
 6 
 
 6S)& 
 
 $ai 
 
 Q#rr 
 co 
 
 GV/r 
 po 
 
 Qferr 
 cou 
 
 'Q & 
 
 ne 
 
 <sy)(5ij 
 nai 
 
 G)(Sj/r 
 no 
 
 Qt&ir 
 iio 
 
 Qtgjsrr 
 iiou 
 
 Gli- 
 de 
 
 QL.' 
 
 v 
 
 SS>L- 
 
 dai 
 
 QL-.IT 
 do 
 
 QL.fr 
 do 
 
 ClL-fffT 
 
 dou 
 
 QSSST 
 
 ne 
 
 (?633T 
 
 nS 
 
 &SST 
 
 nai 
 
 & 
 
 no 
 
 GtSSB) 
 
 no 
 
 (ole&STGir 
 nou 
 
 Qp 
 
 te 
 
 Qp 
 
 te 
 
 P 
 
 tai 
 
 Gprr 
 to 
 
 G>/r 
 to 
 
 Q pen- 
 ton 
 
 Q/B 
 
 ne 
 
 QK 
 
 ne 
 
 GHIE 
 nai 
 
 Qfsrr 
 no 
 
 QKIT 
 
 no 
 
 QfBsrr 
 nou 
 
 Qu 
 
 pe 
 
 Qu 
 
 pe 
 
 &nu 
 pai 
 
 QUIT 
 po 
 
 Quff 
 
 po 
 
 QuffIT 
 
 pou 
 
 OLD 
 me 
 
 GLZ 
 me 
 
 etnict 
 mat 
 
 Qwrr 
 mo 
 
 (oL&rr 
 mo 
 
 QiCKSfT 
 
 mou 
 
 QlL, 
 
 ye 
 
 GlLt 
 ye 
 
 emiLi 
 yai 
 
 Qiurr 
 
 yo 
 
 Qiuir 
 
 yo 
 
 QlLKoTT 
 
 you 
 
 QJT 
 re 
 
 Qir 
 
 re 
 
 anir 
 rai 
 
 Qffir 
 ro 
 
 QUIT 
 ro 
 
 Q IT err 
 rou 
 
 Q&) 
 
 le 
 
 (?W 
 U 
 
 a*> 
 
 lei 
 
 Qevir 
 lo 
 
 Qevrr 
 16 
 
 QGVGIT 
 lou 
 
 Qsu 
 ve 
 
 re 
 
 Q 
 
 ve 
 
 emeu 
 vai 
 
 Q&JfT 
 VO 
 
 Q&JIT 
 vo 
 
 Qeueir 
 vou 
 
 (?P 
 
 re 
 
 6*>Lp 
 
 rai 
 
 Q/-P/T 
 
 ro 
 
 QlpfT 
 
 ro 
 
 Qipeir 
 rou 
 
 QfffT 
 
 le 
 
 Gen 
 U 
 
 fair 
 lai 
 
 Qeirir 
 lo 
 
 Qenrr 
 lo 
 
 QetretT 
 lou 
 
 Qp 
 
 rre 
 
 C2> 
 rre 
 
 np 
 rrai 
 
 Q(y 
 
 rro 
 
 <% 
 
 rro 
 
 Qpen 
 rrou 
 
 Qvt 
 ne 
 
 Qesr 
 ne 
 
 %xr 
 nai 
 
 Q 
 no 
 
 c?@ 
 
 no 
 
 QsSTfffT 
 
 nou 
 
 is distinguished by a dot placed under ; the rough r is written rr. 
 
 15
 
 INTBODUCTION. II. 
 
 d (&) In pronouncing the letters in Tamil schools, they 
 lengthen a short vowel and add na ; thus : 
 
 <s is pronounced ka-na. 
 
 Q ki-na. 
 
 To a long vowel they add vena or yena ; v or y being 
 inserted for euphony. 
 
 <ssrr is pronounced ka-vena. 
 
 /-^ 
 kai-yena, &c. 
 
 S3" The sooner this is got rid of the better. Children should be 
 taught to pronounce, Tea, M, &c. 
 
 (I.) But in Sanskrit, &inJb is added to a short letter, 
 and &inrLL to a long one ; and this is sometimes used in 
 Tamil. 
 
 ^H is then a-garam. 
 
 $ - a-garam. 
 
 - - ka-garam. 
 
 sir - ka-garam, &c. 
 
 V. (a.) If the consonants are properly pronounced, 
 the vowels preceding some of them will be necessarily 
 modified, in a manner analogous to the German " um- 
 laut." 
 
 Examples. 
 
 (TO BE READ WITH A NATIVE.) 
 
 ^SL'esr he, aven, (not avan). 
 
 ,S>j-(suir he (politely), pronounced aver, (not avar). 
 
 - - - (vudu). 
 
 i, a place. iS-rossr, a neighbour. Qsu-^sir t an opportunity. 
 
 a scorpion. Qff-iuev, a doing. Qeu-jgs, another. 
 
 under. Qu-^i, an acquisition. a8-, leave. 
 
 The learner must take care to vary the sound 
 of the vowel only just so much as is necessary to the 
 proper pronunciation of the following consonant. 
 
 [dy before the final sw, soar, rr, tp, eu or fr of all but monosyllables 
 takes the sound of sr. Comp. Bopp's Comp. Gram. 6. In the words 
 gljrswr, two, and ^ST^^SSTLC,, a diamond, the ^y of the vowel con- 
 sonant IT is pronounced very short, and vulgarly as er. So also in 
 other S. words ; as &j5]S&Lc>, sulphur.] 
 
 (b.) Initial jj), Jp, <sr, GT (chiefly when followed by a 
 cerebral or palatal), are often pronounced as if preceded 
 
 16
 
 INTRODUCTION. II. 
 
 by aj, as the English initial u is often sounded yu, as in 
 union. 
 
 OTsu-su/rti, all. g)-ssrtL, kindred. 
 
 /=F-, an equivalent. <&-6GnJn, a vessel, dish. 
 
 sr-gi, which. sr-GiJssr, which man ? 
 
 ^ This Y sound is sometimes written, both in Tamil and in its 
 kindred dialects. 
 
 (c.) gg seldom has its full sound, except in the first 
 syllable of a word. In other cases it is often sounded ey, 
 only differing from <r in the slight y sound in which it 
 ends. 
 
 AISLE and MAID give the two sounds very nearly. 
 Compare from your teacher's lips the different sounds 
 of 
 
 6ro<5, a hand, and u-@<-<ca, a pebble. *\ 
 
 <su, a bog, - ^'Gu-Vosr, him. I (Here it is 
 
 SOLO, ink, &-6&U, a congregation. f 5T + jj).) 
 
 eroa;, put ! GLz-soff, a table. 
 
 In the middle of a word it is often sounded almost 
 like =5y : ^Ssar-su-^/i, all. The rule given in the Nannul 
 is, that g> lias its full quantity only when it is used to 
 express its own name. [Comp. III. Grammar 15. (I.)] 
 
 fin Telugu, and Malayalam a is used often where Tamil uses gg ; 
 and ST answers to it often in Kanarese. Thus : 
 Tel. VELA = a92su, price. 
 Mai. AVA = ^ygrosu, those things. 
 Can. HALAGE = i_/6UO<s. a board.] 
 
 (d.) 2- final, is always pronounced very slightly, and 
 by the common people is often turned into ). It is 
 almost always added to facilitate the enunciation of the 
 final consonant. #- <^~ 
 
 [The Telugu and Kanarese also use 2- in a similar manner.] 
 L&IT an animal of the genus Bos = almost to Lorrtl. u-if <s-^, in 
 order to, is pronounced u-u^s-Sl. Vulgarly, initial &. is sometimes 
 pronounced as e : thus S.SST, thy, becomes epsvr. a.i_(o > scr=6&L_G > jr, 
 immediately. 
 
 (e.) Gperr is often written jya; or jya/. Thus 
 silence, is written uxsy-esnJb. This letter does not really 
 belong*to the language, and was introduced, apparently, 
 under Sanskrit influences. 3^a*~**^*^jL&-. 
 
 j, a certain poetess = .^yaj-scfflj. ^ Vis- A- X , 
 17 3
 
 INTRODUCTION. II. 
 
 (/.) Commonly, .gg and g& before are pronounced as 
 if followed by ILJ : 
 
 ^sSl, having made, becomes ^lu&Q. 
 
 Qpn-JsQ, having looked at, is pronounced as if written QjBinLi 
 sSliLiLci, bliss, becomes ufriiisSiiuLci. 
 
 VI. A letter called dytham, and written thus : oo or 
 <swi (=the Greek x), is used in poetry only. 
 
 VII. From the old Grantham alphabet are borrowed 
 the following letters, to assist in the expression of foreign 
 words : 
 
 a SH, en; s, gto H, 
 
 (Cerebral ; generally il) the English s. (generally <&) 
 
 S? j. < ksh, g m, 
 
 (generally & or iL) (<-^<) (sometimes in the end 
 
 of a word in MSS.) 
 
 With these the vowels may be joined. 
 
 (Lp-safl-s$, a teacher. &v-tfl, a woman. gup/r-eofl, loss. 
 
 &>-! La.") , tf-sgtl). ) 7 r (SutiriL.'fi^,') 7 
 
 * . ' } loss. . ' > an elephant. n . ' > heaven. 
 
 JEI-L-LD, j S-ffLb, ) Gaj/r-c^LO, ) 
 
 S-o^J = ffTJOi [s. Jati] , race. 
 
 VIII. The following abbreviations and signs are in 
 use : 
 
 VGsrQffiu ] LjezsrQffdj QeueSI 
 
 ti cultii-ation \ dry cultivation a land men sure \currrnt 
 
 X 
 
 i&evu 
 year ground 
 
 or @v &* 
 
 '/TO/ eufii, 
 
 balance received receipt* charyt 
 
 aforesaid money caih a jiayoda 
 
 tftof. 14 <K^ 61^- 
 
 , ^uniii Qutiear -gLD byanfl3(5 
 
 rupee 10 fanams a yard until 
 
 <g*- <>- . rfJi. (f^ or @ 
 
 18 ^ _ . ^ 
 
 .^V ^ i?O
 
 INTRODUCTION. II. 
 
 anus* 
 a xq. yard I iota! Ian anna a pie 
 
 - 
 
 belonging to more or less jiaddy 
 
 Sio **- & 
 
 )ffnff vrrfferu <a/> IL/LD 
 
 polite title for a junior most honurable, a title QM ^/ 
 
 IX. The following lists, given for the sake of practice, 
 contain none but useful, ordinary words. It will be well 
 to commit them to memory. The pronunciation must 
 be practised with a competent teacher. The notes may 
 be useful to the student hereafter. 
 
 (I.) Words containing . 
 
 s. P-SLZ, a finger nail J^J-SLD, a yoke. Gds-tsj, an entanglement. 
 8. prr-<ssLD, a large snake. 8-sm-^m, a well. SicSl&v-^, Christ. 
 , murder. s. Qevir-aLz, the world, [s. Loka.] 
 a stick. s. " 
 
 7 
 
 pomp. w-e&L*, a metal 
 
 @-srTLo, a tank. L-srrii, chaff, stalks, &c. 
 
 a. a represents the {Sanskrit k, k'ha, g, g'ha and h, and is conse- 
 quently surd or sonant according to its position. The Greek y, K, x> 
 
 b. <s is often doubled when it follows a vowel. It is never trans- 
 muted or elided. 
 
 c. The use of <s for the Sanskrit h arises from the fact, that the 
 Tamil possesses no aspirate whatsoever. 
 
 d. The sound of s in the middle of words is very soft, like the 
 final g in some German words. 
 
 (II.) Words with m. 
 
 fib-sic, pure gold. srim-<2<5, where ? sisi-eoa, the Ganges. 
 
 &W-&L&, an assembly. 2^//-<s/i, a lion. smsi-ens, heat. 
 I a. IB never occurs at the beginning or end of a word. 
 / 6. ti followed by <& becomes m. (com. iii. e.) 
 
 (III.) Words containing em, GST or /. 
 
 , a male. ^j~^icf an atom. ^sssr-L-ic, a world. 
 
 }, an ornament. ^/s-sn^, an owl. ^j!5-<La, an end. 
 
 1, a nail. <-e6&, a ladder. ^>jscr-<5snJD,food,boiled 
 
 IT, a dam. <$-ssr t why. rice. 
 
 19 
 
 #/
 
 
 INTRODUCTION. II. 
 
 
 c^-Ssssr, an oath. <&js-gi, lift in the ^jn 
 
 -^, that. 
 
 
 M-tsm-SLs, 1 7 7 . arms. MZ 
 
 OT-60)i_, near. 
 
 
 ^^ ^. . > bliss. x 
 
 r-gy, to-day. 
 
 
 a. 6iir and fssr are never found at the beginning of a word. 
 
 
 b. is not found at the end of a word, or of 
 
 a syllable, unless 
 
 
 followed by t. 
 
 
 
 c. is and ssr are interchanged occasionally. In 
 
 poetry after car 
 
 
 often disappears. 
 
 
 
 / d. ii before p becomes p. (com. iii. e.) 
 
 
 
 e. ssr is sometimes changed into jb before a hard 
 
 letter, (eu suffers 
 
 
 j the same change.) 
 
 
 
 /. exr sometimes becomes /I before a hard letter 
 
 
 
 (IV.) Words with <&,, 
 
 
 
 (gj/r-u-ffLo, memory, memorial. jy^-cSf, (vulg.) five. 
 
 u^-a-, cotton. 
 
 
 (gjj-SHTii, wisdom. <E@-^, rice water. 
 
 Lo^-^gfr, saffron. 
 
 
 @/r-u9-jj/, f/ie sun, Sunday. 
 
 
 
 
 a. us* is never found at the end of a word. 
 
 
 b. It is, in high Tamil, used for p, and vice versa. 
 
 c. When LO comes before & it may be changed into (55. (com. iii. e.) 
 
 d. In common Tamil pp are often changed 
 
 into <5<ff : . For 
 
 
 siriLjEjaigi, it has grown hot, is used sn'iL^^-^i. 
 
 
 
 (V.) Words with L.L., ^, <bp 44*^1* 
 
 ,,%J. 
 
 
 A-fl>'fl>Lc> t death (personified). (p-{DLb-jpi[) 
 
 -fo, faultless. 
 
 
 d.L.-i_ii, a?i assembly. ng-p-SLo, 
 
 ~) 
 
 
 &>-J5-gi, a dance. L\eru -<$-<& is, 
 
 j 
 
 
 LaiL-, limit. 
 
 
 
 LD/Til-, hook it! &iT<5-p,TSOI, 
 
 Ae 'preserved. 
 
 
 Lany-jry, other. <&<r-J!)i, 
 
 having learned. 
 
 
 LGirjo-jpi, change it! <&irrr)-g)i y 
 Lair^-^i-irLD, only. <2.*T? -s <SL!-, 
 
 wind, 
 tie! 
 
 
 (po-{D l i5-<3G) ! $, a fault (fej* case).,'^ /ril-, 
 
 show ! 
 
 
 <$i-L--i5-ein<5, an assembly (ofej. case). )<a- (.-<& /f, 
 
 { a creator. 
 
 
 jtlp-fO, without. wi-i$--&ir, 
 
 ) 
 
 
 a. ilil is often written for a^.i-1 in Sanskrit words. 
 
 
 6. ,<<$ is often written for w^ in Sanskrit words. 
 <? . k %> ft*- 'i* "? c^J^jt^^-^jt^L L+. ^fc &-f- . WA~~ ^ f4f**~^ 
 
 (VI.) Words with p, L. (t and cQJ^as^m the Eng- 
 
 
 lish i^ere, ^ ^o^ c^, unless in^a^nelcfuworQ 
 
 <sj. 
 
 I-***- 
 
 / J 
 
 Gff-Gussr, a god (Sanskrit d). /T--^J, 
 
 an ear. 
 
 Y 
 
 ^ 
 
 Q^zsr, honey. <&rr-, 
 
 a jungle, 
 wind. 
 
 
 u/r-(_ti, a lesson. pir-pio, 
 
 sound -(high) - 
 
 20
 
 INTRODUCTION. <> II. 
 
 15 IT- U.JT sar^ajandowner. 
 ~jBir/h-fotJb, a stench^) 
 
 LO IT- , an animal of the genus Bos. 
 
 usir-g!, a woman. 
 
 JSITL--LLC, eager pursuit. - 
 
 a. ^ becomes tl occasionally when it follows a cerebral. 
 
 b. It becomes p sometimes after a palatal. 
 
 c. fs represents Sanskrit t, t'n, d, 
 
 d. L. represents Sanskrit t, t'h, d, dfh. 
 
 (VII.) Words with ^ ff. >> / 
 
 (s.) ^.T-^?, species (s orj). 
 (s.) Qff-uiJo, prayer (s or j). 
 (s.) &-SCTLQ, people (s orj). 
 (s.) Q-fir-Si, light (s or j). 
 
 Qujir-ff-'Bosr, counsel. 
 
 GW-sg-Ssor, ) about 13 
 -8scr, ) miles. 
 
 ' > a month. 
 
 a. f represents the Sanskrit ch, ch'h,j,j 1 li t s, sh. 
 
 b. The Sanskrit s is sometimes represented by < and iL 
 
 c. The Tamil possesses no sibilants purely such ; but in common 
 use &=s. The vulgar constantly pronounce Q^iL 
 
 - - -H ? 4 
 (labials). 
 
 , 
 (VIII.) Words with u, ea, 
 
 atr-fesr, 
 
 pleasure. 
 affliction. 
 
 a pot. 
 a lute, 
 a miracle, 
 the earth. 
 
 heaven 
 (vulgarly). 
 a way. 
 vengeance. 
 
 a. In Sanskrit words u and a, are often interchanged. 
 
 b. In vulgar talk LC is often used for ay. 
 
 c. is sometimes written for a 
 
 rf. In Kanarese H is often used for 
 e. <_/ is sometimes used for the S. Wi 
 
 (IX.) Words with /r, /b, 50 (r 7 Bounds) .-7 
 
 LQ-PLD, a tree. La-n5),afoal. u-Lpti, 7 - ^ 
 
 LA-roLo, violence, sin. <s-y9, a sficfc. u-eDii, 3 
 
 ai-ip-Ssu, childish prattle. ff-tft, right. Q&ir-L$, a fowl. 
 
 a. tp is pronounced like <srr in Tinevelly, and like iL in Madras. 
 6. ff and /f? are often confounded by the common people. 
 c. p at the end of the former member of a compound is always a 
 transmutation of eu or ear. 
 
 21 
 
 >7
 
 INTRODUCTION. II. 
 
 (X.) Words with <sv or err. 
 
 <&-(&), a stone. O^-su-sj/, expenditure. qsfr-srf), a cipher or 
 <6ir-((cn5), toddy. u<so-(fj\}j),atooth. dot. 
 
 Q'Sir6v-(&^'),Jcitt! u&r-isn-La, a hollow. q-srfl, tamarind. 
 
 Q<E/refr-((g5), buy, take. L^su-( c g2/), grass. 
 . LSsfr- 
 
 a child. 
 
 a. <so and err are changed into SOT- and <OSST sometimes before ti. 
 
 b. And into rr> and /I before a hard letter. 
 
 (XI.) Words with <u. 
 
 become. 
 LAfT-iuLD, deceit. pmu, a dog. 
 
 a. When a word begins with ILI, @ may be put before it. 
 
 b. When a word ends in uS, @ may be omitted, or changed to 
 
 c. ^iL is sometimes written for gg. 
 
 (XII.) Sanskrit words in Tamil. 
 
 UL--&,~ 
 
 s. UL--&,~} 
 
 subtility, u-3a^t, V a bird. 
 finement. u&-l, ) 
 
 he rejoiced. 
 
 /rn-<9=/r, | all forms of 
 \- S. Kajan, a 
 
 a.6u@, 
 
 a. When a word begins with r, I, or y in Sanskrit, it will generally 
 in Tamil take {), s., jy before the initial consonant; since those 
 letters cannot generally begin a word, according to strict Tamil rules. 
 
 b. ou of the Sanskrit may be expressed by e^etr or ^<a/ ; the latter 
 being the real Tamil method. 
 
 X. The following are a few of the double letters used 
 in MSS : 
 
 e,
 
 INTRODUCTION. II. 
 
 XI. The following hints regarding pronunciation may 
 be of use : 
 
 1. As a general rule it may be stated that Tamil 
 scarcely admits of accent upon individual syllables. 
 Sometimes particles added to a word are emphasized ; 
 but, it is safe to aim at pronouncing all syllables alike, 
 with due regard to quantity. The root syllable will, 
 however, be distinguished by something akin to accent. 
 
 2. In reading be very careful to avoid the English 
 emphasis and tone. An even, distinct articulation is all 
 that is required. 
 
 3. Tamil should be read rather faster than English. 
 
 4. Be very careful in pronouncing all double letters. 
 H-&fl is tamarind, but L/sirsrft is a dot ! \ 
 
 23
 
 FIRST LESSONS IN TAMIL. 
 
 [1. In the first few lessons letters which are inserted for the sake of euphony 
 are put in brackets. 
 
 2. None but common, useful words are used. 
 
 3. The exercises should in all cases be written and then committed to memory, 
 after being corrected, if possible, by a native teacher. Let the learner frame 
 more exercises for himself, and let him repeat each sentence again and again after 
 his teacher, imitating his tone and accent. A little trouble and perseverance at 
 first, will save time in the end. 
 
 4. The figures in brackets refer to preceding paragraphs. 
 
 5. Every word in each Vocabulary should be looked out in the general Vocabu- 
 lary at the end, and the synonymes carefully learnt. 
 
 6. A key to the exercises is published. This should be used with judgment.] 
 
 Lesson 1. 
 
 1. VOCABULARY. 
 
 MANITHAN, a man. 
 KUMARAN, a son. 
 Qaeussr DEVAN, a god. 
 <s33r<sjr KAXAKKAN, an ac- 
 countant, from 
 
 KAXAKKU, an account. 
 
 VARTTAGAN, a mer- 
 chant. 
 
 AVAN, he. 
 
 eg (5 ORU, one, a or an. 
 e_L> UM, and. 
 
 N ALL AVAN, a good man. 
 
 KANDEN, 1 SttW. 
 
 VANTHAN, (he) came. 
 r CEYTHAN, (he) did. 
 
 LJWT653fl(6E)S3r PANNINAN, (he) 
 
 made. 
 QprnLi-tresr TOTTAN, (he) 
 
 touched. 
 (These are irregular past tenses. 
 
 Comp. 58-70.) 
 
 2. Nouns in car are generally masculine. Names of irrational 
 animals and of things without life are neuter. 
 
 3. The sign of the accusative (or second case), case of the direct 
 object, is the vowel gQ^ which is added to nouns in esr thus: Lasafi 
 2S3r-J-gg = Lo<srfi,!$36sr. (gjLc,[rjresr + <(3 = (&jLCirnr'<Jee]'. This case folloivs the 
 verb in English, but comes immediately before it in Tamil, thus : euir^ 
 p&tiser [] <sR!rG > L_6ar (/) saw the merchant. [App. *L] . 
 
 4. After the sign of the second case any one of the letters , <, 
 <& or u MUST always be doubled, thus : ^fflj&cr [^] Qf&mLt-irea- (he) 
 touched him. 
 
 5. The.pronoun is often omitted in Tamil, after the manner of 
 the classical languages, where the English requires it, thus : 
 (he) came (not ^jeuesr eujspiresr). 
 
 6. The verb " to be " is often omitted in Tamil : ^euear 
 he [is] a God.
 
 J - 
 
 fr< 
 
 V ^s 
 
 ^ 
 
 / nia,j o 
 
 y valeht 
 
 EXERCISE 1. LESSON 2. 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 7-10. 
 
 two words would be joined in English by putting 
 r and '/ between them, &.LD must in Tamil be added to BOTH, thus : 
 5sgr<ffic5jog7/iQ <&itf js^s, ]iLa(a,n) 'accountant and(ajmerchant. 
 A single S.IQ would signify /' evenT* /' also,' '' tooT^according to 
 the context, thus : ^Lairtr^iLc, euptS trek (the) son also came, or evenfyhej 
 son came, ortthejson too came. 
 - JL The TamUJiasjio article 
 may sometinifijs_l>e used forT^a V or /' an. 
 
 nt for /' the.'^ [But compare Lessea 48-.-}- 
 
 but 5^5, [172], which means one, 
 ' an.'' There is no Tamil equi- 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 (To be rendered into English.) 
 
 5t Q <f IJJ B fT 5ST . 
 
 10 
 
 (ttLDfT IT S3f 
 
 (&j 
 J < 
 
 12 
 
 (To be rendered into Tamil.) ( 
 
 (&.) T The accountant did. 2 The merchant made. 3 A god and a 
 man. 4 (He) touched the man. 5 I saw the man. G He [is]( aj mer- 
 chant. 7 The man and the merchant. 8 A man and a merchant. 
 9 The accountant also came. 10 Even the son touched him. n He 
 did. 13 He made. 13 The son [is] good. u The merchant [is] good. 
 15 The son saw. 
 
 Lesson 2. //, 
 10. THE PRONOUNS. [Comp. App. 4ai,] / 
 
 NOM. or fsrresr 
 
 / Nt, thou. 
 
 ^Sijssr AVAN, 
 
 ^ar 
 
 jygi 
 
 1st case,' NAN, J. 
 
 /a- N!R, T/OM. 
 
 he. 
 
 AVAL, she. 
 
 A^U, if. 
 
 SING. 
 
 
 
 ^enfr AVAR, 
 
 
 NB. J( pro- 
 
 
 
 
 he (politely). 
 
 
 nounced as T 
 in this. 
 
 Ace. t>r 
 
 STstrVser 
 
 S-SST^SST UN- 
 
 -fij/cSI/SoCr AVA- 
 
 ^fflj&rr 
 
 jysro-s? 
 
 2nd case, 
 
 ENNAI, 
 
 NAI, f/iee. 
 
 NAI, him 
 
 AVALAI, 
 
 A^AI, if. 
 
 SING. 
 
 me. 
 
 e./iDU3 TIM- 
 
 (regular, 
 
 her (regu- 
 
 
 
 
 MAI, you. 
 
 compare 3). 
 
 lar, 3). 

 
 " 
 
 11-14. 
 
 LESSON 2. EXERCISE 2. 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 NOM. 
 PLTT. 
 
 Ace. 
 PLU. 
 
 NAM, 
 NANGAL, 
 
 I ..aya.'/TiSsrr ^se>su AVAI, 
 
 AVARGAL, I C gyasu 1 s<sfr AVAIGAL, 
 you. \ihey ( m. or f .).! foy (n.). 
 
 NAMMAI, 
 ENGALAI, 
 US. 
 
 UNGALAI 
 
 you. 
 
 AVARGALAI, 
 
 them (m. or f.). 
 
 AVAIGALAI^ 
 
 them (n.). 
 
 
 
 11. (a..) As in most languages, so in Tamil, the pronouns are 
 irregular ; those of the 3rd person, however, present the fewest 
 anomalies. 
 
 (6.) /ir is what is called an honorific, or polite form ; and is used as 
 the English t'jou.'J 
 
 The plurals of all the pronouns may be used in this way for the singular. 
 
 (/.) The difference between ^ITLD and p.TKj&stris, that 15 IT us includes 
 those that are spoken to, pn-Kisetr excludes them. The only exception to 
 this is when a superior speaks of himself honorifically in the plural. 
 Thus kings say/' We.' 1 In this case jsiriJo does not include those 
 spoken to. 
 
 [iEiTLto may thus be considered as a dual form. The language affords no 
 other traces of the dual, in this agreeing with both the Pali and the Prakrit.] 
 
 12. Adjectives (or the words which are so used) are underlined, 
 and set BEFORE the nouus they qualifv, as in English. 
 Less. 43.] 
 
 13. VOCABULARY. 
 
 TAY, a mother. 
 
 Oi <?EY, do (the root and also 
 the imperative). 
 Lo MARAM, a tree. 
 Hu NAY, a dog. 
 
 MAG AN, a son. 
 MAGAL, a daughter. 
 
 3U NALLA, good. 
 
 '^L- KETTA, bad. 
 
 Quifliu PERIYA, great. 
 ^izsrssr (plNNA, little.^ 
 q^j PU^U, or n@uj PU^IYA, new. 
 
 LJSTOL0UJ PARAIYA, old. 
 
 GQuiussr PAIYAN, a boy. 
 
 <&>-LJi-3iLt-rreer K&PPITTAN, he 
 catted. 
 
 es)2u^^iussr VAJTTIYAN, a phy- 
 sician. 
 
 saw). 
 
 He saw me, sTS3rscr[*] sexn-trssr ENNAI[K] KANDAN (me [he] 
 
 14. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 ^ USftLfiVLJ LOJTLO. 
 
 10 /? 
 
 f& IT UJ . 
 
 (?<_6W. & GufitLI 
 
 63r[LjJ GnuiU'osr. ^ tr Quifiiu 
 prevent hiatus. TOomp-. App. -*i 
 
 12 T &ST (faff IL] LD . 
 
 [uj inserted to
 
 LESSON 3. 15. 
 
 ANALYSIS OF VEBBAL FORMS. 
 
 (b.) l A little dog. ~ A new accountant. 3 A great God. 4 A good 
 daughter, 5 She [is] a little daughter. 6 He [is] a big boy. 7 The 
 little boy touched the mother. 8 He called the great merchant. 
 9 The new physician called them. 10 He saw a boy and a little dog. 
 11 Do that. 12 He touched us and them. 13 He called me and thee. 
 14 The great physician [is] a good man. 
 
 Lesson 3. 
 
 THE VERB. (s3%5sr<? 0^,7^= action-word.) [III. Gram. 75-81.] 
 
 15. There are some things relating to the conjugation of the 
 Tamil verbs that, at first sight, appear difficult ; but, in reality, the 
 whole system is very easy ; and, when once mastered, will be seen to 
 be exceedingly simple. 
 
 (a.) Tamil verbs have only three simple tenses ; viz., the present, 
 the past, and the future. 
 
 (6.) These forms when analysed are found to consist of the verbal 
 root (u@jl), the middle particle denoting time (@60)t_ jSZso'), and the 
 terminations which distinguish person and number (s&tgtsl) ; thus, 
 
 uup-&!&l(2fD6Br is the 1st person singular present tense, I read. 
 
 uut-jisQiSeisr is the 1st person singular past tense, I read. 
 
 uu?-u(l>ussr is the 1st person singular future tense, I shall read. 
 
 These three forms have the same root uiy., signifying " read " or 
 " learn.'-' They have also the same termination svr, signifying il I," 
 the sign of the first person singular. They differ only in the middle 
 particle, which being added to the root, distinguishes the tense or 
 time. 
 
 (c.) The middle particle or sign of the present is Sp or &Q^. 
 
 (cZ.) The middle particle or sign of the past is ^ or fss; or J5< or 
 
 (e.) The middle particle or sign of the future is u, uu or a;. 
 
 In conjugating any verb, then, the learner must ascertain (first) 
 the ROOT, and (secondly) the particular MIDDLE PARTICLE which it 
 receives. 
 
 (/.) As a general rule verbs which are transitive in their signification 
 take &SijD] in the present, JBJS in the past, and uu in the future, while 
 other verbs take &)} in the present, fig in the past, and <su in the future; 
 thus, LjfjL/' learn,'' being transitive, makes 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. Future. 
 
 Ul$--&@J$l 
 PADI-KKIRRU. 
 
 Ui$--<J5S5 
 PADI-TT. 
 
 U^L-UU 
 PADI-PP. 
 
 [The final a. in jj; will be lost before a vcwel.] 
 From these by adding the termination <gjsar for the 1st person 
 
 27
 
 16, 17. 
 
 LESSON 3. EXERCISE 3. 
 
 ANALYSIS OF VERBAL FORMS. 
 
 singular, ^ssr for the 3rd per. sing, mas., ^srr for the 3rd pers. sing, 
 fern., and ^8$ for the 3rd pers. sing, neuter, we shall obtain : 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Future. 
 
 The 1st pers. sing. 
 
 UUjL-sSlZcfOSBT 
 
 I learn or read.- 
 
 .-.,. (^ ..~L^ . 
 
 ui$.-<ff;(off6Br 
 I learned. 
 
 Ul^--Lj(oUS3T 
 
 I will learn. 
 
 The 3rd pers. sing, 
 mas. 
 The 3rd pers. sing, 
 fern. 
 
 uuf--sQ(yesr 
 he learns. 
 ui$--'&3(yT 
 she learns. 
 
 UU}.-<fliTSr 
 
 he learned. 
 
 uL^-^^rrerr 
 she learned. 
 
 uu}.-LJUtreisr 
 he will learn. 
 
 UlSf--ULJ[T<BfT 
 
 she will learn. 
 
 The 3rd pers. sing, 
 neut. 
 
 Ui$--&ln)gi 
 
 it learns. 
 
 Uy--<:531 
 
 it learned. 
 
 Here there is a 
 variation. 
 See Lesson 24. 
 
 This analysis will enable the learner to understand the formation 
 of the tenses. THE USE OF THESE TEMPORAL PARTICLES is THE FIRST 
 
 DIFFICULTY TO BE OVERCOME. 
 
 (</.) Sometimes the same root is used both with a transitive and 
 an intransitive signification ; thus : 
 
 Present. Past. Future. 
 
 r jy/!-fi(Jfl?ssr 
 From the root ) I perish. 
 
 are formed } 
 
 } 
 
 \ I destroy. 
 In this case the weaker form is naturally intransitive, and the 
 
 stronger transitive. / ^ ^ t;rl , 
 
 16. VOCABULARY. 
 <_/:o. PADI, read. 
 JJ/L^) ARI, perish, destroy. 
 QLOOJ MEY,/eecZ, graze (trans, and 
 
 intrans.). 
 Lorr MADU, an ox, any animal of 
 
 the genus Eos. 
 ^^<ss)^ TANDAI, father. 
 u<& PACU, a cow. 
 
 PILLAI, a child. 
 r He gave it, 
 
 QLGdjuuear MEYPPAN, a herds- 
 man, shepherd. 
 
 Qstr KODU (pres. Q,T-S 
 cyscr, past. QsirGl^^fresr, fut. 
 OsiTuuirser), give. 
 
 GsuSou VELAI, worfc. ^ 
 
 G'a.'Ssu^^iT.o'ear VELAIKKARAN, a 
 servant, workman. 
 
 17. (a.) 
 
 v cgy3)^[<5] Q 
 
 JSxercia '>. 
 
 a 
 I 
 
 OT (ffe j'f ^ai?e). 
 
 28
 
 LESSON 4. 18. 
 
 THE OBJECTIVE CASE. 
 
 uiy-&l(nr?<s5r. 8 aGftr&assr <sr&sr^syr ^gy ^ u u IT sitr . 
 9 /5&06V anutussr ui^-uuir&sr. 10 (OLOUJUUSST isfrenuja Q&frGlp 
 ptrssr. n LD/T (oLauQ/n^i. 12 L^srrSsrr uisf-ppgi. 13 LJ^UJ 
 
 LDir(l (oLOUJ/5^^/. 14) &SW63T LA&fSIJjLD ^fTlLflJD. 15 (oL>UJLJU68r 
 
 16 /5ff060 17 
 
 l8 QuiRuj iSSerrP&r 
 
 (b.) T He perishes. 2 1 destroy. 3 1 feed. 4 The cow grazes. 5 The 
 shepherd grazes. 6 The accountant destroyed it. 7 The little child 
 reads. 8 The cow perishes. 9 The little dog destroys it. 10 The bad 
 boy will destroy them (neut.). n He gave it. 12 1 will give. 13 The 
 physician will give it. u The old cow will give. 15 The mother will 
 give. 16 The father gave. 
 
 THE OBJECTIVE CASE. [Comp. App. *. and III. Gram. 58, 70.] 
 
 18. The 2nd case [3] of u& (a cow), is u&esxsu ; of LOJTLQ (a tree), 
 LAffgiGQiS ; of LO/T (an ox), LO/TL-STOL- ; of L9efr3srr (a child), L9<sfr2err 
 eniLj ; of ^,^1 (a river), ^/rxanro ; of <seu (a stone), ^euSsu ; and of 
 <s/Tj7j} (aw ear), <3srT<5S)f. 
 
 (a.) u&@s)sij is nom. L/^-f-oj + gg (comp. 3). Why is the en 
 inserted ? TF/ieTi the vowels <\, ^, a., eerr, sr, eg, ge, sgsrr, are followed 
 by a vowel, <su is inserted, for the sake of euphony^ may take either iu 
 or y). [Comp. App.-i-. II. (II.)] /r ^^-t^-^ (Z_^t-/I_^ 
 
 (6.) LSefrSsmsrouJ, is nom. L9srr3srr+(u + ^. Why is iii inserted? 
 When the vowels ), fe) or 3 are followed by a vowel, iu is inserted for 
 the sake of euphony. T[App. -*tr II. 
 
 (c.) LOITL-(SSL- is nom. ai/r + ^, the final a. of the noun being 
 elided and the L- doubled ; thus, Lo/ril, LdfrtLiL, LomLsot __ The rule 
 is, when any noun ends in , not preceded by one short syllable, (1) the 
 iL is doubled, (2) the a. is elided, and (3) the termination of the case is 
 added. 
 
 (d.) From ^ jy is formed ^pe^fO, in precisely the same way, sub- 
 stituting rr> for il. 
 
 (e.) Lajr<<5e)< is Lojii-f gg, the zi being changed into ss^s; or, which 
 is the same thing, cast away ^LD, insert ^jsgi, and add the termina- 
 tion of the case. 
 
 (/.f <saj2su is nom. -seu + eu + gg. The final consonant of a short 
 monosyllable is doubled before a vowel. [App. *X II. (I.) J 
 
 (g.) <S,TSTO=? is nom. <srr^i e_ + gg. The final &. of all words not 
 consisting of two short syllables, and not included in the above rules, is 
 elided before a vowel. [App.-xkJV. (I.)] 
 
 29
 
 ^ 
 
 * 
 
 
 19-21. 
 
 EXERCISE 4. LESSON 5. 
 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
 
 19. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ' vtpu, a house. 
 
 NADU, a country. 
 sir KADU, a jungle. 
 ^jpi ARRU, a river. 
 Q&jpj ciiRRU, mud. 
 
 t Ifint fffiiff / o , LJ^^^LQ PUSTAGAM, Ct 
 
 ftoofc. 
 
 ^ ADU, sheep. 
 
 $&* He read a book (3). 
 
 TAGAPPAN, PI^A, 
 
 a father [<s<suussr is Tamil, 
 I and ij^/r Sanskrit ; the former 
 is more familiar, and answers 
 
 tO L0<ffi<5r, aS LS1<3,T tO (^LQ 
 
 VANAM, <A.e heaven. 
 
 book 
 
 he read. 
 [Observe the order.] 
 
 SD<S KAI, a Aawd. 
 
 ORU PUSTAGATTAI PADITTAN, 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 20. (a.) ! I saw a house. 2 He destroyed the country. 3 1 fed 
 the cow. 4 1 will give a book. 5 1 saw the mud. 6 He called the 
 good father. 7 The little boy learns the new book. 8 He touched the 
 dog. 9 1 did it. 10 1 saw the heaven. n It destroyed the jungle. 
 12 The big boy saw the father and mother. 13 The physician gave a 
 book. * * I read a good book. 
 
 <sii ff <& p & <sisr 
 
 Lesson 5. 
 
 DECLENSION or THE NOUN. 
 
 21. The Tamil noun is said to have eight cases. These are, 
 
 (a.) The first (or nominative), which (in the singular) is the noun 
 itself. [Less. 74.] 
 
 (6.) The second (accusative or objective), which adds gg to the 
 nominative. [But compare 18.] [Less. 75.] 
 
 [The added particles, signs of case, are called -Qf)l-l= form.'] 
 
 (c.) The third (or instrumental), which adds 9, or^eu, of which 
 the former means " together with," and the latter P"Ey? This is iii 
 reality two cases. [Less. 76.] 
 
 (fl^^t
 
 LESSON 5. 21. 
 
 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
 
 (d.) The fourth (or dative), which adds @=to (or &( or a.@) to 
 the nom. [2. is inserted euphonically and is doubled according to 
 rule., Comp. App. xi.] If ^<s be also added it gives the meaning of 
 t'for:! [Less. 77.] 
 
 (e.) The fifth (or ablative of motion), which adds @d>j @)<sQ(rfjt5gi 
 or $}<asftziirjrii to the noun. [Less. 78.] 
 
 (/.) The sixth (genitive or possessive case), which adds a.i_uj or 
 J)ssr to the nom. [Less. 79.] 
 
 (g.) The seventh (or local ablative), which adds @eu or ^i^^eo 
 to the noun. [Less. 80.] 
 
 (h.) The eighth (or vocative), which (1) adds <gr to the noun; or 
 (2) lengthens its last syllable ; or (3) omits the final consonant, and 
 lengthens the remaining vowel. 
 
 Paradigm. / 
 
 [Comp. Append. -sii*] ?-/ 
 
 SINGULAB. 
 
 CASE (1.) LDssfi^ssr a man. 
 
 (2.) lA&fi&'&sr a man ( + gg). 
 <u~':J^ (3.) LQsofl^@)6u by a man ( + =peu). 
 --.. ?<jLv Loscfl^Co^) together with a man 
 
 jj^i (4.) LC6afi<g;^jST!&(3j to a man ( + 2. 
 ".'.JifeJtfu. t^&sfif^ijs^n-sfor a man 
 .... |'C (5.) toisaft^oofleu, La&sfi-SGBfleQfWjisgi, LG soft*; soft soft $w)i from a 
 or g)w+@0^ [lit. being_from], or 
 [61; + ^ = ^; lit. standing^romj). 
 (6.) Lz<safl<sgs2]<5nt_iLi or Loeafl^soflsjr of a waw, belonging to a 
 
 or @6Jr). 
 u ") with a man ( + ^)i^^i&j or @eu), a^ 
 
 ) a man, in a man. 
 (8.) Loajfl^Gssr waw/ ( + er). 
 [XOTES. 1. The Tamil noun has really but one declension. 
 
 2. The signs of the cases are the same for all nouns ; and in the plural (29) 
 these are the same as in the singular. 
 
 3. The only difficulty in declining nouns which differ from the above paradigm 
 is in ascertaining the modifications, chiefly euphonic, which the nominative 
 (cosi/s rectus) undergoes in order to prepare it for the reception of the inflexional 
 particles. 
 
 The stem, or inflexional base (casus obliquus), being ascertained, there is no 
 difficulty. 
 
 4 For this inflexional base, where it differs from the nom., see 18. 
 
 5. This is often used for the genitive or 6th case. [Comp. 218.] 
 
 6. It is generally the inflexional base that is used when a noun is made the 
 first member of a compound. [Comp. 131.] 
 
 7. It is not the etymological root in all cases. 
 
 8. It is not quite identical with the crude form in Sanskrit. 
 
 9. In nouns in ii, the /i is undoubtedly not radical. /_o and (QJ or) ^ (which 
 are often interchangeable in Tamil and its kindred dialects) are used euphonically 
 as terminations of nouns. 
 
 31
 
 22-25. 
 
 EXERCISE 5. LESSON 6. 
 DEMONSTRATIVES AXD IXTERROGATIVES. 
 
 before the vowel of a suffix 
 Before a consonant the nasal 
 , ^, tij t before <& t <F, and jj&, 
 
 10. This final LO gives way to the stronger ^ 
 (and in poetry sometimes before the consonant). 
 is generally retained, but assumes the forms 
 [App. xi.]]. 
 
 22. Observe that @)sor is very often inserted between the 
 and the termination of the case. This is evidently for the sake of 
 euphony. \_^ssr is sometimes used for $j)zsr in poetry. 
 
 23. <sj may be added to most of these terminations. Sometimes 
 it is emphatic, but for ike most part merely euphonic. 
 
 24. (a.) l 
 
 & 6] 6J) L ILJ LD!TLCt 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 (18. e.) 
 
 (18, C.) 7 
 Ul^-^^B fT S5 
 Q LblLS &i p gjl . 
 
 (18. 6.) 
 (23.) 
 
 Li IU LJ U 63T 
 
 13 Quifiiu 
 
 <oti IB < IT <SST . 
 
 (6.) 1 He came with the child (Tarn. " with the child he came." 
 ALWAYS INVERT THE ORDER). 2 He called the dog from the jungle. 
 3 The herdsman will feed the cow in the country. 4 By the physician's 
 son. 5 From the accountant's little child. 6 He called me with the 
 mother. 7 1 saw him in the house. 8 The physician perished in the 
 country. y Do this for the little daughter. 10 From the river. " In 
 heaven and earth. l - By the child. 
 
 ~ t/ ' < 
 
 25. Words of the greatest importance. 
 
 " By combining the following words, attending to para. 6, a vast number of 
 useful sentences of two words may be formed, thus : ^a/^sr sriEiQs ? where \_is\ he ? 
 
 PRACTISE THESE WELL WITH A NATIVE TEACHER. 
 
 (a.) c gj<aLzvr he, that man (ille). 
 
 @<a,'Jr he, this man (hie). 
 
 6T<sxjr who, what man? 
 
 (quis). 
 (c.) ^^j that thing ^ These are 
 
 j)^2 this thing > substantive 
 
 sr^i which thing ) pronouns. 
 
 &r she, that woman (ilia). 
 she, this woman (haec). 
 who, which woman 
 (quse). 
 
 /feOa there (illic). 
 here [vulg. 
 where ? 
 
 32
 
 LESSON 6. EXERCISE 6. 
 DEMONSTRATIVES AXD IXTERROGATIVES. 
 
 25, 26. 
 
 
 
 that [demonstrative 
 adjective pronoun, used 
 only with nouns]. 
 this. {Zc*^ 
 which ? 
 
 that house. 
 
 this house. 
 which house. 
 
 (e.) * c g>juuio_ so, in that way. 
 
 thus, in this way. 
 how, in what way ? 
 
 (com. ^u (h.~) 
 or cSyuQutr) then. 
 p,j2 (com. ^LJC'LJ.T 
 or ^)LJ(DLJ,T) now. 
 
 (COm. STLj(oLJ,T 
 
 ~2 or OTLJ(OU/T) when? 
 
 (a, b, c.) SET is the masculine termination, err the feminine, and jpj 
 the neuter. Those ending in car and err are declined like 10 safl^sar. 
 Those in ^ elide the final a.. 
 
 (a-&.) Initial <jy, Jj), OT are used respectively to point out things 
 distant, things near, and to ask a question. Compare the English, 
 thAt, this, what. [a. is used, in poetry only, to point out things in 
 the middle or behind. III. Gram. 5.] 
 
 (h.) These three letters may be prefixed to any noun, in which case 
 the initial letter of the noun is generally doubled., . '/ -3+ >*' *-' n-r *-/ , 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 
 26. (a.) 
 
 66630T 
 
 ./rear r* 
 
 Quifii 
 
 eruutp. 
 
 <sreij<s$r Qjsa'tL.tff&sr ? 
 
 U& 
 LUJ 
 
 13 (jju'Qun- Qa-iii. 
 
 e*. e.] 
 
 ST/aCo<ffi su fF<^.T(u ? [This is an idiom, and is used for, What have you come 
 for ? What do you want ? ] 
 
 (&.) !How did he make it? 2 Where [is] the merchant's son? 
 3 Come now. 4 He saw her then. 5 That [is] his house. 6 He did so. 
 7 Thus he perished with his son. 8 When will he learn? 9 He will 
 learn now. 10 The good shepherd will feed the sheep now. n Which 
 is his new house? 12 Where is it ? 13 Who is he ? u Who is she ? 
 15 Which is that ? 
 
 * Often pronounced by the common people, 
 t 
 
 33
 
 27, 28. 
 
 LESSON 7. EXERCISE 7. 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Lesson 7. 
 
 THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 [Some useful Imperatives.] 
 
 ST EDIT, lift up. Z*-z~^~ 
 
 NILLU, stand, stop A (nent.). 
 ! NIRRUTTU, sfogfactive). 
 KEL, hear.-~^,/y 
 , say, tell. 
 KODTJ, give. 
 <rr TA, give. 
 
 27. VOCABULARY. 
 su/r VA, come. 
 G>urr p6, go. 
 
 G)<SfTS3Sr<a/fr KONDUVA 
 
 nounced always 
 bring (=having taken come). 
 Q<sir3S3TQ>urr KONpupd, take 
 away (= having taken go). 
 
 (a.) The root^or crude theme} of the verb, is the simple 2nd person 
 singular imperative: Q&IT give! Qurr go ! 
 
 (&.) By adding a.ti (or ib), this becomes the honorific, or polite 
 imperative, thus : srti, QLJITLJO, jSl&j^jjLD, Q&(GIKLQ, Gi&tT&osvjLb, Q<sir 
 LO, jSgiigj^La, SUITQ^LO come (irregular, from root <a//r), <&rr(njiJc> (irre- 
 gular, from root j&rr') give, 
 
 (c.) By adding &err to the above, or 2-E/<sfr (or tsisen) to the root, 
 it becomes the plural, which is used as a still higher honorific, thus : 
 (cL/.T/E/iSisfr go ye. OT/E'<fS6rr lift ye. surr(f^isi<s&r come ye. 
 hear ye. Qf^'tr&j^isicseJr say ye. Q<srTi5i&r give ye. 
 bestow ye. 
 
 Exercise 7. 
 
 28. (a.) l ytE]Q& Qu 
 l(/y<oisr ? 4 Qstreisr [LJ] G^UUJSST 
 
 . 
 
 (&j LD fT JT 6SH & (& 
 
 ffrr. [The Tamil Lo^sar is more homely than the Sanskrit (&jLc>rr 
 
 ~ 
 
 (6.) 1 Come to the house (=come home). 2 When did he do [it] ? 
 3 Where [is] the great ox ? 4 Go to the river. 5 Lift it from the 
 mud. 6 Bring the little child here. 7 Take the physician's cow there. 
 
 8 Whom did that man call.? (Tarn, "that man whom he called.") 
 
 9 He (i)ur) is the shepherd's son. 10 That (jyausw) is the great 
 physician's son. 
 
 34
 
 LESSON 8. EXERCISE 8. 
 PLURAL OF NOUNS. 
 
 29, 30. 
 
 Lesson 8. 
 
 THE PLURAL NUMBER. 
 [Com. in. Gram. 69.] 
 29. (a.) The plural,, is formed by adding &r to the singular. 
 Thus, <s a house, <s&@rr houses. 
 
 i@ Osrr is strictly the pluralising particle of the neuter, or rather of the 
 Loiv-caste."] 
 
 (6.) Masculine nouns ending in esr mostly change ssr into ir. They 
 also very generally, but no doubt improperly, add <s&r also ; thus, 
 Lassfl&z&r a man, plural Loeafl^/r.sisrr, or sometimes simply and more 
 correctly L&ssftpfr. 'V*- *r^S-& j^-r^e.^/ 
 
 (c.) The cases of the plural are formed by adding the same termi- 
 nations as in the singular ; thus [Comp. App. *ii^ 
 
 Plur. Case 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 4 
 5 
 
 houses (after a transitive verb). 
 
 by (means of) houses. 
 
 (together) with houses. 
 
 to houses. eS'*(g5<f5<#/r<s/or houses. 
 
 >from houses. 
 
 (22) of houses. 
 
 with, at,-&?-ln houses. 
 houses ! 
 
 giP [Observe here the difference between the Tamil and the Sanskrit and 
 Classical languages^] 
 
 (d.) Sometimes the & is doubled ; thus, u&A&eir. [App. &.] / A 
 (e.) Final /i is always changed into /& before m ; thus, LainJc, + <ssfr= 
 Ldffikis&r. [Intro. II. ix. (II.)] 
 
 Exercise 8. 
 
 30. (-. 
 
 [Here <ssf 
 
 remains.] 
 
 -5) 
 
 Q -3F /T <o\) Gl . 
 
 [u] 
 
 12 
 
 uQ ssv .' a//r0fli76r. 
 
 - :
 
 31. LESSON 9. 
 
 GENDER AND NUMBER. PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 (&.) l Go with the merchants to the house. 2 The accountant's 
 good houses. 3 The new physician's old trees. 4 He ^oodo the big 
 bullocks in the jungles. 5 He saw those cows with the shepherd. 
 6 He learnt thus in the book. 7 They are merchants. 8 Where [are] 
 the merchants ? (6.) 9 Where are those (persons) ? 
 
 ^P [Tamil grammarians do not use the terms singular and plural at all. 
 g(Yj)-6B)L> ( one-ness) and (_jscraLo (= many-ness, j_J6u + L>) are used to 
 express the ideas. The Tamil arrangement will appear at first sight rather 
 complex. (See III. Gram. 52, 53.) 
 
 Nouns are divided into two CASTES (^Sferor) .!=. <i^L~-^*S) 
 
 I. gLOJfr^Ssror (e_UJ/f high+l$$ss3r class) = PERSONAL nonns. 
 
 class. For the transm. see App. xi. III.) = 
 
 IMPERSONAL nouns. 
 
 Personal nouns are the names of rational beings. 
 
 Impersonal nouns are all others. f I 
 
 There is a further division into five uireo (=part). ( ~ ^*-^< 
 These are r(l.) ^sacru.Tgu \_ = male-part], This includes the-\ 
 
 singular masculine of rationals. These belong 
 
 j (II.) Ousaru/reu \_= female-part]. Singular femi- I only to ^_ 
 nine of rationals. aj(rQ2essr 
 
 (III.) U&JITUIT60 [= many-persons-part,, 184]. 
 Plural epicene rationals. J 
 
 ^esrrnesr urr&J \_ = of -one-thing -par f]. 
 
 j 
 
 L 
 
 Person. Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1 j Mas. and fern. QGST EN. 
 2 j Mas. and fern. ^u AY . 
 C Mas. ^sar AN 
 "3 < i Fern, ^err AL 
 ( j Neuter <s>\.$i Ai>u . 
 
 g&ti 6M. 
 FT-fT, FFtTSefT IE, iKOAL. 
 ) 
 
 ( <4$""> =^fr^6fr AE, IEGAL. 
 jy, ^ GST A, ANA (seldom used). 
 
 lUury an 
 
 igT [These are fragmentary and modified forms of the personal and demon- 
 strative pronouns.] 
 
 fDsor = ^sorfSlssr, a poetic form]. Singular The?e belong 
 
 JJ j masculine, feminine or neuter of irrationals. I only to ^ 
 
 1 (V.) USVzSssr LJT6V) [ = of-many- things - part], i e ,T9^5sr. 
 
 Plural masculine, feminine or neuter of irra- 
 ^ tionals. J 
 
 Lesson 9. 
 
 31. The PRESENT TENSE of the simple verb. [Comp. App.-wi:] 
 (a.) We have seen (Lesson 3) that there are three parts in any 
 form of the present tense ; viz. the root, the middle particle denoting 
 time, and the personal termination. The following is a full list of the 
 ordinary personal terminations of the present tense :
 
 LESSON 9.' t 32-34. 
 
 THE PRESENT, INDICATIVE, ACTIVE. 
 
 (6.) The 3rd person neuter plural 
 substituted for it. [The same takes 
 (c.) The 3rd masculine plural in 
 speaking of an equal or superior. = 
 (cZ.) The 2nd plural in FFIT is usec 
 English, to a single person. FF/r&err 
 (e.) Almost every plural form, b 
 be used honorifically for the singula 
 of ^y <au sir (25, 29) are used for He 
 superior. 
 
 32. VOCABULARY. 'fc*-Si- t x i~ 
 
 (a.) Verbal roots which insert 
 the middle particle Qgp 
 simply: ( u ^_/^ \ 
 
 <su(/5 VARU, come. 
 QUIT PO, go. 
 Qfir&j^j COLLU, say. 
 QUIT PODU, put. 
 <ST(ipj2 ERU^IT, write. 
 
 is seldom used. The singular is 
 5 place in Greek.] 
 Qfr is used as & polite form when 
 ^/refr is the highest honorific. 
 . when we should use " you " in 
 is the highest honorific. 
 3th of verbs and pronouns, may 
 r. Thus cgysu/r, ^Qj/raefr, plurals 
 when speaking of an equal or 
 
 (b.) Verbal roots which insert 
 the middle particle Q^i 
 with < prefixed (or &ljpi): 
 si NADA, walk. , 
 
 / f 7^ -*~- 1 -^-^Lp 
 
 eo^s TAI. sew. ( / 
 
 QfJj TEY, rub. ^ 
 
 gS66)L- TUDAI, Wipe. 
 
 (gup- KUDI, drink. 
 eun & vAgi, read aloud. 
 ues)i PADAI, create, form. 
 g)(<5 IRU, be, sit. 
 
 inserted between the Q and the jpj } 
 ather pedantic. 
 y rarely) used as the temporal particle 
 
 nary form of the present tense of 
 
 33. [A nasal OTT may be enphouically 
 thus : Qscrjp] and &lzgrjrt], but this is r 
 In high Tamil ^ijlssr^i is also (but vei 
 of the present.] 
 
 34. A full paradigm of the ordi 
 
 Qffoj and LJUL : 
 
 Person. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st 
 
 Q<faj-Sl(Sfos3r I do 
 uujt--<8(oD68r I learn . 
 
 Q<gFiLi-i((yLo we do. 
 LJiy--&QG>(yLD we learn. 
 
 2nd 
 
 Q&uj-Q&uj thou doest 
 ui$.-&8(yuj thou learnest . 
 
 Q<piL-8fir ye or you do. 
 uu}--&ifin- ye or you learn. 
 
 3rdm. 
 
 Q&uj-Q(y6vr he does . 
 
 uufL-sStyssr he learns 
 u^.-&Q(yfr (politely 
 
 Qftu-Q(yff they do. 
 
 u(^&w(yfr they learn. 
 ) uL^.-<Bs8(yfr<s&T 
 
 
 87
 
 35-37. EXERCISE 9. LESSON 10. 
 
 THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Person. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 3rd/. 
 
 Qffaj-Sl(y6fr she does . 
 ui^--sSl(ye(Y she learns 
 
 As mas. 
 
 n. 
 
 QffiL-QjDgi it does 
 /> 
 uL9--&lfDgi it learns \ 
 
 (. 
 
 Q&iJu-Ssor/Dssr they do. 
 ui$--&issrrDG5r they learn (sel- 
 dom used). 
 LJip_-<ES/Dj2<s<srr (vulgar). 
 
 [Also ui$.&l6BrQrossr, &c., ui$-iL)n'iGsr(3rr<s8r, &c. For the remaining 
 poetical forms, see App. xii. (xii.)] 
 
 35. In very common Tamil uuf- s^gi and even U^IL/^ are used 
 for uu?-&irr)gi. It is necessary to understand these forms, even if we 
 do not use them. 
 
 , 
 
 V v f-i '^ , H~ > ^~i-^^ . Exercise 9. 
 
 36. (a.) l She does it. 2 They learn the book in the house (Tarn. 
 They in the house the book read). 3 We feed sheep in the jungle. 
 4 We go to the house now. 5 The mother brings the child to the 
 good merchant's house. 6 The child learns. 7 She sews. 8 The father 
 walks. 9 We learn them. 10 When does he learn this ? n They are 
 perishing. 12 Where are they perishing ? 13 He is going home. 
 14 The child walks. 15 How does the child walk ? 16 The boy reads 
 the book [aloud]. 17 They say so. 18 You [hon.] are coming here. 
 19 Write that in this book. 20 The cows drink in the river. 
 
 (6.) 
 
 urr < 
 
 (com. 
 
 (ourrSl(yetr. 9 prrtu efftLGla^ eu & (y sir . 10 Lo/r^^ 18 
 IT <35 sir . ^ Qsyrssr o)<5Esrr 
 < < -. 13 
 
 14 
 
 Lesson 10. 
 37. THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. (See 10.) 
 
 (a.) The pronouns when declined take the same case-terminations 
 as nouns ; but in the oblique cases they change the root, and are thus 
 irregular in Tamil, as in all other languages. 
 
 38
 
 EXERCISE 10. 37, 38. 
 THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 (6.) fsirsisr I, takes sitisr as its root in all cases of the singular, 
 except the 1st. In the plural it takes pirua for the 1st, and IELC> or 
 STua for the others. [La + <=sj#. App.-xirlH. (!T)] 
 Paradigm of the 1st personal pronoun. [Comp. App.-xuV]-Z\ & . 
 
 Case. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1 
 
 T 
 
 njiTU) or ^yT/assfr we. 
 
 2 
 
 OT^srSow me .... 
 
 ^^, ^^ us. 
 
 3 
 
 CTs<jr@)6u ~by me 
 sresr^o^y) together with me 
 
 nsLALatrev, 6Ti5i&(srriTGo by us. 
 gether with us. 
 
 4 
 
 ST<osr<s^ to me 
 srsBr<f55/7"<s/0r me . 
 
 S^tLf;!^*, 
 
 5 
 
 erssTooflgu from me . 
 
 pLbit&), <on5i&3iRj from us. 
 (tf) <5 3ji from us. 
 
 6 
 
 (oTzsr my ..... 
 
 <cTearj3g]SG)L-. tu of me. 
 
 tELcs of us, our. 
 
 LD(Lp6G)tUJ, GTIEl&efTOfuS, OUT. 
 
 7 
 
 OTew-^offeu in, with, at, to me 
 
 pLDuSeu, OT/a<ffisrflsu in, with, to, 
 at us. 
 
 in, with, to, at us. 
 
 (c.) In toTGisr the ssr is doubled before many terminations, and in the 
 4th case it becomes sr&sr. GTIEIS&T is quite regularly declined. 
 (d.) For the 6th case the simple stem is often used, when it makes 
 a kind of compound with the nouns to which it is attached, ^gj/^j is 
 sometimes used as a termination of the same case. 
 f JDjM! being t ne neuter pronoun that (10), and being in apposition with the noun 
 following, the form OTSW jj can only, strictly speaking, be used when the following 
 noun also is neuter. Thus: STSWJI/ <cO>s=(or&ir-\- j)j^i-\-es)S^niy hand. But 
 OTSBTjiJ i3<Sfr would be incorrect. In poetry ^ jjj is used for ^ayjj occasionally, 
 and ^ when the following noun is plural. Thus, OT@)jiJ 6Ji5 my hand, srgsr 
 6S)<ES&<3(?iny hands. Comp. III. Gram. 62.J 
 
 
 Exercise 10. 
 38. (a.) l <sriEi&<str i3^fr(oeu ! (18. a.) srasr <sff. 
 tr<x(3)& Q&rr. * srsifrG 1 ^ &irr. 5 rs LO tl i ^ Si <5V . 6 <sr<ssr 
 
 39
 
 39, 40. LESSON 11. 
 
 ADVERBS. INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 (6.) 
 
 10 Ol/n^]. (31. 
 
 \_ u ~\ 
 
 & &l (7t? IT . 
 <5\) (a LQ UJ &) JD ,] . [(oLDlLj^j. 35.1 
 
 (&.) iCome to me (7th case). 2 Where is their good bullock? 
 3 My bullock [is] here. 4 He does this for us. 5 Who does this for 
 us ? G How does he do this for us ? ? A good cow in our house. 
 8 They are destroying my new house. 9 How does he do it ? 10 I 
 [am] a physician. n This [is] my book. 12 Read it to me. 13 Learn 
 it with him. u He is wiping my new book. 15 They are rubbing 
 down your big bullocks. 1G These are my little books. 17 When does 
 our cow feed in the jungle ? 18 Where is my father ? 19 Which of us 
 (5th case) is reading (aloud) ? 20 Which of you (5th case) is learning? 
 21 The little child [is] in the house with them. 
 
 Lesson 11. 
 
 MUST. ADVERB AND INFINITIVE MOOD. ~ 
 39. VOCABULARY. 
 
 a munshi or native teacher 
 
 (Pers.). 
 
 lesson. 
 
 it is understood. 
 
 correctly. 
 
 pronounce (pr. 
 
 G/DSVT, past &-f&tf\ s $Q> s Gsr, fut. 
 S-tftfifiuQuGir. [Com. 15.] 
 Write out the whole of the 
 J understand present tense as in 34). 
 
 it (it is intelligible to me). ffliumii [^ffl + ^iu] rightly, 
 
 it is not intelligible. 
 
 I don't un- 
 stand it [to me, &c.]. 
 
 clearly. 
 
 it is necessary, one must 
 (vulg. G?ffljjp/L>), please. 
 
 it is unnecessary, one \- Defective verbal forms. 
 , need not, please don't 
 
 (vulg. (o<a/(653)/_D Or SLI;T(65C)LD). 
 
 These are also used in entreating. 
 
 40. A noun may generally be converted into what may.. .be called 
 an ADVERB by adding ^ib [or =$] to it. In English ply V is added 
 in the same way, but to an adjective. [Com. 136,,] &t~%$ ~J& 
 
 This is carried to a great extent ; thus, uisi(^=a share, but uisi 
 &rr&=in partnership .
 
 EXEECISE 11. 41, 42. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 41. To make a form answering in many respects to our INFINITIVE 
 MOOD : when any verb has &^i in the present tense, change s&ljru into 
 &s and when it has Sgu, add ^, ILI or <su to the root. Examples will 
 be found in Ex. 11. 
 
 Form for yourself the (so-called) infinitive mood of all the verbs in 
 the preceding lessons. 
 
 i^P We must read, 
 
 We to read it is necessary. 
 
 [The 'infinitive is here a verbal noun. The pronoun may be regarded as 
 forming with it a compound. Thus ftrnJa (5un~3i{E<5 = our reading. A. word may 
 intervene: thus, pmJD O^iisrotoiU/ruj <surr<fFli&& = our rightly reading. Beware 
 of using a dative : r&Ln<!5(3j SVIT&<S& Q><su<55GrLc> would mean, you must read to 
 us.-] 
 
 Exercise 11. 
 
 42. (&.) 1 <sy)UUJ6vr utp-&& Q 
 Qurr QeiismQiLL. 3 u/_//.<5r Q&ILJUJ (a /su em L^ IT i> 
 
 {j) /5 85 U U ff L- LD <ST 6VT <3S (?K <5 
 
 611 (Tfj S Qy IT . <SU fT <o3T J 63) ^ IL] LC> LI iS 6!T> ILJ ILJ LQ 
 15. f.] 10 LD/r/_S35t_ rSgy^jS (o<SU6KfT()LC>. 
 11 /5/TS3T (oTUUty- 2_ <3F & iff < <5 QeUSmQib ? 12 Q '<5)J <5KST1_ fT LO , 
 
 QUIT! 13 p&uuQ<o8r, ^sjo^f.y] Q&ujiLi (o<siJ6m()LCi. 14> prr 
 
 Q <su em L_ rr LD . 15 e_e3T zruu 
 
 [The terms Father and Mother are constantly used by Tamilians as signs of 
 respect and affection ; a missionary is always called father, and his wife and 
 female children mothers.'] 
 
 (&.) l You must read rightly. 2 Read rightly. 3 You must pro- 
 nounce clearly. 4 Speak clearly. 5 Do it rightly. 6 You must do it 
 rightly. 7 The little boy learns the lesson. 8 He does not understand 
 the lesson. (To him, &c.) 9 This must be done. 10 This must not 
 be done.' ($)<S<S<P Q&LUILI [infTmoodJ Q^^W^J) n How must I 
 do this? 12 ^Vhen must they do this ? l3 He~must rub down our 
 bullocks now. 14 The new munshi is coming now into the house. 
 15 The physician understands it well. 16 You must go home. 17 Don't 
 read. 18 Don't walk in the mud. 19 The accountant does not under- 
 stand that account. 
 
 41
 
 43-45. LESSON 12. EXEKCISE 12. 
 
 "is" AND "IS NOT." 
 
 Lesson 12. 
 
 AFFIRMATION AND NEGATION. 
 
 43. fiAr tfere is or are j (i rreg ular verbal forms). 
 
 is (or are) not j v 
 , wo. 
 
 <$ Loffisi&eir e_<s3sr <Aere are frees &ere. 
 < Ldjrisi<s<s(r @6xj3sv> fAere are no trees here. 
 tf&ose are wo trees. 
 
 As iu Latin, I Tmye is often expressed by a dative with the verb to be. 
 [Conip. lesson 77.] /) 
 
 44. The difference between the two negatives, J^suSsu and ^eueu, 
 is that the former denies the EXISTENCE of any thing, while .jysueu 
 denies something that is said concerning it. ^)6xj2a) denies the SUBJECT : 
 trees are not here, ^gyeusu denies the PREDICATE : those (which are 
 Jtaere) are not trees (but something else). 
 
 [The same distinction^obtains between ILLA and ALLA. in Kanarese (McKer- 
 rell, p. 182), between KADU and L^DU in Telugu (see Brown's Gram. p. 193), 
 and between A YIN and LO or AL in Hebrew (see Nordheimer's Gram. 1062- 
 1065.)] 
 
 Exercise 12. 
 
 45. (a.) 1 <fTL-Lp-(a6V La ff IE! <S STT 
 
 (oLDlLJ 
 
 (6.) l There is a good physician here. 2 There is a cow in that 
 jungle. :} He is not a little child. 4 Put that here. 5 You must pjit_ 
 >(Gufn-=^ that there. 6 We must take this up -^&^f^y:"^T 'must 
 read with the munshi. 8 We must pronounce clearly. 9 The little 
 boy must come (oj.fr), to my house. 10 The mother must not walk 
 OrLgg) in the mud. \ n She has children ? 12 There are cows there. 
 13 Where [are] thecow\? c 
 
 ^ 
 
 rr 
 
 j.
 
 // 
 
 LESSON 13. EXEECISE 13. 46-49. 
 
 INTERROGATION. 
 
 Lesson 13. 
 
 INTERBOGATIVES. 
 
 46. When we wish to ask a question, we can generally do so by 
 putting =gj or g& at the end o/ an affirmative sentence, after the manner 
 of the Latin enclitic ne. 
 
 n i ( <sar!E(n?m? does he come? 
 
 <^,, vQQ&er he comes [J^Q^f &f but does he come ? 
 
 These particles may be appended to any word on which stress is to 
 be laid; thus, ^jsu^s) su^^irsir ? did HE come? ^^JUUL^-ILUT ? is it so? 
 
 ^ simply asks the question, g often suggests that there is an 
 alternative or doubt. 
 
 uj and a; are inserted when necessary, to prevent hiatus, as in 18. 
 a, 6. >^^_ t-c/ ? ^<Jt, j -i_ ^^-/rfe^C^^^^-i^-L^-iaL^^-i ^ <^-~*-*^. <r_/ '/ 
 
 [A. and 6 are used in precisely the same way in Telugu. In Kanarese A and 
 fi are both used as the Tamil oj, and 6 as the Tamil gg. alone is found in 
 Malayalim.] 
 _ 47. In Lesson 6 we see that er also is an interrogative letter, ^~/ 
 
 <& and LU if wfeee- prefixed to words are sometimes used in the same 
 way. cf$/r (or ujfrir) is commonly used for " who? " s 
 
 OTOTTSCT is used for "what?" and differs from sr^j which means 
 rather, " whether of the two ? " or " which among many ? " fesr is 
 why, 214. 
 
 OTisarssTLQ is used for <^<sm-m occasionally, and is then declined like a 
 noun. ^ 
 
 48. VOCABULARY. </i^^2 
 Lunrujresr,, God. (The Christian &<G*esr I believed ; fut. <aS) 
 
 word for GOD absolutely; Q><5 ^eun^luQu^sr I shall believe. 
 
 sneer is A GOD. &[rG!<SLieri!LJff6Br The Christian usage of this word 
 
 is used by Eomanists. It is is not quite -jw^we).-- - ^.'^Ct^-z^. 
 
 Sanskrit. f^eij + FF<swujresr= \ ffigi&gpun industry. 
 
 universal Lord.) ffi^i&^iuurraj (40.) industriously. 
 
 believe (pres. S$<SF<SU /<-)<& L <ssrreijin<3srrjr<ssr a watchman. (/ 
 I believe; past <sl&Jir 
 
 43
 
 50. LESSON 14. 
 
 FAMILIAR EXAMPLES OF ELLIPSIS. 
 
 13 
 
 ? 14 $)&] LDITLC>, ^yeveueurr? lo 
 16 
 
 (21. h. 3.) 
 
 (&.) i When will you read ? [15 /. 31. a.] 2 Is that my lesson ? 
 3 Where is the munshi ? 4 What does the physician say ? 5 Is the 
 watchman there ? 6 The watchman is not there. 7 He is not the 
 watchman. 8 Who is the watchman ? 9 Is there a watchman ? 10 Is 
 there mud in the river? n Are there trees in the jungle? 13 Are 
 there children in my house ? 13 A re there not little children in the 
 father's house ? u Dost thou believe in God ? 
 
 Lesson 14. >t ^^L^^-, ^^c <- 
 ELLIPSIS IN CONVERSATION. 
 50. In common conversation the signs of the cases are often 
 interchanged ; and those of the 2nd and 6th cases are sometimes 
 omitted altogether. 
 
 In the higher style of Tamil this is very frequent. 
 
 Q<srr(b> give [me] the salt (not S-U60LJ=e.LJi 
 
 Q<s,T65sraj/r bring me [some] water 
 'IT is commonly pronounced <^sgbwB&, and Q(SSiT6Ssr(blsufr becomes 
 
 Q&LU<rresr, he committed sin (not utTWs;eG)<5<{F O^uJ^/raJr)- Such 
 forms may be considered as compounds.^. _ 
 
 1 1 The learner should consider carefully whether the omission of the 
 Jcasal sign would^ occasion ambiguity. If not, he may omit it in most 
 
 [ Cases. L~ A/t--<^-y^ to ^t-~ *^> L~- jfi-*-~-*^- 
 
 From this must be excepted nouns signifying rational beings 
 (a-iu/f^Ssssr), both mas. and fern., which have the case termination in 
 full, in common Tamil. In poetry ellipsis is the rule. 
 
 It may be stated, as a rule, that the sign of the 2nd case sing, of 
 impersonal nouns (^oV^Ssssr) should not be expressed. 
 
 Compare this with the usage of Indo-European languages in which neuter 
 nouns have the nominative and accusative alike. 
 
 After nouns of number the plural sign &<srr also is, in the same way, 
 often omitted ; thus, 
 
 He built four houses. (Com. 173.) 
 
 /sirgjj Quiuir GujSjSrrfr&err. 
 
 Four persons came. (Com. Camp. Tel. Gram. 158.) 
 If Remark that no ambiguity can arise here. 
 
 44
 
 EXERCISE 14. 
 EXAMPLES OF ELLIPSIS. 
 
 51-54. 
 
 51. iL before < may become @ "^ T^e nasal is changed into that of 
 & isi > the class to which the following 
 
 <s ]s ) consonant belongs. 
 
 LD may disappear altogether. 
 
 ST The whole system of the transmutations of letters, their insertion and 
 their elision, is very complicated. It must, however, be thoroughly understood 
 by every student of the poetical dialect. These changes are gradually going out 
 of use. A few only which affect the pronunciation are retained. They will all be 
 explained as occasion requires. Compare also App. sit / V 
 
 52. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ^sscrffissf/f cold ^vater (^sscr cool, a guard or watch, 
 
 /IT water). a watchman]). 
 
 LJd^jn PATTU, ten. <J^QLC>L-\ IRUMBU, iron. 
 s-ULj UPPU, salt. 
 
 PAVAM, sin. r 
 
 LU CEY, commit. "~^ cSV^- beat (pres. -<&&lQrr)ssr ) past 
 
 PAXAM, money. -gsQ^ssr, fut. -u(oujr). / f*/ 
 
 (Ssu^etr VELAI, time, opportunity. Lj/rjrti BARAM, a burden. 
 
 Gsu'Sioi><ss<sfTrrspr VELAIKKARAN, a ussai^. BAXDi, a bandy. a^'-t~^- a ^,^ 
 
 servant (srriresr means a doer,an Q&ULC, CEBAM, prayer, -j ^ 
 agent ; Qeu^ev work. [So streu) 
 
 53. ev before may become /D ; thus, 
 
 Exercise 
 54. (a.) l ufrL^ir-T?rTp-p<5rr<5vr 
 
 s<35 [or i>/rf_^-<s<zj Q eu essr i_ rr LD . 10 Gresr esu 
 
 (6.) T He is learning a lesson in the house. 2 He is reading a book 
 in the jungle. 3 Does he learn a lesson ? 4 Is there water in the 
 house ? 5 1 want [some*] salt (to me salt is necessary). 6 He sins. 
 7 Bring the money to me. 8 Eead this to me. 9 Call my servant. 
 ll? Bring ten loads of salt. n Did he give money to the servants? 
 
 * The word some is seldom expressed in Tamil, unless it means emphatically a 
 little. 
 
 45
 
 55, 56. 
 
 LESSON 15. 
 
 
 
 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Lesson 15. 
 
 
 
 PAST TENSE. FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 55. The personal terminations of the present tense are used also 
 
 for the past and future tenses, with a slight exception. The middle 
 
 particle determines the tense. (Carefully go over again Lessons 3 
 
 and 9.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 | Write out in full the pa 
 
 st and future tenses of all the verbs you 
 
 /meet with, except the 3rd 
 
 person future, singular and plural, which 
 
 1 will be given in 72. 
 
 56. The middle particle of the present is Sjjpi or &8jgi. 
 
 For this 
 
 a few general rules will be given, but the dictionary must be con- 
 sulted. The middle particles of the past and future are ascertained 
 
 -fey-the root and the present. 
 
 
 
 The following GENERAL 
 
 RULES must be attended to : 
 
 I. 8^1 of the present should have fig in the past and 
 
 QJ in the 
 
 future. These are intransitive and WEAK forms. But there are some 
 
 exceptions. " ^ t 
 
 Ex.: 
 
 r* 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 Root. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 ADAI, 
 
 I obtain. 
 
 I obtained. 
 
 I shall obtain. 
 
 To obtain 
 
 Obtain. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Thus are conjugated the verbs ^jn& know, & give, &QG>L- churn, ^ 
 
 es)n) smite, 
 
 a9(y> fall, 
 
 -jufi? pass off or away, and a large number of others. 
 
 IE. Boots in a. have S c 
 
 PJ in the present, ( 
 
 )3r in the past, 
 
 and a; in 
 
 the future. These forms are common to both transitive and intran- 
 
 sitive verbs. 
 
 
 They may be called MIDDLE forms. 
 
 Ex.: 
 
 
 
 
 
 Root. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Fnt. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 . 
 
 Qn> 
 
 
 
 
 ADANGD, 
 
 Submit, 
 go under. 
 
 I submit. 
 
 I submitted. 
 
 I will submit. 
 
 To 87/6- 
 
 . miL_L. 
 
 $aT [Final a. before, the vowel of a following word, or of a termination is 
 often elided, for the sake of euphony; thus, ^si^iSi(^-\- (jtisar: 
 This is not done when g_ is preceded by one short syllable ; thus,
 
 RULES 
 
 LESSON 15. 
 FOR FORMING TENSES. 
 
 56. 
 
 U&s&ssr, not u&zsr. Comp. II 
 It is added euphonically to aid th< 
 Malaya^m.] 
 III. csS)jj/ of the present 
 future. These harsher forms 
 are a few exceptions to this. 
 
 These 
 Ex.: 
 
 I. GRAM. 24. The a. is evidently not radical. 
 ; enunciation. ,jy is added in the same way in 
 
 requires <sp in the past, and uu in the 
 are mostly transitive [com. 160]. There 
 
 are STRONG forms. 
 
 Root. 
 
 Pres. 
 I bite. 
 
 
 Past. 
 
 Fut, 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Bite. 
 
 
 I bit. 
 
 I will bite. 
 
 To bite. 
 
 SPECIAL RULES. 
 (I.) Roots ending in ,jy (and the greater number of the few in ^) 
 take sS^ji in the present, and follow GENERAL RULE I. in the past 
 and III. in the future. /"JV*. 1 
 STRONG in present, future and infinitive ; WEAK in past only. 
 Ex.: 
 
 Root. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 f5 1 NADA, 
 
 Walk. 
 
 I walk? 
 
 '-- 
 
 I walked. 
 
 rBiLjQuztsr 
 I shall walk. 
 
 To walk. 
 
 TLnfT EMA, 
 
 Exult. 
 
 I exult. 
 
 
 I exulted. 
 
 I shall exult. 
 
 To exult. 
 
 (II.) Roots ending in eg, , jy, preceded by one short syllable, and 
 which take Sgii in the present, are exceptions te-BailfiJL^jis^far as_ 
 concerns the past tense, to form which they simply double the consonant 
 and drop the a.. Some of them admit of the regular form also. 
 
 IRREGULAR WEAK forms. 
 Ex.: 
 
 Root. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 
 Past. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 4(3) PUGU, 
 
 Enter. 
 
 LjtyjSlQfDGvr 
 I enter. 
 
 I entered 
 (but also, and 
 more commonly, 
 
 I will enter. 
 
 To enter.
 
 56. 
 
 LESSON 15. 
 IRREGULAR FORMS. 
 
 Hoot. PJ 
 
 es. Past. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 LJ PADU, LJ& 
 
 Suffer. I s\ 
 
 }Q>pssr uiLQi6sr 
 iffer. I suffered. 
 
 I shall suffer. 
 
 / ;/ 
 
 To suffer. 
 
 Gujpy PERRTI, Qu^!w(SpSSr ' QupQpsyr 
 
 Obtain, bring I obtain. I obtained, 
 forth, or beget. \ 
 
 QujpGeueir 
 I shall obtain. 
 
 Gup 
 To obtain. 
 
 Ceasb^end. I c 
 
 *L ^JiWar 
 
 
 *e 
 
 To c\we. 
 
 -A 
 
 (III.) Boots in esr, j, eu, jji'j sOTj <CT; have mostly Sjpi in the 
 present, <s in the past, and in the future & alter a vowel, and u after 
 a consonant. There are certain changes which take place for the sake 
 of euphony. 5 " c 
 
 IRREGULAR WEAK forms. 
 
 igT [a. coining after ssr becomes p. 
 
 b. When eu and ^ come together, they become eisrjf). 
 
 c. ^ coming after asjr becomes L_. 
 
 d. When gfr and ^ come together they become SOTL!.] (App. xi.) 
 
 j Root - ! 
 
 1 i &&* TIN, 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Fat. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Eat. 
 
 2 FFgsi !NTJ, 
 Bring forth 
 (of cattle). 
 
 3 G^eu ?EL, 
 
 (?o, pass. 
 
 Gpesr 
 
 4 it^x; KOL, 
 
 fl 
 Kill. 
 
 BT (a.) 
 
 - of the root 
 dropped). . 
 
 (6.) 
 
 (a. of the root 
 dropped.) 
 
 (c.)
 
 LESSON 16. EXERCISE 15. 
 REGULAR FORMS. 
 
 57. 
 
 Boot. 
 
 Pros. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 ^<sfr AL, 
 
 [^G 
 Rule. 
 
 (A) 
 
 (a. of the root 
 dropped.) 
 
 7 Qsir&T KOL, 
 
 Have, contain, 
 i hold, buy. \ 
 
 ^P Every exception and irregularity will be illustrated in the following 
 exercises, which should be frequently gone over. 
 
 Lesson 16. 
 
 57. & Eegular forms. Conip. 56, 1. 
 
 Pres. Past. Fut. 
 
 *^=_\ 
 
 Sjpi fcp eu 
 
 -^ ] 
 
 : : ; i- i 
 
 [These WEAK forms are mostly INTKANSITIVE : many exceptions.] 
 Exercise 15. 
 
 ((],. I (a LDILJLJLJ Ssfl I 2>Sl6\) ^Stf CoLDLUWOO^], 6TLJLJLQ- 
 
 _gy LCI <S1J IT /T & GYT . f56\)6\) 
 
 IT- SUIT IT [not very common]. 
 "J =sy fSi 'toiv /r GST \ 7 streuparririT 
 
 l UJ 6vr 
 
 10 
 
 u <SGST < <ss) <$ ILJ LG 
 
 (6.) J The day has passed away. 2 We must churn in the house. 
 8 They perished in the jungle. 4 God knows our sins. 5 The accountant 
 and the watchman will obtain those cows from him. 6 The watchman 
 perished with his son. 7 The good boy knows the lesson correctly. 
 8 1 know it by the lesson. 9 You must not smite the child. 10 The 
 bullock fell down. n He fell in the mud. 
 
 * j5trtsrr = the 24 hours. u&) = the day time, 12 hours. 
 
 49
 
 58. 
 
 LESSON 17. 
 PAST AND FUTUBE : WEAK FORMS. 
 
 Lesson 17. 
 WEAK FOEMS with irregular past tense. 
 
 58. VOCABULABY. 
 
 Exceptions to the FIRST GENERAL RULE. 56. I. 
 
 Boot. 
 
 Pres.' 
 
 Past. 
 
 Fnt. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 r r\. <". ,.,'.C) 
 
 
 QuiL PEY, 
 Bain. 
 
 Q&tL CEY, 
 
 Do. 
 
 p'u NEY, 
 
 Weave. 
 
 05H5U VAI, 
 
 Abuse. 
 
 Qrossr 
 
 ~*~ v/ 
 
 ij 
 
 n. 
 
 ; f ^ A, Become _ 
 
 [=g@ AGU], (<=^C5 i [occasion- 
 
 'ie finished, G/osar). i allv also 
 
 completed. [Co. 268.] 
 
 r]. ^ 
 
 du/T r6, (^o CoU/rS j G> u/rd screw- 
 (Cou/To^, Co/DSiJr ; [poet. Cou/r 
 
 GLJ,T@). i [Co. 258.] i uSCJewarj. 
 
 17. 
 
 [or 
 
 sr [or 
 
 Qsu VE, 
 Burn, 
 
 -^ 
 
 [or 
 
 /T N6, 
 
 , suffer, 
 
 Q&UJUJ 
 
 CoU,T(5 
 
 QlElTS 
 
 * In all these forms, which are rather pedantic, gj is inserted for the sake of 
 euphony. 
 
 50
 
 EXERCISE 16. LESSON 18. 
 PAST AND FUTURE : STRONG FORMS. 
 
 59, 60. 
 
 MARAI, rain. 
 [ Gj5GrQ63srLu VENNEY, butter 
 (Q<su<sfr white, GpiL ghee). 
 ssr EN, why? 
 
 HL-ISKQJ PUDAVAI, a woman' s cloth, 
 
 garment. 
 
 p'foo TALAI, a head. 
 a>/r0u KAL, leg and foot. 
 
 Exercise 16. 
 
 59. (a. 
 
 otn^f 
 ,14] 
 
 [QuiLJtLI^], 
 Q<FlLl(o<Sl]6Vr. A 
 
 7*-^ 
 ,35]. f^ 
 
 [or 
 
 Lesson 18. 
 
 STRONG FORMS, with strong and weak inflexion. 
 60. VOCABULARY. 
 The SECOND GENERAL EULE. Exceptions to 56. II. Eoots in &.. 
 
 I. 1 
 
 2 
 
 Boot. 
 
 LJ PADU, 
 
 Lie down. 
 
 a. upu, 
 Clothe, put on. 
 
 Pros. 
 
 I lie down. 
 
 Past. 
 
 I lay down. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 I will lie 
 down. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 To lie 
 down. 
 
 And so all in a_ } having ^sQ^j in the present 
 
 
 
 ' off /_ () <Z (<9j LJ (o U tf (o <S1J fT Lb . 8 .Jjy/5^ LD/r(S) 
 
 <ST GOT & (&j <& *B(j6\) Q K IT Q p jg] [(? ' ff> IT (&j ga always, in common | 
 talk]. (I suffer pain in my head.) lx ^gy/e/G** G ) /_y/T(S3)^3) ? | 
 
 (6.) l It rains. 3 His leg pains. 3 She is churning for butter. 
 4 He will die in the jungle. 5 Did the house burn? 6 Who died? 
 7 When did he die ? 8 When will they go home (to the house) ? 
 9 [Is] this your leg ? 10 Why do they revile the watchman ? n They 
 weave cloths in the house. 12 Who [are] you ? (You who ?) 13 Who 
 [is] there ? u Go to the watchman's house.
 
 V 
 
 60. 
 
 LESSON 18. 
 PAST AND FCTUBE : STBOXG FORMS. 
 
 /r TfK [or 
 Remove, be 
 cleared off. 
 
 6 ; <etiir TAVIB [or 
 j^aSI], Remove,*, 
 put avxiy. 
 
 7 j su/Ti^ VAR [or i 
 su/r(Lpl, Prosper. 
 
 humble. 
 
 p TAVAR [or 
 
 . _:,cd 
 
 56.1. 
 
 56.1. 
 
 56. I. 
 
 eunry) 
 
 ^4<i so a?Z roof^m /r or jp f which may optionally add s_. 
 
 POEU, 
 
 /^ARTI, 
 
 TFeep. 
 
 roesr 
 
 [Com. 58. L] 
 
 ; Quirjr 
 
 Qen 
 
 a- to 
 
 QflTQg 
 
 QGUSST 
 
 RULE : weak forms, short monosyllables in Qf, (5 or dj. 
 
 $&- Roots in Q or ^ [except ^0, au^], or iu, and the root gz2u, preceded 
 I by one short syllable, and having the present in Qgi, take single ^ in the past 
 , and eu in the future. [Compare 58. I.] 
 
 52
 
 EXERCISE 17. LESSON 19. 61,62. 
 
 PAST AND FUTURE : BOOTS IN S-, IRREGULAR. 
 
 L^ VASTIRAM, a garment. (LpLpEiatreo the knee, from the knee 
 , a village. to the ankle. 
 
 a man of the village. L/^^Io MURAM, a cubit. 
 
 [ 29, &.] people of the [sirev KAL, 
 
 Exercise 17. 
 61. (a.) 
 
 >S3T ? ^ <oTIHl(]><35 U g& & IT G5T f ^ < IT L!_ lo_ ffO 
 /oil STT/T /5 So ^1 . E IT L LQ-.\o S\) <oT<o5T<55T LD1TLQ <5ll 61T IT f5 S < ff^J ^)^ 
 
 (& jl('rF)&&l(y'j5) ? ^ umsiiLb JB rr fB tB a$ . ^ urreuLd 
 ! ^) s\) Ssi) (u rr ? 9 ggrr/r/r/r en ir Lp rs ^ rr rr & err . 
 
 11 jSn'UJ <oi 'ssr '<5sr fB jsl p & rr &* [or 
 
 Q> u IT Q Qy s$r . 1* (ojssijfjssr^ Q fB rr (LC> <s rr ssr . * 5 gsrr /r /r /f 
 
 (&.) x The child grew. 3 The trees grow in the jungle. 3 Why do 
 you crawl ? 4 The villagers will plough the jungle. 5 The villagers 
 must worship God. 6 You must not crawl; you must walk. ? I was 
 in the house with the accountant. 8 Shall I flourish ? 9 Must I 
 become humble ? 10 They must be industrious. n Have you a pain 
 in your head, or in your foot ? 12 Is the cow dead, or the bandy 
 bullock ? 13 The villagers lay down [to sleep] in the jungle. 
 
 Lesson 19. 
 
 [Comp. Lesson 51.] 
 62. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Examples of the SECOND GENERAL EULE, 56. II. Koots in 
 These may be called middle forms. 
 
 [Both transitive and intransitive verbs are found in this class.] 
 
 * From srssnssTLo, 4th case sing. [Comp. 47.] g)sar inserted. [18. e. 
 m<s = for ivhat, wherefore.
 
 &^ 
 
 n~^1&y JL^^A^^^, ; J 6 '$ ??9ExJ ^-*~J *^- 
 /l^t-fc-T^Z-. sr^^L^^-,' fr*t - 6) /U^_ ** ~ 6) V ^e^. 
 
 J-^- *'- fc^-*+* ^^i/^^^ru, ^ 
 
 62, 63. 
 
 LESSON 19. EXERCISE 18. 
 PAST AND FUTUBE : MIDDLE FORMS. 
 
 Root. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 AKZU 
 
 [from 
 
 cowe], Make, 
 cause to become, 
 
 convert into. 
 
 3 Gu* PE?U, 
 ' Speak, converse 
 with. 
 
 TEDU, 
 
 7 Qsitt)^. TETTU, 
 
 [from G><$)) 160 
 d.] Comfort. 
 
 8 il KATTU, 
 
 Tie, build, tie on. 
 
 ' .a/Til KATT-J, 
 
 [from snem se 
 160, /. o.] SAew. 
 
 10 
 
 9ELUTTU, aw 
 <o gro, expend. 
 [160. d. 161.] 
 
 (3** 
 
 G6BT68T 
 
 96BBU, boil-ed rice. \ 
 63. (a.) i 
 
 ABI^I, rate rice. 
 
 Exercise 18.
 
 LESSON 20. 
 PAST AND FUTURE : STRONG FORMS. 
 
 64. 
 
 (she made rice: she converted 
 
 10 
 
 into 
 
 (6.) T We must build a new house. 3 Tie the cow there. s Who 
 
 tied the bullock ? * Where did he write the book ? 3 The munshi 
 
 wrote it. 6 He seeks a physician. "Who made this? 8 Who did 
 
 : this? 9 Show the hrmse to the watchman. 10 You must comfort 
 
 ; your good mother. n Did she seek the little boy ? 12 What do they 
 
 seek here ? 13 We will write clearly to the munshi. u Has the 
 
 mother boiled the rice ? 13 Did he seek the cow, or did he go to sleep 
 
 in the house ? 
 
 Lesson 20. 
 
 64. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Regular STRONG forms. Examples of the THIRD GENERAL RULE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 sQ^i 
 
 <, 
 
 rUU 
 
 ss 
 
 [These are mostly transitive : strengthened forms of those in 57 
 some exceptions.] 
 
 Root. 
 
 1 LJT/T PAR, 
 
 Behold. 
 
 urrrr- 
 
 I behold 
 
 Preserve. 
 
 MANNI, 
 
 Forgive. 
 
 Save, deliver. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 LaSiJTOTfi-^S// 
 
 Past. 
 
 Fnt. 
 
 ^ 
 
 I shall 
 behold. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 urnr-sa 
 To behold. 
 
 * For Tamil houses originally consisted simply of leaves, &c. tied together 
 t In common talk sn'fr is nsed often for this root ; thus, imp. hon. 
 preserve ye. 
 
 J The root Lnzzrssfi requires a dative of the person, as in Latin. 
 
 55
 
 65, 66. 
 
 EXERCISE 19. LESSON 21. 
 PAST AND FUTURE : STRONG FORMS. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Exercise 19. 
 
 err . ismu 
 
 snumssr 
 
 & (7t? IT a err rr ? * iQ^ErrQeu sr esr & (&j 
 i>.' * <55/r0x)s!nB<5B & il <s fB IT esr . \ 
 
 Q < 
 
 . 
 " * 
 
 65. (6.) * I saw (looked at) him in the house. 2 1 shall see him 
 then. 3 Did you see it. ? 4 We must preserve the children. 5 God 
 forgives our sins. 6 Forgive us our sins. 7 Deliver us from evil. 
 8 This [is] evil. 9 We must not do evil. 10 He will bathe in the 
 house. u He took care of the house. 12 Pay the money now to the 
 accountant. 13 He has done evil for money. 
 
 Lesson 21. 
 
 66. VOCABULARY. 
 The FIRST SPECIAL EULE. 56. (I.) Roots in ^ and 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Put. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 a*), 
 
 -M 
 
 LJU 
 
 ea 
 
 jy [Verbs of this class are mostly transitive : many exceptions ; but an 
 action is mostly implied.^
 
 LESSON 21. EXERCISE 20. j-lT 
 PAST AND FUTURE : BOOTS IN JDj AND *%}, 
 
 - 66,67. 
 
 Root. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 LD/D MARRA, 
 
 Forget. 
 
 I forget. 
 
 U/D PARRA, 
 
 ' Fly. 
 
 Past. 
 
 1 forgot. 
 
 Ifly. 
 
 U D 
 
 I flew. 
 
 <S6U KAXA, 
 
 [Both trans, an 
 
 intransitive] 
 
 Mingle, coalesce. 
 
 INDEX L] 
 
 $0 TIRE A, 
 
 Open [trans.], 
 
 be open 
 [sometimes]. 
 
 <l KADA, 
 
 Pass over, trans- 
 gress. 
 
 iff) PIRRA, 
 
 Be born, gofortk.\ [co. 257.] 
 
 $)>D IRRA, 
 Pass away, die. 
 
 Fnt. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 I shall To forget, 
 forget. 
 
 UfO-uQussr 
 I shall fly. 
 
 Sjp-uGussr 
 
 To fly. 
 
 u/T6u PAL, milk. 
 
 ., , Exercise 20. 
 
 JTT^ A-T,^- *-**- S~7 
 
 67. (a.) x Open the door. 2 They crossed over the river. 3 She 
 mingled water with the milk. 4 The little boy forgot the old lesson. 
 5 1 forgot the book. 6 You must not walk so. 7 Iii that water and 
 milk are mingled. 8 The accountant walked with the watchman. 
 9 The bird flies there. 10 She looked at the little bird. n A child is 
 born. 12 The servant died then. 13 The bird is there. u Where is 
 the milk. 
 
 57
 
 9 ? 
 
 68, 69. LESSON 22. EXERCISE 21. 
 
 PAST AND FUTURE : IRREGULAR FORMS. 
 
 uj Qssr ! 
 
 9 /K^ 
 
 LL>65ll5<oSr 
 
 fb L- U U /T (g) 
 
 Lesson 
 68. VOCABULARY. 
 
 The SECOND SPECIAL RULE. 56. (II.),, 
 
 Boots in , o, jr. Pres. in Sjz/, past il, <s, /D doubled, fut. a.', 
 inf. .jy. [Chiefly transitive.] 
 
 Root. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 vipu, 
 .Leave. 
 
 QUIT 
 
 Ptrf. 
 
 ipu, 
 
 NADU, 
 
 Jj; ARBU, 
 
 Cease. 
 
 I leave. 
 
 [co. 254.] 
 
 Iput. 
 [co. 256.] 
 
 [co. 263.] 
 
 Past. 
 
 Ileft. 
 
 I shall leave. 
 
 G> u rr iLQ 1 
 I put. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Qeussr 
 I shall put. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 To leave. 
 
 QuiTL- 
 
 To put. 
 
 ?e 
 
 9* 
 
 (ip To this rule there are some exceptions : QLJ/TJD PORRU, bear a burden, bear 
 I with, endure, makes .&Q(rr)z8r, -pQpsisr, -uQuesr : so ^ jj/ ORRU, mortify, 
 afflict, punish. These follow 64. 
 
 jSLlL-Jterr (^command; rsirp^i NATTU, young plants fit for transplanting; 
 gpsgr^tf M6NBP, three; ^L_t_^etr $ Q^KATTALAI, } vouchsafe, grant graciously, 
 a.rr CL, within ; QLJ^J/ fER&v^ofitain, Heget, bear offspring; <grj>Lo CUMAI, burden; 
 .SLD QUMA ( 66.), bear, carry. 
 
 Exercise 21. 
 69. (a.) x sresrSs 
 
 rsr HIT eQt_(o6U6S3n_n'LC>. 
 
 * This is often used ; thus, 
 broken. 
 
 [123. a.] <Ae rope has
 
 LESSON 23. 
 PAST AND FUTURE : IRREGULAR. 
 
 70. 
 
 (He 
 
 commanded=:}ie vouchsafed it thus. Observe the idiom.) 5 
 
 (jlS){B& ff>t i .?fnr ^)/_(?ay63ar/i. ^ s>err IT rr IT IK rr rp jni 
 
 <9> Gff ( 1/ . ) ffV 6i/ GW &f~ 6tfT <5B C&\ c5F \o <f fT Jftl ([) / / /T STT [IdlOm . ] 
 
 ^rrssr. 9 /^srrSsrrLV Qup(y<sir (she bare a child. Idiom). 10 
 
 (&.) x What shall I give you? 2 Why do they plant that tree 
 there ? 3 Why did the villagers leave the village ? * Who suffered ? 
 5 What did you obtain by this sin? 6 He went into the jungle. 
 7 Where did he plant ? 8 Serve out the rice. 9 Did he put it on his 
 head or on his foot ? 10 Don't meddle in that business. n You must 
 bear your burden ! 
 
 Lesson 23. 
 
 70. VOCABULARY. 
 
 (I.) The THIRD SPECIAL BULB, 56. (III.), and irregular forms in 
 general. ALL OF CONSTANT USE. 
 
 Pres. -Sign. In the past the final consonant of the root often 
 changed and jb or tl inserted. The fut. takes LJ or a/. Inf. in ^y. 
 
 [These verbs arelomewhat irregular, but they are few and easily 
 acquired.] 
 
 Boot. 
 
 6Tg3T EN, 
 
 Say. 
 
 VEL, Conquer. 
 
 Q&IT60 (ggl] 
 KOL, Kill. 
 
 $!j (jy/) NIL, 
 Stand, stop. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 (4) 
 
 Inf. 
 
 L/Rt> 
 
 ejLu^'
 
 
 
 70. 
 
 LESSON 23. 
 PAST AND FUTURE : IRREGULAR. 
 
 Root. 
 
 <56U KAL, 
 
 Learn. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Fat. Inf. 
 
 <?OL, 
 Speak, say. 
 
 Q&frssrQosrzsr 
 Q<s<srssi [irreg.] 
 
 Q<?[re\)syj 
 
 KAN, See. 
 
 [co. 260.] ! [irreg~] 
 
 SirsxrQussr 
 
 Qs<KfT KEL, 
 
 Hear, obey, 
 
 (2) 
 
 (3) [reg.] 
 
 75 TARU, 
 
 Give. 
 
 [irreg.] 
 
 : A 
 
 <SU(5 VARU, 
 
 7ome. 
 
 [irre.] 
 
 
 + LJ = /DLJ. 
 
 SiP [In regard to the last two verbs it may be doubted whether the themes 
 are s,^ and eu^ or jgrr and en IT. They are both conjugated regularly as from 
 roots ^0 and a;0, except in the past tense and the imperative. (Com. 27.) 
 eu(T5 has a poet. imp. also, euicuSesr (for emruSssr). It is difficult to avoid 
 the conviction that ^,7 = Sanskrit DA and D'HA; (it has all the meanings of both 
 in some or other of the S. Ind. languages) in which case analogy would point out 
 su/r as the root of its companion. In Telugu the root is RA and " semi-vowels are 
 easily interchangeable " (Bopp, 20). 
 
 The irregularity in the past is analogous to that in the verbs Qeu and Qjgir 
 (58). Compare also & ,7 -Q &<&(<? ear. 
 
 The regular psst tenses of all these verbs [56. (I.)] would be, according to 
 analogy, suir^Q^fsr, <&!rj$(c:Ssvr t Qsuj$(o<SGsr, Qjsir^Q^ssr. In each case 
 the root vowel is shortened. 
 
 In the plural imperative we have ^/T^ii, euiTfTrjia (for ^n-ffl/(i, sw/rajiL). 
 I apprehend /f is used to prevent hiatus, instead of eu in order to distinguish 
 these forms from the derivatives of the roots ^/nay and oj/r<a/. [Compare 
 <srT(frjun from fr.] This use of fr instead of eu is not unknown in the cognate 
 dialects. 
 
 It may be remarked also in confirmation of the above that colloquially 
 gtrQjDSBr and GunQiDGsr (for ^/r-SCj/Dsar, eu/r-SG'/Dsar) are used for
 
 &. 
 
 LESSON 23. EXERCISE 22. 
 
 PAST TENSE . 
 
 70*, 71. 
 
 70.*^ PARADIGM of the past tense. 
 again Lesson 3. 
 
 [Comp. App. -^ Bead 
 
 Eoot ui<jL learn, read. 
 
 Root 
 
 buy, obtain. 
 
 ing. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st Pers. 
 
 2nd 
 
 I learned. 
 
 rr La 
 We learned. 
 
 We bought. 
 
 (for ^Cu, gg i 
 found in com 
 mon Tamil.) 
 
 You [hon.] learnt 
 
 LJ^L^^/rssfr 
 
 Ye learnt. 
 
 lLl ( 
 
 Thou 1 
 / 
 
 YOU bought [hon.] 
 
 eair&S&fa'a&r 
 
 Ye bought. 
 
 3rdm. 
 
 He learnt. 
 
 They or he 
 [hon.] learnt. 
 
 She learnt. 
 
 They (m. and 
 f.) learnt. 
 
 He bought. \ 
 She bought. \ 
 
 They or he 
 [hon.] bought. 
 
 They (m. and 
 f.) bought. 
 
 It learnt. 
 
 They (n.) learnt 
 
 It bought. 
 [Contracted 
 
 ' 
 
 They (n.) 
 bought. 
 
 Exercise 22. 
 
 71. (d.) 1 /5/r<ssr 
 
 <sr GST (y ssr . 
 
 Q <F IT <55f (S5 /f <56 ^<5TT ? 
 
 <oT<ssr 
 ua nun 
 
 2>O. JT fT (7f) LD 
 
 <SU HP\ / SU IT IT <35 GfT . IbfEl&fffT <5T <5$T <o$T 3> <o&) fE 
 
 * This form is seldom used, the singular taking its place. 
 
 t ILJ is substituted elegantly for ssr tw tfws /orm onZy. 
 
 J When OTsar (70) is used, the whole of that to which it refers may be con- 
 sidered to be within quotation marks. The quotation is direct: " He said, 'I 
 will come.' " This will be more fully illustrated hereafter (82). 
 
 61 
 
 e / // .
 
 F- ^^- 
 
 72. LESSON 24. 
 
 FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 (6.) l Who comes there ? 2 Who gave you this ? 3 Don't say that 
 lesson (G'aj6S5rt_/rtii). 4 The servants must stop here. 5 We will go 
 into the house with the watchman. 6 The son conquered the villagers. 
 7 He said he must stop here (trans. " I must stop here "). 8 Who 
 made this ? 9 Who did this ? 10 Who created this ? n Where did 
 he buy the rice ? 12 What did you hear in the village ? 13 Did you 
 see the good doctor in the house ? u What lesson has the little boy 
 learnt with the munshi ? 
 
 72. I 
 and plura 
 adding a. 
 being ins 
 
 But fit. 
 their pres 
 pain, beco 
 
 Lesson 24 
 The PARADIGM of the Simj 
 n the 3rd person neuter of tl 
 d of which are alike) there is a 
 La to the root of verbs whose 
 srted when necessary [18]) anc 
 
 \\ WQJL{T~I 
 le Future Tense. 
 ie future tense (Hie singular 
 n anomaly. It is formed by 
 } present has Qguj(uj and eu 
 . s^La to those whose present 
 
 ; Q&&T, Q&iLigjLa. Compare 
 cgigjti, QuiTgjLa (it will die, 
 a, QnjiTLa, =^ii), QutTLa. 
 ure tense. 
 
 v makes } {b@La ; <seo, Sfb^La 
 ent tenses. ^/T^LO, C^/r^ii, 
 me, go) are contracted into em 
 PARADIGM of the fut 
 
 Root Q&UJ. (Pr. QftLQQrDssr.) 
 
 fcif 
 
 Root uuf.. (Pr. uuf-a&GiDGsr. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st Pers. 
 
 QftLQeussr 
 I shall do. 
 
 We shall do. 
 
 I shall learn. 
 
 We shall learn. 
 
 2nd 
 
 Thou wilt do. 
 
 You will do 
 [hon.] 
 
 Ye will do. 
 
 LJLy-LJLJITUJ 
 
 Thou wilt 
 learn. 
 
 You will learn 
 [hon.] 
 
 Ye will learn. 
 
 3rd m. 
 n. 
 
 He will do. 
 
 They or he 
 [hon.] will do. 
 
 They (m. f.) 
 ^ will do. 
 
 Hewitt 
 learn. 
 
 They or he [hon.] 
 will learn. 
 
 They (m. and 
 f.) will learn. 
 
 She witt do. 
 
 She Witt 
 learn. (_ 
 
 It will do. 
 
 They (n.) will 
 do. 
 
 It will learn. 
 
 They (n.) will 
 learn. 

 
 EXERCISE 23. LESSON 25. 
 FUTURE TENSE. RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 72*-74. 
 
 72.* VOCABULARY. 
 jrr N!R, water. 
 uj[rs<5G)<ss YAKKAI, the lody (only 
 
 used in Poetry, but generally 
 
 understood). 
 
 <5T(Lg;5gi ERUTTU, a letter, a writing. 
 ^(giL AGUM=I will become, serve 
 
 for, &c. contracted into =^fi. 
 
 For QuiT(3jLb=it will go, 
 is used. 
 
 MUGAM, face. 
 qfij)U, gaming. 
 VA$U, disputation. 
 
 VE#ANAI, torment 
 VIYA^I, sickness. 
 
 Exercise 23. 
 
 73. (a.) i What shall I do ? 2 What will the child learn ? 3 The 
 cow will come now. 4 Do you know that letter ? 5 It will happen so 
 (Tarn, it will walk so, /si). 6 The command will come to the vil- 
 lagers. 7 Who must go to the munshi ? 8 When will the tree grow ? 
 9 Where can the book be (Tam. where will it be) ? 10 Will the house 
 fall ? No, it will stand. n Will the village perish ? 12 Will that 
 house suit you ? 13 Will the child weep for its mother ? u We will 
 write a letter to the boy's father. 
 
 3 
 
 flQev 
 
 , s> IT L. q-Q ' 
 
 * uj/T6Esen<35." [This is poetical. It is a useful 
 quotation, and is given for variety.] 9 
 10 =g-5^ sQiurrtsI Qumcir? ll 
 
 12 j)UUiy-<P QflLJUJLJ (aUfTLDlT? 13 U & l> IT 0)1 
 
 ? [LD/T is used for any animal of the genus Bos. 
 Here u* indicates the species.] l4> ^gy&p-F Q&L-ip.<x(9j 
 
 Q&trGluurruj ? 
 
 Lesson 25. 
 
 RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 74. We have gone through the present, past 
 future tenses of the Tamil verb. We have also seen how a form 
 answering in many respects to the English infinitive mood is 
 obtained. The imperative mood has been given also. We come now 
 to a form probably differing much from any with which the learner 
 
 63
 
 74, 75. 
 
 LESSON 25. EXEECISE 24. 
 
 RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 is acquainted in any language, but which is found in all the South- 
 Indian dialects. ^ //""/'/. 
 It is a relative participial form.^ ( ^~ 
 
 ^Tamil has no relative pronoun. How then can we express,! 
 
 jrd who feeds the sheep '^~and "the sheep which 
 graze in the jungle* 7 ? Thus, ^Gi&'Zstr QiatLsS/o Qi-ziLuussr and 
 (S/rL-Lp-Cosu Qibujwrr) ^cssfr. Here (oLdi'u<ss8jD and (oLQiLwn) mean 
 who feeds V and f' which graze. 
 
 in- ^ 
 
 is .form, which includes the 
 
 .' Thi 
 
 English verb and relative pronoun, is obtained bv throwing awav the 
 personal terminations of the present and past tenses and adding _ay. 
 Thus, (Si&iu&&(SfOGir : take away sjsvr and add ^/, you will have 
 
 , the relative participle of the present tense. So QucuL 
 take away <&&ir, add ^, and QL^VU^^, which is the relative participle 
 of the past tense, is the result. The 3rd person neuter of the future 
 tense is also used as the relative participle of the future : (oLaiii&^Lct. 
 There is a corresponding negative form, 121. (4). " /r_ /t^T^-W" 
 [The ^ which is added seems to be the remnant of a relative pronoun, like 
 the Greek os, 17, o, only placed after the verb instead of before it : ov et8ov 
 ~ 
 
 ple : 
 
 C QLcuL 
 ( GLCH'L 
 
 Examle : 
 p 
 res * 
 
 Past. 
 
 Fut 
 
 I feed. ^ Q 
 SQrossr I graze. 
 I fed. 
 I grazed. 
 I sent. 
 
 Sp who, which or that feeds. 
 who, which or that grazes. 
 QuaiL^<s who, which or that fed. 
 
 who, which or that grazed. 
 ssr, ^jja/uL9uj who, which 
 or that sent. [Comp. 70. (2)] 
 who, which or that will 
 
 who, which or that will 
 graze. 
 
 The constructions resulting from this will appear strange till the 
 learner has accustomed himself to them. 
 
 This participial form is used in all rnnpcct'Ltin an adjective. Yet it 
 has, f oouEOGy the same governing power as any other part of the 
 
 verb, as will be seen in the following sentences. 
 
 It qualifies nouns of any gender, case or number ; but (like the 
 English adjective) itself suffers no chauge. 
 
 IS" After the final jy of these forms, the initial consonant of a 
 following word is never doubled. App. xi. 
 
 Exercise 24. 
 
 75. (a.) 1 /5/rsJ
 
 ^Q Co n ^.(5 &< ^^-6)^(-^*^1*>'& t-J *-e-/m &>'& ->- **J f7 i- *> I* 
 
 r 7^ // *- ^ "^ A/ ^ V ^7 ' 2 X/ ' 
 
 EXERCISE 24.' LESSON 26. 76, 77. 
 
 RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 (?ffl73s\)<5BaE/r.7"S3r. ' pew/r/r/f fS tL I L ITfEl & GTT . 
 Si7/r<ZGTT 
 
 (6.) x The books which the boy sought (62). 2 The daughter whom 
 the mother comforted (62). 3 The daughter who comforted the 
 mother. *The trees which grew in that jungle. 5 The garments 
 which the son put on (60). 6 The son who put on garments. 7 The 
 rain which will fall here (58). 8 It will rain here. 9 The leg which 
 pained me. 10 The boy who went to the village died there (58). 
 11 The cloth which he wove (58). 12 The table which they made. 
 13 Beat the dog which bites the little children. u Where is the rice I 
 saw in the house? 
 
 76. This relative participle is called in Tamil Quiunr OT^LQ or 
 noun-defect (Qu/jjir name or noun, sr^^ti defect), because it requires 
 a noun to fill up the meaning. We call it relative, because it 
 relates to the noun that follows. In analysis it is, with its dependent 
 words, an attributive enlargement of the noun, equivalent in English 
 to an adjective wntence^ [Comp. Pope's III. GRAM. 87. Caldwell's 
 Comp. Gram. p. 412.] \ ^. . 
 
 Lesson 26. 
 ^ THE ADVERBIAL fig YrnntTi PARTICIPLE. 
 
 77. There is another form which is called sficksr-snrcF.Fto or verb- 
 defect, because it requires a following verb to fill up the meaning. 
 It is a kind of gerund, is indeclinable, and, though belonging to the 
 past tense, takes its time from the finite verb which closes the sen- 
 tence. In analysis it, with the worsts depending upon it, is an 
 adverbial extension of the predicated 
 
 4te-formatioa ic oaoy. It is formed from the 1st person singular 
 of the past tense. 7^,_ ^ ^ 
 
 [This is the most convenient way of considering the subject. It is probable 
 
 that the tense isfefnied from the participle, in which case analogy would suggest /, 
 *g^ t/^ t
 
 
 77. LESSON 26. 
 
 THE ADVERBIAL PABTICIPLE. 
 
 a pres. part, in Q^i, and a future in /sq or LJL/, to which the personal termina- 
 tions were added, the a. being elided.] 
 
 (a.) -ia all the /verbs included in 56. EL [not those in (I.), (II.), 
 
 [I.)] throw away Qstsrssr: jpjtisiSKSsBrsBr makes c g\ii5iQ=having 
 submitted. ( > r >L_^ 'j ^p,. 1 , ' ^^c^,^^, 
 
 From this EXCEPT 
 
 Qffir&j&n (70), which makes Q&ireueS having said, as though from 
 a regular past tense, Qffir&jeSQesrssr. 
 (fei) In all other casoB jfchrow away <rsJr and add 
 makes u up. <ggi= having learnt: 6/f.^ t A 9-^-1 i^^/~^~ / , 
 
 [The Telugu and Kanarese have a present verb. part. also. (Comp. Camp. Tel. 
 Gram. 313 ; McKerrel's Can. Gram. p. 86.)] 
 
 Its use will be best learnt from a few examples : 
 
 (1.) ^eussr ssssr Qu&^)esr=He saw and spoke. Here ssmr 
 takes the place of the finite verb " saw." The Tamil admits of only 
 one finite verb in a sentence, simple or compound. 
 
 I heard, read and wrote that lesson. 
 
 sjssr, Q&L-, QJ,T^ < J? may be translated f* having seen,'! /' having 
 heard,'! and 't having read'* 
 
 (The little boy having walked came.} 
 
 The little boy came walking or on fooT." 
 
 <iP~'rE voi'bal'parBciple often has the force of an adverb. Upon 
 the proper appreciation of this will depend much of the learner's 
 progress. 
 
 As a general rule, whenever a subject has two or more finite verbs in 
 English, render all but the last by the sSl^ssr sr^iL, or adverbial parti- 
 ciple. 
 
 Tamil delights in the accumulation of verbal forms^ sometimes ^j**-t^ 
 addg- scarcely anything to the meaning. By means of these a 
 sentence may be indefinitely lengthened out, while the meaning is 
 preserved from all ambiguity. [Comp. Lessons 81-93.] 
 
 English^ co-ordinate sentences are thus thrown into one sentence^tw?/ 
 with extensions. This is quite anatygoTIs ^ to Hhir use" 6Y the aorist 
 participles in Greek. 
 
 By thef use the principal verb may be modified with a precision 
 scarcely attainable in any other way.* 
 
 * I cannot refrain from quoting the following passage from an essay by 
 Professor Schoff f On the Tartaric Languages,'/ quoted in Prof. Max Miiller's 
 I' Survey of Languages.'/ It is perfectly applicable to the construction of Tamil, 
 mutatis mutandis : [ f How peculiar and truly Tartaric this wonderful concatena- 
 tion of sentences and intervening of words ! A sentence runs on in long periods 
 .,... like a majestic stream. . . . The terminations and suffixes are like the 
 small vassals, depending on the powerful and high-sounding gerunds ; and these 
 
 ^ 
 *, 
 
 66
 
 EXERCISE 25. LESSON 27. 78, 79. 
 
 PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES. 
 
 (4.) rEtrssr ^IKI(& QurriL en^Qeusor. / ',5*^ 
 
 I WILL go there and come (back). 
 
 ^eussr Qurr &<,!< [Qurr&l eat, 64.] 
 
 He is eating and drinking. 
 
 The tense of the subordinate verbal forms QumL, 
 determined by the finite verb. [*Comp. HE. Grammar, 86.] 
 
 Exercise 25. 
 78. (a.) 1 $<5tr>Ln<5v>uj ri& 
 
 uiy-<5jgj ^^^(osusmGlL^. ^ & [reap sir srssr 
 
 ) (o U 3 G3) S3T ? ^<ST/BjU U IT L-. gj 6!T> B LJ 
 
 ztenirrriT ^>JI_IEIIU (= submissively) 
 
 Q is &fl sii rr ILJ 
 Qumiiu* LJ/r/r<i 
 
 pgjj&Q&iressr <surr. [^ <F, ^^ L;, always 
 doubled after ^^i or Jj) of this form.] 10 sr/5^ 
 
 ? n srssr^ys^LUJ Q eu'&sti & <% rr IT fr 
 [QcF r ^ ^/iJ(DU/r(OT)/r<sGrrJ. 12 
 
 <3U K <55 [TUJ 1 
 
 (&.) x They came and spoke with him. 2 The dog bit and killed 
 the bird. 3 She entered the house and saw the mother. 4 He 
 obtained money and gave to the villagers. 5 We must plough and 
 plant trees. 6 The little boy lay down and slept in the jungle. 7 The 
 mother sought the child weeping. 8 Which servants died in the 
 jungle ? 9 Which are the books that the boy was seeking in 
 the house ? 10 Why did the boy leave the sheep in the jungle ? 
 
 Lesson 27. 
 
 THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES. 
 
 79. These are not given in native Tamil grammars, but compound 
 forms equivalent to them are in constant use. 
 
 In modern Tamil the use of auxiliary verbs is increasing and ought to increase. 
 As languages grow they require auxiliary verbs to give greater precision. Tamil 
 might vie with English in this respect, if its auxiliaries were fully brought into 
 
 again govern and hold together the larger members of a period, like so many 
 pashas.'/ In the profoundly learned, but unhappily unfinished, researches into 
 the Tartar dialects of M. Abel Remusat a similar description is given. 
 
 * (oUtnii 58. II. (for QuiTdSl) the verb. part, of Qurr, (' having gone,'] very 
 common. So ^uj 58. II. (for ^uS 
 
 or 
 
 y 
 
 -
 
 50, 81. EXEECISE 26. 
 
 FORM ANSWERING TO ENGLISH " HAVE " AND " HAD.' 
 
 (1.) The PERFECT is formed by adding ^^Qfo^r I am (60. II.) 
 to the verbal participle last treated of. 
 
 Ex. uiq-fgjp ^(TrjsSlQtDssr (more generally written uu^^^Q^&S 
 
 Qro&sr) I have learnt (lit. I am, having learnt). 
 tgjiKiQ ^ Tjj&Q Qy ssr He has submitted (he is, having sub- 
 
 mitted). 
 
 (2.) The PLUPERFECT is formed by adding ^^Q^esr I was 
 (60. II.) to the same. 
 
 Ex. L/tf J53$ $Qf,{5G><sr (or ui$-<&$(iT}iEG<g<ssr) I had learned (lit. I 
 was, having learned). 
 
 QTj/rs^sir I had spoken (lit. I was, having spoken). 
 ls 
 
 80. Thus also may be formed the FUTURE PERFECT, 
 
 I shall have learned; the PERFECT INFINITIVE, u <f <5<$qT)<<a5 to 
 have learned ; and the PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, FUTURE PERFECT of the 
 relative and verbal participles, uiq-^jsi^sQro, uuf-^jjJQfjfifg, uisj-tjsjsl 
 0*@;i, u (y-ss $(!,!? 3$ who, which or that has, had, or shall have 
 learned or is having learned. 
 
 1ST The perfect is used for the present sometimes to denote a state 
 of being. Thus, ^fl^S^-s9(yiT he dwells (&l dioell,stop, TARRY, 64) ; 
 
 I know. 
 
 Exercise 26. 
 81. (a.) !^ 
 
 Qcy/T6V6l9 
 <jjLjQuiT(W>^l U^fDfE^I(7h<^S(y&Sr. (66.) 
 
 Q, 
 
 . (^(u for 
 
 from ^u9l(o<5isrsisr [58. II. 77. a.], lit. he is, having become 
 =&e is a good man.) 8 <oriE](o< QUITUJ 
 
 (6.) 1 1 have written the lesson. 2 You haye sought the child in 
 the jungle. 3 The door which he had opened for the little boy. 
 4 The villager who had planted the tree came. 5 The tree which the 
 villager had planted grew. 6 1 have forgotten and forgiven the evils 
 he Las done to me. 7 The milk was mingled with water. 8 The bird 
 drank the milk mingled with water. 
 
 * The future is used indefinitely for any time : /' which at any time I may 
 have committed. 'f
 
 LESSON 28. 
 WAY OF EXPRESSING QUOTATIONS. 
 
 82-84. 
 
 Lesson 28. 
 QUOTATIONS. THE USE OP 
 
 that. 
 
 82. In 70 we had the root srsar speak, of which the past is 
 snsar^orossr, and consequently the verbal participle (77.) er ssr jz/== having 
 said. 
 
 This form is used, when in English a direct quotation is made, 
 
 .instead of quotation marks, and when the quotation is indirect as 
 equivalent to /'that.'' It is^the Greek 5. Translate~~il7~wnen 
 necessary by f that.'' juf^^^a^e^ /-&T 
 
 [The infin. OTSST occurs in poetry and sometimes in colloquial use. 
 So srsvrugi (88.) and sresrS/D^!. To these ^di (40. 81.) and <%,<$, 136, 
 are added when the exact words used are not quoted. Compare 168. 
 
 1 Q J ~\ 
 
 loo, a.] 
 
 ^T He said he would come, ea^Qeasar srsyr^i 
 
 (t' I will come,'/ 
 
 I believe there is, a.asbr srssr^p (^sssrQi^syr^i) 
 
 (/' There is ? I believe.) 
 
 Compare 
 
 he said.) 
 
 I believe that which will say " GOD is. 
 
 ^svir S-SSsrQi ssr WfD 65) ^s sS^enfrwrSi 
 I believe that which says tl God is.'? 
 
 He said what amounted to, t l I believe.'^] 
 
 83. When Grsitrjpi is used more than once in a sentence / 
 added to each 
 
 I believe that God is and that he created me. 
 (/' God is '<* and ^ fie me created^ 
 
 84. VOCABULARY. 
 Before, (Lpesr, 
 
 After, LSdr 
 
 UK. [Both (Lpesr and Li/ ear 
 must be regarded as nouns, 
 signifying " the before time " 
 and "'the after time." [251.] 
 They govern the 4th case 
 generally, but sometimes the 
 6th, and may themselves be 
 partially declined.] 
 
 js sor (y is well (^ ssr ^1= that which 
 
 is good+^tLi. 40). 
 ULpu> fruit. -J^M^i^ 
 
 <e5svrjpi a calf. rf&~*jv\^ 
 (Lfiuf. [57] be finished, come to an 
 
 end ; [64] finish, complete. 
 IT see, behold this ; ^ 
 
 see, behold that. 
 -1 
 
 think [64.]. 
 wealth. 
 
 69
 
 85-87. EXEECISE 27. LESSON 29. 
 
 THE USE OP OTS5TJ3J. PARTICIPIAL NOUNS. 
 
 ^ The desire to obtain more. 
 
 (g) csr SOT (gj <PLaurrigls& GsusasrOti srssr&l 
 
 [Still to acquire [one] must which says the desire.] 
 
 This idiom is frequently used. Beware of translating it 
 
 85. (Lpssr, &c. are used with the future relative participle ; iSlsvr, 
 &e. are used with the past relative participle. [74.] ^^/-^ 
 
 ^jsvesr <g\<o6)^& Q<5=tuu-/t> [QffiLQfo^p^, Q<f\jjen^fr>@, 87, 88] (Lpesr / 
 [(LpssnsarC'Lo] jjs(o<cr I came before he did it (lit. the before time 
 that he will do it). 
 
 ^tsufisr ^etSfSff Q&iL^LSlsvr en^Q^ssr I came after he had done it 
 (lit. the after time that he did it). [Comp. Lesson 71.] 
 
 Exercise 27. 
 
 86. (&.) * ^S>/<SJIT<3Bfffr 6$ > /_!_63)/_ SL-QlJb (62.) 
 
 iSl/burr 
 6iJib>35 
 
 (56. HE.) 
 
 upp [56. (IE.)] 
 ^gy /B ^ ts rr 6$) ILJ 
 
 [App. xii. (II.)] 
 
 (o u IT & & Q & tr GST Qssrssr, ^gu e\) <s\) eu IT ? 
 10 
 
 (6.) J Before you sleep. 2 He said that before the villagers 
 poughed, it rained (iasmip QUUJ^^I, 58). 3 Think well before you 
 do this, said I. 4 His head ached (58.) after he ate [56. (in.)] that 
 fruit. 5 You read your lesson well after he went home. 6 Where is 
 the boy who read his lesson well ? (107.) 7 After this what will you 
 do, they asked. 8 Before I came should you not have wiped the 
 table ? 9 Tell him to rub down the bandy-bullock after" it has 
 come from the jungle. 10 He has a desire to acquire wealth. 
 
 Lesson 29. 
 
 PARTICIPIAL NOUNS. 
 
 87. Participial nouns of very common use, and at the same time 
 very elegant, are formed from the present and past relative parti- 
 ciples, or Quturr 6T&&LD, by adding personal terminations. 
 
 70
 
 LESSON 29. 87. 
 
 PARTICIPIAL NOUNS. 
 
 (a.) Thus, from u6s>L-.&lv), pres. rel. part, of uemi (74) create, are 
 formed : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 yr one (mas.) who creates, [^zsr added and a/ inserted.] 
 wr one (fern.) who creates, [^sfr added and ea inserted.] 
 that which creates, or the creating. [jj? (for <jyjD) added]. 
 This is also the 3rd sing. neut. ind. pres. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 '/r one (honorific) who creates, [jy/r added and <su inserted.] 
 sfr those who create (m. and f.). [^y/r<s6fr added and eu 
 inserted.] 
 
 UG&L-SB& pensu or u<si&Qn)<s<5u<s l T those (neut.) which create. [aeu 
 (or ^erosu) and sroajcsefr added.] 
 
 (&.) From u<5B)i,<ff;, the past From ,jy ^g/ ut-Ssw, past rel. part. 
 rel. part, are formed : of .jj/jpLJL/ Send (56. II.) : 
 
 Singular. 
 x5r owe w&o created, &c. 
 
 that which created, or 
 
 having created. [This is 
 also the 3rd sing. neut. ind. 
 past.] 
 
 Plural. 
 
 .jyjgj/ L//.9 SOT SK sfr or ^ ^2/ u i_S uj a/ err. 
 
 ^ jj$y u L$ <5$r ^ or 
 
 or 
 
 ^ Even in the common dialect us 
 
 fi for ^JSUSST, ^su/r] are used occasionally for uani <<<& sir, u<50)i-< 
 
 The neuter singular, besides its primary use, corresponds often 
 in meaning to the participial noun in " ing," used as a noun : the 
 creating, &c. 
 
 tgsJT These forms are of perpetual occurrence ; accustom yourself to form them 
 with every verbal root you meet. 
 
 The following are examples: 
 
 1. ^juu^-f Qf(Lsu_^i (QfLuQfl^s') &tfl ^j&j&j. 
 It is not right to do so. 
 [Lit. That which will do so is not right.] 
 
 The future gives a more general idea=a any time. 
 
 * [iu substituted for ggr. This is not so common as the other form.] 
 
 71
 
 88-90. 
 
 LESSON 29. 
 
 PARTICIPIAL NOUNS. 
 
 2. 
 
 Has he seen it ?= 
 
 [But is his having seen it a fact?] 
 3. Qurrssr {j)rsjG>a ^DiTjLJujs ^euSsu. 
 
 Gold is not here. 114. 
 
 88. Participial nouns with a future,, signification are formed by 
 adding uu to the root of verbs which take &Qji in the present, and 
 u to those which have Sji/. In this latter case QJ may be used for u 
 in the neut. singular. 
 
 Thus, .jyasLp call makes ^stsLp-sQQ '/DOT I call, and 
 
 Q-fib do Q&iLQQfoear I do. 
 
 Fut. ^>jss>LpuQuesr. Fut. 
 
 jsysE Lpu u su sir ") owe (mas.) who icill call, C 
 \ &c. [ULJ is added to the ! 
 ! root, to which are joined j 
 jthe terminations, cgyssr, | 
 ^etr, *>IJi, .jy/r, ^frserr, j 
 Jr J sa> au, srosu^sfr, as before.] l^ 
 
 The neut. sing. Q^tLsu^i, &c. is constantly used, but the remaining 
 forms of the future are not so common. 
 
 89. These nouns govern the same cases as the verbs from which 
 they are derived. 
 
 Thus : <5T6sr%ssr .jysrotp.j^aj/r jyau/f. [srssr^sr is 2nd case 
 
 governed by 
 It is he that catted me. 
 
 It is not right to beat him. 
 90. VOCABULARY. 
 
 VANAM, heaven, the sky. 
 _euLQ heaven (ujr other, 
 i>63eri_sui_o sphere). 
 L& the earth. S- A/9-J u ^ * 
 
 iii the earthly sphere 
 the world, (y earth, in com- 
 pounds.) 
 
 ro^i, &c., from c$i jpi cease (56. 
 I.), without, less; he, she or it 
 that is without. 
 
 guard (56. II.). 
 a quarter of the heavens. 
 
 one who has nowhere to turn to, 
 a helpless person. ,' . f - 
 
 ^LQJLO Divinity, providence. *-*~? 
 
 (56. II.) appear. 
 (56. 1.) disappear, (64) hide. 
 (56. II.) cover, shut up. 
 
 VELAI, time, opportunity. 
 su VAI, put, place, keep (6'4.) 
 [In 58 a totally different 
 word.] 
 
 * u after gar. 
 
 72
 
 EXERCISE 28. LESSON 30. 91, 92. 
 
 FORMS EQUIVALENT TO THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Exercise 28. 
 91. (a.) l iSlno/s^evr (66.) j^p&^Ln (66.); ^/DIB^SST 
 
 ; Q 15 ft <SGT f$ <S5Y LD8f>IDlLllJa f LCXotnjB fSjSetfT (o ff> /T <SST J] to . 
 611 [T 5T ^ 65) 3} (iy Lb y, L$ 6V) ILJ ILj /i LJ <o$) L ^ 3) 611 IT . ^ U IT L>63Vri6\)lEl 
 
 & rr eii < & IT IT <ssr . 
 
 7 
 
 6U(f^<5U35^)/fB^I | ^J + ^f = ^J (50.) 
 
 pQsu'far (50.) (/_ <sff)<si/<5E<E<a/i^ 
 88.] 9 jyiJU9-<fF QcFuJsi/^y 
 1( ^ & is u IT JJE) 35 ^ tan 5 & & tr u u IT p p Qeu&RfrQLQ. ^ & IT u u fr ID /l eft 
 
 &D^S eSl IT b sl U StflfT GtftT Q S17 S33T LCi . 
 
 (6.) x Who is it that gives the money to the little boy? 2 Who 
 struck the watchman ? 3 This (man) protects me. 4 This is what I 
 said. 5 Who did this ? 6 How did he do it ? 7 Are you he that did 
 
 it? 8 Art thou he that should come (oj^u&jff-y? 9 He who has 
 called us [is] Grod. 10 I sent 10 loads of salt; have you seen then? 
 11 It appeared in the heaven and disappeared. 12 This is a jungle 
 without water. 13 This is not heavy. 14 You must take care of what 
 ou have acquired. 15 You must increase your wealth and know- 
 
 Lesson 30. 
 THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 92. The Tamil has properly no passive voice, but a compound 
 verb may be used, which in many respects supplies its place. This 
 form must be very sparingly used : it is foreign to the real idiom of 
 the language. 
 
 It is made by adding u suffer (56. (II.)) in all its inflections to 
 the (so-called) infinitive mood of the verb. u^^> (56. II.) added 
 in the same way would make a causal, concerning which more will 
 be said hereafter. [160, 161.] 
 
 Thus : Q&OJUJ to do, Q&UJULIUUI to be done. 
 
 to call, ^eoLp&sLjuGilQQrDGsr I am called ^J- 
 
 Huffcr calling). 
 
 to beat, ^ji^-&<suuL-ifr<ssr he was beaten, 
 to seek, G^L-ULJ 'eurr fr&<srr they will be sought. 
 
 73 10 
 

 
 93, 94. EXERCISE 29. 
 
 FORMS EQUIVALENT TO THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 In some few cases the simple root 
 prefixed to /_/. 
 
 KETFA, &a<i [past rel. part, 
 of G) fee spoiled, 68, 74]. 
 
 TA^CAN, a carpenter. 
 Liuireer VETTIYAN, ^A-e /?IO,TI 
 
 burns the dead and per- 
 forms menial offices in a village. 
 
 K^PPIDU, CaZZ [ctfLUL^ a 
 
 e, 68]. A 
 KAGI^AM, a paper, letter* 
 KApupAgi, a letterffl^j 
 VIXXAPPAM, apeti- 
 tion. /' 
 
 a petition. & (/ ^^ 
 a report or petition. * 
 
 a gentleman, '' Mr./' 
 governor. 
 
 a clerk, interpreter, 
 one who reads petitions and 
 drafts answers.-*!- fr -=~ ^^ 
 &n-Q&iu land only fit for 
 cultivation [L^SOT -inferior -+- Q&a. 
 field]. #-&***. UZ -=- TLfa/l 
 L paddy-land, wet-cultiva 
 tion [^sar good}. &- -^ 7~. ^-*- ^ 
 sifliuuu ^JD (56. II. 161.) 
 cause to understand, make 
 Tcnoivn. 
 
 dry Ai~J&- 
 
 Exercise 29. 
 J3T. Here = gy^L = a beating). 
 
 Q&IUIUUUL-L-&I. 3 ^ 
 
 5 
 
 (or 
 
 ^ ci <5 LJ /_/ L_ i_ ^y . 
 
 IST (50.) 
 
 * The 4th case of the participial noun (neuter, singular), 
 ihat which writes -\- ^isvr=i^zsr (22) -\- ^ = to the writing, for the writing. This 
 form corresponds often to onr infinitive used as a noun.
 
 *< 
 
 LESSON 31. 
 CONDITIONAL AND CONJUNCTIVE FORMS. 
 
 95, 96. 
 
 (&.) l Tell the gentleman that Mr. Smith has come. 3 This (au/r) 
 the gentleman's interpreter. 3 The petition which he wrote is in 
 ly hand. 4 Have you dry land or irrigated ? 5 1 have both dry 
 ind and irrigated land. 6 Tell the gentleman that the person who 
 ive the petition is here. 7 Tell him this is not wet land, but dry 
 8 Ask him who wrote the petition for him. 9 Where was this 
 Bitten ? 10 By whom was that evil done ? n By whom is this 
 ige governed P 13 What is the cow eating ? 13 You must submit, 
 bite. 15 Was this cloth she wore woven. 16 Has he paid for 
 arment. 
 
 Lesson 31. 
 Forms corresponding to the English SUBJUNCTIVE or^ 
 
 CONDITIONAL Mood. A^fy^b^-*-- e- iL ^ L *- 
 
 95. (fy) One of these is obtained from the past tense (70*) 1st 
 person singular, by changing <ojssr into ^eo^: 
 
 Thus, JH^IUL^Q. I'saear I sent. ^^}iuiS!i^)6o If (I, you, &c.) send. 
 
 Q&iL<sir6u If (I, you, &c.) do. 
 
 iSl <5Lpu Linear 
 
 55T63T 1 sent. 
 I did. 
 Ex.: 
 \Quir 68.]. 
 
 Perhaps he may live if you brand him at once. 
 This is the ordinary form for adverbial clauses of condition. 
 (6.) Another form, which is not much used in prose, is obtained 
 by adding @)&o or @OT to the root of verbs whose present takes Slgi ; 
 and <&Si&u, or fsSissr, to those which have Js&gtJ. 
 Thus : QfiLuSeu or QffdjuSsar (58. I/ 
 
 iu35r [58. n/Eoot, , 
 
 These are 3rd and 7th cases of verbal nouns. Thus, originally 
 the having become," and ^iQ&j=." in the lia.vin.ff become." 
 
 96. VOCABULARY. 
 @ a brand, burning, 
 punishment, 
 punish (- 
 
 III.). ^ q^^^^e, / 
 
 >-<*''"! much. more. 
 
 ifTLu much, too much (adv. 
 40.). 
 
 spring up, grow, be produced 
 ; 56. L). 
 affliction (opposed to 
 
 56. 
 
 stand] land. 
 
 uuSir corn, produce in general. 
 uuSlfrQ&iLi cultivate 
 
 55. L). 
 
 jtp@ dispute, suit. 
 SjiruL] decision. 
 gB^G'su'Ssrr perhaps 
 S.L-.QSST at once [lit. together with, 
 
 allied to ^, g5, signs of the 
 
 3rd case. App. xii.] 
 is 'GO 6uj2 very well \_is&) good, .jyjo 
 
 that (is)]. 
 @ pro ia a fault. 
 
 I
 
 97. 
 
 EXERCISE 30. 
 
 CONDITIONAL FORMS. 
 
 Exercise 30. 
 
 97. (a.) 
 
 IB /_ IB ^ rr <sv 
 
 (o & L- u rr 
 
 sresr Ld&svr 
 = concerning, 115.) < 
 
 Q f ILI p /r ev . 
 
 (Translate: whenever he sees.) 
 
 (6.) 1 If you call he will come. 2 If they plough the land corn will 
 be produced. 3 If afflictions come you must bear [them]. 4 If it rain 
 the villagers will plough. 5 If the child cries we must go. 6 If he 
 pronounces clearly I shall understand. 7 What lesson is he reading 
 to the munshi ? 8 If the gentlemen decide this dispute rightly. 9 If 
 you leave me thus, what shall I do ? 10 If the villagers stand there, 
 what will the gentleman say ? n If we boil rice they will pay the 
 money. 13 If the boy forget his lesson he must be beaten. 
 
 ^ [The pearg}fl~J (Svit. 343) enumerates 12 forms to which it 
 assigns the common name of sSlftssr crf&Ln (77) =infinitive forms of 
 the verb. 
 
 Taking the root Qfi'u, these are said to be 
 
 I. For the past : 
 
 1. Qffdj-s? (77). 
 
 2. Q^Jj-q. 
 
 3. Q&iii-iutr. 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 + OT65T, 82.) 
 
 II. For the present : 
 6. Q&iu (or 
 41). 
 
 III. For the future 
 
 7. Q^u3^r (95). 
 
 8. Q&uj-u3uj. 
 9. 
 
 10. 
 11. 
 
 12. Q&IU-UIT<(8). 
 
 To these the commentator adds for the future, 
 
 13. QffiLi-^fr&j (Q&Lugi + ^Go (95. a.)=BY having done, 21.). 
 
 14. Q<g : uj-<5<&n'6v (QffCu-\- gi-\- ^-\-<stT6o=ihe time of having done). 
 
 15. Qt^uJ-^jy/Lb (G>ffu-s^-\- ^eu + 2-ii, 148=together with the doing). 
 Of these the majority are obsolete and poetical. 
 
 The sSSsDr OTcF^tL is thus defined in Sut. 342 : 
 
 " That is a sflSssr OT^^LQ in which the action and the time appear, 
 but a finite verb, with its terminations indicating gender and 
 number, is wanting to complete the sense." 
 
 76
 
 ^**'- 
 JL <L ^'^. ?^*><&^- j9^'gLf*~+~/*~*&^(&? *-*-; <~ = %- 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^/^^^<^^^^ c ^-^^^^^ 
 
 LESSON 32. EXEECISE_3L___5 V 98, 99. 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS : 
 
 In Sut 344, it is laid down as a rule that/*' the first four of these forms, and 
 the last three must have the same nominative as the finite verb, the others may 
 have a different nominative.'/ 
 
 The more advanced student will find it of advantage to study these Sutrams. 
 Comt 
 
 Lesson 32. 
 
 - CONJUNCTIONS formed from VERBS. 
 98. Some of these subjunctive forms are in use as conjunctions : 
 a. ^@)6u, ^Qeo, are the subjunctives of cgj " become " (58. II.) = 
 if [it] become. 
 
 w, are subjunctives of sreor " say " (70.)=if [you] 
 
 b. sr &sr (y &o , s 
 say. 
 
 a. @6l>, ^S)euj(poet. ^uSIsaj/are used for /'if.'' 
 
 speak thus ? 
 
 If he-is the accountant, we must give the money, c/ 
 
 b. <5Tssr(y), sreofleu^poet. srssflewj are used to express a reason =for, 
 because. They then follow an interrogative. 
 
 Thus: eruuu?- <oT6ofiev=if you say, " how?" 
 
 <&<sisr <oT6vr(y&o = if you say, "why?" 
 
 These and similar forms are to be used sparingly. The sentences 
 in which they occur may often be more elegantly expressed other- 
 wise. y^L*--^ 
 
 OTSW(^6U, x)^/^^ ' LJfTL LO 
 
 for, this lesson 
 
 I know that well ; 
 
 must learn ; 
 
 @(T5S/0^3. J& 
 
 is hard. 
 
 for, I saw it. </ y-r) & ft, K> tmn- 1> L. vr 
 
 ^ In common talk, the future or past, with =^@6u, o 
 used for the subj unctive. Thus : 
 
 G)c5/rULJ/riu c ^@)eu = Q<s/r i ^ / s5'/r6u If thou wilt give. ( ^~ ^~**& 
 <& is sometimes added. $ <r*~*-i * ^ *-?- t ^- J ^ *-* / tr? vn 
 
 OT <%6v If he will do so. 99 n7 ^ 
 So also Q<ffifr^ ( ^/rG > 5T ^@)<5u If he gave. 
 
 Ab^o-r^/^- ~ ~*~~ Exercise 31. 
 
 99. (a.) l jj)iEj(oa 6U(f^6umu 
 
 SJSST. 
 
 77
 
 100. 
 
 EXERCISE 31. LESSON 33. 
 
 t< ALTHOUGH.'/ 
 
 <56 61/6337" i>. 
 
 urrfr&Slev (95. &.) 
 relatives. See Index I.) 
 
 /5/7"LD oUfTlU ^gUStnU LJ/T/T65 
 L7/T Z_ SOTcF Q <SF ILJ (o 6lJ fT L> . 
 
 . [Poet.] (&ppL>=. attached 
 
 GTSSTSST P <OTGGT L en <F uSl Q ev 
 
 i^ The learner should now begin to use Indexes I. and II. 
 
 (6.) 1 What did you eat ? 3 If you slept in the house you must 
 have heard it. 3 If he has said this I shall go. 4 If he will pay (62) 
 me (dat.) the money I will write the petition. 5 They came before I 
 wrote the letter, because they had heard it from (by) the villagers. 
 6 This is evil, for many will be destroyed by it. 7 Shall we try it ? 
 8 Whose fault is this ? 9 Did your father tell you to go ; if so, go at 
 once. 10 If you cultivate will it grow up at once ? n Is what he said 
 right, or is it not ? 13 If they build houses in the jungle who will 
 know it? 
 
 said). 
 
 Lesson 33, 
 
 ADVEEBIAL SIIITIEEJTCEO OF CONCESSION. 
 100. (a.) Although I said= / g/rggr 
 
 ALTHOUGH, &c. 
 
 (lit. and I having 
 
 (lit. 
 
 (6.) Although I say (shall say, may say)=ptT6sr 
 and if I say). 
 
 (a.) Here &-Lz = and (7), is added to the verbal participle (77). 
 (6.) In this &-LQ is added to the subjunctive form (95). 
 
 These two forms are of perpetual use and present no special diffi- 
 culties. The following are all the varieties of formation. [Comp. 
 m. GRAM. 141, 142.] 
 
 " . part. (77) with a. LQ= although, with the past. 
 
 ^Ld although [I] sent (and having sent). 77. (a.) 
 , r _ although [he] has learnt (and having learnt). 77. (6.) 
 (2.) Subjunctive with 2-Ln=although he may, shall, &c. 
 
 although [I] send. (95. a.) 
 although [he] read. 
 
 , although it be (95. &.). (Poe 
 *^ Let the reader, once for all, impress it upon his mind, that it 
 is very rarely the case that any Tamil form of this kind corresponds 
 precisely to an English particle. Do not translate t' but '/ by
 
 * 
 
 
 or cgg<6B),t, as a matter of course, wherever you meet with it ; but, 
 weigh well the meaning and force of the particle, and translate 
 accordingly. 
 
 101. VOCABULARY. 
 
 nevertheless, yet. sufl tax, tribute. 
 
 triTLD a share. 
 
 ($L<su/r.frt> the people's share 
 people, an inhabitant). 
 
 the proprietor's share 
 v above). 
 
 r the government, the Gir- 
 car. l^tt^^ 
 
 a wave [not very common ; 
 ^is the ordinary word]. UT- 
 wealth. 
 
 rr<SE><a/ tax. 
 
 Jcist^tSttuSjIu-UcXTLn an in- 
 stalment of land tax. 
 <T LU ^ rr LJ ?3tr LC> the same. 
 1. Lp/Tg^g^ the produce of a 
 I MM cut, reap ( JiQfflj?; 56. III.) 
 Si shut (.rQffi jg, 62). 
 
 51 shut the door (50). 
 (56. II.) agree. ! 
 
 the sea. /^^-^^ ^^^--~ 
 
 (share of government). 
 
 Exercise 32. 
 
 102. (a.) T When will you pay your tax ? 2 Have you reaped the 
 produce ? 3 Before I reaped the produce I paid my instalment of 
 tax. 1 1 have paid my dues (u@$) to Government. 5 Is this the 
 cultivator's share or the proprietor's share ? 6 Although he reaped 
 then, he must now pay the tax. " Although he read with the munshi, 
 he does not understand the lesson. 8 My foot pained me, yet I came 
 with him. <J The villagers came walking. ^Shut the door. n How 
 can you tell what the people's share is and what the proprietor's ? 
 [Comp. Lesson 38.] 
 
 [56. (HI.)] 
 
 ITttGO 
 
 , Si &V &?l LJ U 6tS3T LB 
 
 5 
 
 Q ILJ 65T (Wf 
 
 D j <5J Ql <SGT <o$t\ <5ti , 
 6 
 
 (60. IV.) uuSltr Q&ILJILJ 
 
 (68, 79, 100.) 
 8 QLJ/TUJ 
 
 [Poet. 
 
 [87]. 
 
 65 p fS, (fh fB ^ ^ 6\)1 LD
 
 103, 104. LESSON 34. EXEKCISE 33. 
 
 POTENTIAL MOOD. 
 
 ""-i a. 
 \ b. 
 
 Lesson 34. 
 THE POTENTIAL MOOD. PEEMISSION, POSSIBILITY. 
 
 103. ^ May,'' << can,'' *' might,'' could.'/ 
 retrtsor uiy-S&evrrLD I MAY learn. . 
 pn-issr LJL$L<c5^<ffiLii I CAN learn.- A *>/ 
 <gii5<$u etnuujsvr ui-<f5cS6Ufr/i <or&sr(yesr he said that the boy MIGHT 
 
 learn. 
 d. ^jsfiu 6uujsr ui^-ssis &-u^ <oT63T(w?sr he said that the boy 
 
 COULD learn. 
 
 (1.) What is called the potential mood in English is formed in 
 Tamil by adding =^ii, to signify permission, and <ffii-/-b ability, pos- 
 sibility. 
 
 (2.) ^Ln is probably a corruption of ^@ti, the 3rd pers. neut. fut. 
 of 4$ (7^*) become ; if so, it is=will become. 
 
 (3.) &L.LO is the 3rd pers. neut. fut. [72] of <SL come together, fit, 
 and is used im personally =it can be. 
 
 (4.) cf^ii is added to a verbal noun (hereafter to be considered, 
 148.) 'formed by joining .jyeu to the roots which have ^i in the 
 present, and <6u to those which have sQjpi. (The analogy of these 
 strong and weak forms is maintained throughout. Comp. 72, and the 
 inf. mood, 41.) 
 
 Thus: Q&iL + c >i6v + ^i,Lz = Q&tLiiLiGon-Lc> (tLi doubled for euphony) 
 
 (I, &c.) may do. 
 
 ui$t + <5cS6u + cf$t) = LJi-<f5<&6u/riii (I } <fec.) may learn. 
 (5.) &-LZ is added to the infinitive mood. 
 
 Q<s : uJuj + <5ii-/-D = (<ffi, <F, dj, u are always doubled after the inf. 
 mood) QffiLuJs &.L& (I, &c.) can do. 
 
 uiq-S&-\- <9^LB = uujL&<3s <ss_iii, &c. (I, &c.) can learn. 
 i" (1) For such sentences as May you be happy ! see 140. 
 
 (2) Can is sometimes idiomatically rendered in other ways : 
 Can you write? S-sr<5(^ OT^^^ Q^fflqa^/r? [Is (the 
 
 manner of) writing intelligible to you ?] 
 Can you read ? fi> eurrHduuinun- ? [Will you read?] 
 " Can " may often be rendered elegantly by the simple future. 
 
 (3) For cannot, must not, &c. See 117. 
 
 Exercise 33. 
 
 104. (a.) l Q<su'fa){E&trjrfr eu/s&i (70) 
 ? (66) ^ ^jeyiirtLj&ntUJ grSU/ru/Beff' 
 SsrrezDUJ GT(L>jsl ^ysyjjuuevrrLnrr? 3 p mL iSl etr'ftsir & < %str ^syuu 
 q-& airtip-Qev eS/L-(SlsQi^&)frLoir ? (68. When <sQ is thus 
 doubled it gives emphasis=o forsake altogether, utterly. 254.) 
 
 80
 
 " ~ftttle 
 
 EXERCISE 33. LESSON 35. 
 
 A STOBY: PRAXIS. 
 
 105. 
 
 ~o&) <su n~ su IT LO IT 
 
 2_ & <3F ifl <! <S5 65 
 
 <5 45 6U /T LD 
 
 ? (92.) 
 
 (130.) 
 
 13 
 
 12 
 
 L^iS 63) UU It-Jin UGV>l 
 
 N.B. ^iL signifies (1) possibility ; (2) /fness, ngU.^7^/o // 
 
 (6.) ! May the little boy shut the door of the house ? 2 Shut the 
 door. 3 He may shut the door. 4 He can [is able to] shut the doo.iv 
 5 May they open the door ? Yes ^^s-ewrtij^-^Tffay I call the 
 servants ? Yes. 7 Can the boy lift this weight ? Yes. 8 Although 
 the people were come, he slept in the house. 9 Is it right to beat the 
 little boy so? 
 
 Although the mother comforted the 
 
 child, it wept. n Can you speak with the gentleman at this 
 time ? 13 Ought the little boy to come on foot (walking) ? 13 May 
 the munshi see the lesson you have written ? u Must the child weep 
 for its mother ? 15 There are ten loads of iron, I think. 
 
 [KB. Yes is often rendered by ^ii> (or vulgarly ^io/r for ,^ii ^gjii) ; but 
 the verb, should be repeated: QurrseurrLDrr ? Ans. QufrseofTLc, not simply 
 
 Lesson 35. 
 
 Exercise 34. 
 A STORY. 
 
 105. [Every word in this tale is in use, and every form deserves 
 attention. Let the learner go over it often, and carefully consult all 
 the references.] 
 
 Muhammadan a 
 
 The honey-drop-tumult. 
 
 Qufluj sen: rf) Get) <ses)L-s@[u'\ QuiriL[p'] 
 great in town to the bazaar having gone, 
 13 21 21 78 
 
 honey which will buy the time, a drop-honey 
 
 50 74 50 131 
 
 ^j^esr Qi&G>) 9(15 & eujsgi 
 
 of it upon a fly having come it alighted 
 25, 21 77, 70 70-(9> 
 
 81 
 
 below was spilt ; 
 70 (2)
 
 105, 106. 
 
 EXEECISE 34. 
 A STOBT: PRAXIS. 
 
 there- which- was 
 
 74 
 
 (a) lizard 
 
 That lizard 
 25 18 
 
 took ; 
 70jt 
 
 That 
 
 the bazaar-man's 
 52, 21 
 
 cat 
 
 18 
 
 having seized took ; 
 77 70 
 
 ^SST L9l.djs[<&] 
 
 cat having seized, 
 
 77 
 
 the Muhammadan's dog having 
 21 77, 56 
 
 it put ; 
 
 That 
 25 
 
 dog 
 
 the bazaar-man having beaten 
 131 77 
 
 having killed, he put ; 
 78, 56 (HI.) 
 
 _ 
 
 That 
 25 
 
 bazaar-man the Muhammadan 
 18 
 
 having cut down he put; 
 
 77 
 
 25 
 
 Muhammadan the other bazaar- 
 18 29 
 
 having cut down, 
 
 77 
 
 they put ; (\ _ Those 
 -PQ (2) ^7 25 
 
 (the) Muhammadans having come, having surrounded, 
 
 29 77 77 
 
 bazaar-men 
 29 
 
 took/; 
 
 uhammadans the having surrou 
 29 77 87 
 
 having seen, for the 
 77,64 29 
 
 bazaar-men many persons came together* And those 
 29 . 20 (2) - >7 10, 8 
 
 and these 
 8, 10, 25 
 
 _ 
 
 having mingled, a row having made, in that side a hun- 
 
 50, 77, 66 50, 77, 58 1. 25 21 
 
 dred persons, 
 172 
 
 in this side 
 25 21 
 
 uiL.iGSGTLc> 
 (wlien they had died), the town 
 
 a hundred persons, to die indeed 
 172 58 (HI.), 169 
 
 utter con- 
 
 all having feared, 
 127 77, 66 
 
 (Jeu/reuu UL- sueo6& suirisiSuj^!. 
 
 fusion having suffered, a hurried removal it took. 
 77 161 ' 50 70 (2). 
 
 106. Notes on the story. 
 
 (1.) La^-i$i5gi-&eo<Lb. Compounds are often formed in Tamil, 
 as in other languages, by merely putting the crude forms together. 
 This is simple Sanskrit. Compare 131. * ^" 
 
 /I
 
 EXERCISE 34. 106, 107. 
 
 PRAXIS. 
 
 (2.) Q^ser ssjfr/5J(</-> (oLj/rjij. Here GLJ/T^J or Quir<igg], meaning 
 time, is used for ^ when '' : <aj/r/s@Lo is the future relative participle 
 (74), but is used indefinitely for any time. Translate, /' When (he) 
 was buying honey.'' 
 
 Thus : .-aya/gsr 0>u[T^S)svr, Qurr^LctQun'^!, &c. 
 
 He went, and while he was going. 
 
 (3.) gisifl<Q.$sr drop [of] honey. The words are put in apposi- 
 tion. Such constructions are frequent. So 9(5 @L_LD ^sssr<ss^fr a pot 
 [of] water, ffirsjisluj^ is here used intransitively. /& / 
 
 (4.) Q(TS35rL_^?, from the root Q^frsfr ((tsrj) [56. III.]. It is used 
 
 several times here, &pr$&, QsfTsssniriT'S&T, &c. This verb is" 
 
 frequently added to the adverbial participle of another, zC^o-^ ^ 
 
 (a.) To give a MIDDLE or REFLEXIVE signification : <suiTKiSlsQ<S[rsssr 
 
 itresr he bought (for himself). It may be thus added to very 
 
 many verbs. . - A~_J-vt^ y-#-^-a-~~j 
 
 (6.) To give the idea of HABITUAL REPEATED action: OT^^* 
 Q & rr zssr L[T sir he continued writing. It is not used when the 
 action is done once for all. 
 
 (c.) Merely as an expletive, adding perhaps an idea of COMPLETE- 
 NESS to the primary verb ; as here, LSi^. ( ^ < ^j<5Q<5/TSR5rL_ t ^j. 
 [Comp. 259.] ^D . /?/ 
 
 (5.) qt#i[u] QuiTtLi-si. Here QUIT is added to the^verb^*^/ 
 part, i^tq-pfp. This verb is added to another to make its transitive 
 character more apparent. It adds force in some cases. [Comp. 256.] 
 Qurr is added to intransitive verbs in the same way [258]. 
 (6.) fir&Qeu : <r emphatic added to the infinitive mood makes it 
 equivalent to the case absolute=they having died^/^a^l . 
 107. VOCABULARY to the story. 
 
 TULUKKAN, Muham- 
 
 madan. 
 
 KADAI, a bazaar. 
 
 a bazaar-man. 
 
 L&&J* MEL, over, above (<r is often 
 added). 
 1, a fly. 
 QLBITLU MOY, swarm, alight upon 
 
 FF 
 
 , honey. as a winged insect (- 
 
 TULI, a drop. 56. III.). 
 
 V!NGU, buy, obtain, re- \ ^isi^ ANGU, there^=^KiQ<s ANOE. 
 ceive. (-QQpsisr 56. II.) G)LJ/T ueosSi PALLI, a lizard (from u&o 
 
 time, with rel. 
 while. 
 
 ^ATTAiTo^er. 
 
 "added). 
 
 (<$ is oftenN 
 
 CINDU, spill ("8p&, 62). 
 
 =a tooth). 
 . K&DU, join (62). 
 
 CUTTU, surround (62). 
 
 III.). 
 
 PIDI, seize (-sSlQmesr 56. 
 ' 
 
 a cat. 
 
 * Both (oLa&Li and gtp are nouns governing the 6th case with the termina- 
 tion g)^r : eSLLtf evr GLOW, GuxsafuSl Sip. ^ They may govern also the 4th
 
 108. LESSON 36. 
 
 THE REFLEXIVE PKONOUN : " SELF," " OWN." 
 
 VETTTJ, cut, cut down (-Si 
 sr, 56.' II.). 
 VEGTT, many, much. 
 Quiufr PEYAR, a name, a person, 
 
 gAxpAi, a row " shin- 
 dy." 
 
 PAKKAM, a side. 
 ftRRU, a hundred (172). 
 
 UL-IGGSTLQ PATTANAM, a town. 
 
 ELLAM, all, the whole. 
 
 utu* BAYA, fear [only the past 
 gi, &c. are in use.] (-) 
 , 66.) 
 
 ALLAQALd- 
 
 LAM, utter confusion (an imita- 
 tive word like hubbub, &c.). 
 
 sii &){$)<& v AL A.$AI, a hurried removal 
 through fear, &c. used with the 
 verb <sun~Ki(3j emigrate. [The 
 Ar. wulsa.~] 
 
 (25 ( frR, surround (60. II.). 
 
 Lesson 36. 
 
 108. (a.) 
 
 THE BEFLEXIVE PRONOUN <sneor. 
 
 [APPENDIX 
 ar is thus declined : 
 
 Case. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 sr T!N, himself, herself, 
 itself. 
 'Sesr'BoBr (The stem TAN shortened). 
 
 Plural. 
 
 f&rria TAM, or <grrta&6fr themselves. 
 (stem TAM). 
 
 and so on like the 1st person (37). Compare the forms of these 
 pronouns carefully. 
 
 (&.) The plurals ^n-ii and ^/r/Hdssfr are used perpetually as polite 
 forms of address : your honour, your excellency. 
 
 " & ^w&iQij&a) Q<susmLo[r ? Do you want this? (Is this 
 wanting to themselves?). 
 
 is a little less respectful, 
 would be used to an equal, and 
 to a junior or inferior only. 
 
 used as equivalent to indeed, and, at the 
 end of a sentence, occasionally takes the place of the verb. X 
 
 ^ & ssmeBttfir ^rrssr this is indeed water (water itself and 
 nothing else). 
 
 * Nouns in /i form verbs with root u suffer. They then lose 
 is doubled (161). 
 
 and
 
 LESSON 36. EXERCISE 35. 108*, 109. 
 
 " SELF," " INDEED." 
 
 cgj/r GjU,T(G!5)/rc5<sTr ? ^/riq/i L9<sfr3srru-/tL ^tr&sr Who went? The mother 
 and the child (went). 
 
 (This latter construction is *ek tobe imitated. Repeat the verb, 
 or give the whole sentence another turn.) f> v^^ ^"T-^/T-^/^^O^ 
 ij Qurr<s[_^'] ^ITSST (SsusssrLa You must, indeed, go. 
 
 The emphatic particle <& is more elegantly used in this case : 
 
 That boy his lesson 
 
 [106. (4.)] 
 learnt. 
 
 ^ Wherever the meaning is his, her or its own, referring to the 
 subject (suus, -a, -um), use sssr^istsiiu, <ssor or ^SSTJJJ, and rarely ^a/ 
 
 68)IG)IUJ, ^<SU^<3S)LUJ, ^jSjIjjSy&XlL-UJ, &C. 
 
 108.* VOCABULARY. 
 
 ar each one (he, he). j s. &^^LB ^ITTAM, ifiitt. 
 uir sing (62). 
 
 S^J&J&JULD ability. 
 
 exhibit, 
 
 (56. III.), cause to see, 
 
 gANGiTHAM, song. 
 
 wag 
 
 8. utr&SlujLo, PAKKYAM, happiness. 
 
 Exercise 35. 
 
 109. (a.) ! The bazaar-man beat his cat. 2 The Muhammadan 
 killed his dog. 3 The people left their houses and emigrated. 
 4 There is honey in the jungle. 5 Is there honey in the jungle? 
 6 There is no honey in the jungle. 7 Give me a drop of water. 8 Is 
 it right to catch flies ? 9 Did the villagers kill the bazaar-man's dog ? 
 10 No, the Muhammadan killed it. n Come when I write the letter. 
 12 Come when I have written the letter. 13 Go after you have seen 
 the petition. u He came before the clerk had read the report to the 
 gentleman. 
 
 . 10 & 6GST 65) l_ Q & tU ILJ SO IT W IT 1 U
 
 110. 
 
 LESSON 37. 
 NEGATIVE VEBB. 
 
 12 
 
 a (58. I.), 
 
 14- 
 
 ST U fT X & tLJ LD 
 
 [106. (4.)] 
 
 (50.) 
 
 16 
 
 Lesson 37. 
 
 THE NEGATIVE VEEB./ 
 110. The Tamil has a peculiarity nearly Confined* to the family 
 of South Indian dialects ; it has a negative -teffii-of the verb. And 
 this is formed by adding to the root the personal terminations with- 
 out any particle indicative of time. Compare 
 
 ui^.-\-&Q^i-\- ^jssr=ui^sQQjsesr I read. 
 UL$- + Q+G8r=ui$.(2ujesr I do not read. 
 
 [The learner may imagine, if he pleases, that the absence of any middle particle 
 denoting time signifies that the action of the verb takes place in no time what- 
 ever ; and so an absolute negative for all times is formed.] 
 
 Paradigm. 
 
 EiOOtS UUf. PADI, pi NADA, 
 
 Person.! 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st 
 
 uuf-Qiueer, 
 Queer. 
 
 LU IT LCI , 
 
 (aUlTLD. 
 
 2nd 
 
 3rd m. 
 
 /sieuireir, 
 
 LJi^LttJ/T, 
 
 (not com.). 
 
 Obs. (1.) <L and eu are inserted, and a. elided, in these three forms 
 respectively. 
 
 * Compare Rask's Anglo-Saxon Grammar, preface xxix. Old Scandinavian 
 poetry affords traces of a negative not only in verbs, but also in pronouns. 
 Some of the Caucasian dialects exhibit the same peculiarity. 
 
 86
 
 EXERCISE 36. LESSON 
 NEGATIVE VERB. 
 
 111-113. 
 
 (2.) This whole form is concise and elegant, but rather pedantic. 
 Some persons of it only are in common use,' ^ nt- <^ 
 1 111. VOCABULARY, i-^ 
 
 GIDANGIT, a " godown," 
 store-room. 
 
 .ia TOTTAM, a garden. 
 KUDIRAI, a horse. 
 BAXDI, a buggy, cart, 
 
 o thing, matter. # A 
 affair. fA & ff /) 
 news. *c E )r T # 
 
 112. (a.) l ^gytB 
 
 /t M 
 
 inquire 
 
 56. 
 
 i walk [56. (I.)]) 9 n > happen, 
 
 take place. 
 
 be plain, understood (used 
 
 impersonally), (56. I.). 
 ggiu/r / sir! (voc. of ggujsjr an 
 
 honourable person.) 
 $> run (56. II.). 
 
 Exercise 36. 
 
 QUIT 
 
 (6.) ! Is it in the store-room ? I don't know. 3 That horse does 
 not run. 3 Why does not the bullock run? 4 The gentleman must 
 inquire into my affair. 5 Have you heard the news ? 6 Do you not 
 hear the command of the gentleman (Gas^Gj/r) ? "He says, I don't 
 know. 8 He said that he did not know. 9 When I inquired about 
 those matters the villagers did not understand what I said. 10 Will 
 that little horse go in my bandy ? n I think that money will not 
 pass in our village. 
 
 Lesson 38. 
 
 THE NEGATIVE MODES OF THE VERB (continued). 
 113. The negative most frequently used, and, on the whole, the 
 
 best, is obtained by adding ^)&j^sv=not (43), to the infinitive of the
 
 114-116. 
 
 LESSON 38. EXERCISE 37. 
 NEGATIVE VERB. 
 
 verb. This compound negative form is indefinite as to time, and is 
 the same for all numbers and persons. 
 
 jsrrssr, j , ^ I, thou, he, do ^ 
 
 ^euesr, > ^ifficaaSeuSsD &c. did > not walk. 
 
 &c. ) shall or will ) 
 
 114. j)suSsu is also added to other parts of the verb, especially to 
 the neuter participial noun (87, 88). 
 
 thou, &c., do not 
 do, am not doing. 
 
 } QffiLjSgi +@)sv'<!!oV=Qffiii<$j$60%oV I, thou, &c., did not 
 &c., &c. | 
 I 
 L 
 
 do, have not done. 
 
 I, thou, &c., will not 
 
 (at any time) do. 
 
 This is more common, but less elegant, than the former. 
 115. VOCABULARY. 
 
 r iLL testimony (also a witness). jSiuiriu&u^soiJa a court, a place of 
 witness. I lusflceT&v^evL^ a place). 
 
 (COURT) is often used. 
 the complainant. 
 
 (L$jr*l opposition} the 
 
 /T<a/6u {unjrir)'*' guard, ward,! 
 
 prison. 
 @il_ a note. 
 
 asueafi attend to (56. III.). 
 @fS indicate, regard (56. III.). 
 e.@**/nr[<5] sit dou-n (60. HI.).) 
 
 .jSujtTUJiJz reason, right. 
 
 / @ justice. 
 
 Gu&S&j a pleader. 
 
 .^srra/ a measure. A.~c< A ? v 
 
 ^euGusfTen (this measure) thus 
 
 much. ( 25.) 
 ^euGnetre^ (that measure) so 
 
 much. 
 OTajffljerria/ (what measure) how 
 
 much? 
 QL$ (56. HI.) tear. 
 
 Exercise 37. 
 
 116. 
 
 (22.) / 
 
 * A word written thus is to be considered as a synonym of the one after 
 which it is put; bat is either a foreign word, or a vulgar and objectionable, 
 though common one. 
 
 t Lit. " having indicated what, do yon speak so much ? " ($<] is equiva- 
 lent to regarding, concerning, about. Comp. 230. 
 
 -if
 
 LESSON 39. 117, 118. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS : DEFECTIVES. 
 
 7 rS 
 em 
 
 QUIT LUULLiresr. ^ &-6tsr<s(& ) && : irL^) 
 
 si/OTT &<sii<o 
 
 <5E 6$ 6V 50 . 14 / Q 3= IT <SST <SST 
 
 ii <flujrr? 15 
 
 (6.) T Why has he not written the deposition? 2 Why do the 
 peons beat the witness? 3 The gentleman will do you justice. 
 4 What fault has the physician committed ? 5 Why do these villagers 
 not pay the instalment (due) ? 6 The child does not sleep. 7 Although 
 I have called the defendant's witnesses they come not. 8 Although 
 the munshi read the lesson to him he does not pronounce it rightly. 
 9 Although his father beat him the little boy does not attend to his 
 lessons. 
 
 Lesson 39. 
 SOME DEFECTIVE AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 117. According to 110, from the roots iam^Q hook on, L join, 
 Qurr go, 6g5crjp/ be possible, <&&) agree, <s@ be fit (8007), Qurrgs suffice, 
 9 agree, Q<susssrSl need, are made the very common forms : , 
 
 Sing. 1st pers. ^/rilGt-e^ I will not, cannot. J AT-/"^-^^ 
 2nd ,, /-o/rtli_/nu-ir./r thou wilt not, canst not. 
 3rd L&rrL-iireBr-iT he will not, cannot. 
 LarrL-i[rr she will not, cannot. 
 LarrL-irrgd it will not, cannot. 
 Plur. 1st pers. L^mLQt-rrLct we will not, cannot. 
 
 2nd LdfriLiS-iTs&r ye or you will not, cannot. 
 3rd u>irL-iirir<BGr they will not, cannot. 
 
 3a-i-iTgi it must not be, cannot be. \ epsueurrgi it does not agree. 
 
 Q u IT <s IT J2 " it is no go " (vulg.). ! QsLisssnrrus it is not necessary, 
 
 "it won't fit" (vulg.). (This is quite irregular. For 
 
 it is not proper. G?su<sssr{_/rsy/rii>. Q<sue&srirr + 
 
 it is not fit, right. ^^ 110.) 
 it is not sufficient. 
 
 118. The affirmative of <ffii_i_/rj>j (=it is impossible) is formed 
 j regularly (3rd part. neut. fut. 72.) <5i-ii ; of <&0orrgi, <&p@tJz (comp. 
 70.) ; of ffsrrgi, ^@ii ; of ggejQj/rjs, eg(gtii ; and of " 
 These are all common.
 
 119, 120. EXEKCISE 38. 
 
 IBREGULAE AND DEFECTIVE VERBS, 
 
 119. a. _ . 
 
 /- May this honey be put in the store-room ? It must 
 
 iJ* not. * 
 
 b. @IJ545<& @@SO)/T LJSSST^LuSgi) G?LJ/T(2jjLOrr / QlJ[r<& LOfP l -irgj. 
 
 Will this horse go in the bandy ? It will not. 
 
 Is the petition which the plaintiff It is not a fitting one. 
 has presented a fitting one ? 
 
 Is it a fit thing to abuse him ? To abuse is not becoming. 
 
 e. L$ ff !$ u rr $ QstrrnLuf-Qeu (90) Lojps Qsirs<s "* 
 Should the respondent present a petition in court? 
 
 /r\ /a /^ /TV /"h 
 
 LD/T ? Q<S/T* 
 
 He need not (should not, &c.). 
 
 Exercise 38. 
 120. (a.) - 1 gjfi/spu stnuiussr /_//rz_ii 
 
 Q & IT ev 6$i Si Qy IT & sir . 
 
 fa 
 
 (116.) 
 
 (87.) errott/ru (127.) 
 
 $UUlp-U Qu&tiJl (88.) 
 
 (idiom for & if) uu IT ILJ & Q&rwgji, which is more cor- 
 rect). 8 /B/rsir epssr^uLo (172, 126=anything at all) 
 
 r (y&sr. ^ (o 'eu sssr /_ IT LO , j&juurr ! ^ jy /5 ^ u u esyr LD 
 
 Qutrsir^jj SDIL//T / G? LJ FT ^i LD . (JLJ/T^/LD .' fFor 
 _ we often hear up^y ^j or u/bp to/rLL/_/r < ^jy=^ won't touch 
 (suffice). Thus, jy/Bj<F &LbuenLb 6iJu9/r)jru&(<3ju upQy&i, the 
 wages won't suffice for my euiiStjpi. This is often said by the common 
 people.] 
 
 (6.) * The watchman said that the villagers beat him ; but the 
 witnesses did not give their deposition rightly. 2 Why will you make 
 a disturbance in the village ? 3 Although the defendant killed the 
 dog you must forgive his fault. 4 They all sat down in the court. 
 5 They were seated in the place of justice when the gentleman came 
 in. 6 This and that agree. " Tell him how the affair happened. 
 
 90
 
 LESSON 40. 
 NEGATIVE VERB. 
 
 121. 
 
 8 He says that lie cannot learn the lesson. 9 The servant said he 
 would not do that. 10 They denied all knowledge of the affair. n The 
 munshi said that I need not write that lesson. 
 
 Lesson 40. 
 
 OTHER NEGATIVE FORMS or THE "\ER] 
 121. (1.) An ordinary f amiliar^mperatiTeY To the 3rd sing, 
 neut. neg. add <& for the sing.; r + a_u> for the polite form ; and 
 + 2./Qsfr for the plural. 
 Thus, from fsi-su-rr^i it walks not (does not happen) are formed, 
 
 SL--<3j-[rQ^ don't walk. 
 / Vjj^/ L_-ffl>T(2 : ,3 J^LQ don't walk, sir! 
 
 < SL--su-j ( 3 r s.L's~^- do not tvalk, I pray you. 
 4 (2.) The negativeVerbal- participle ($7.) is formed bj 
 or ^LDGV to the root. One of the forms is 
 3rd sing. neut. neg. 110. 
 
 UL$.-iu-rrgi not learning. 
 
 (3.) By adding to the above ^tie auxiliary verb @0 (sometimes 
 (oLj/r and other roots), in all its p'arts, a complete negative verb may 
 be constructed, though the for^is are rather cumbrous. Thus, 
 
 not learn (he is not learning). 
 
 /5i-<siJ-fr do not walk. 
 ft pL--6u-[TLb6Sl(njiE@!y&j if you do not walk. 
 
 Further examples are /not necessary, but compounds' of this kind 
 are constantly used. 
 
 (4.) A negative relative participle for all tenses, and participial 
 nouns, answering to the forms in (74, 87.), are formed by changing 
 a. of the verbal participle in ^^ into <jy (or sometimes, chiefly in 
 poetry, by simply omitting ^). 
 
 gi f s. + ^>j==) jsiaiirp who or which walks not. 
 sr L/XfuJ/r-^ 68)uujsr he [is] a boy who learns not (or has not 
 learned). 
 
 (62.) s a house which I have not built. 
 (5.) A^.d thence we obtain the following negative participial 
 nouns :-/ 
 
 / ( t5L--Gu-iT<g<3UGisr he who does not walk. 
 
 / Singular \ ^L-.-<su-ir^eu0r she who does not walk. 
 ptmi-sp& that which does not walk. 
 r5L--w-!T@<3iJK he (hon.) who does not walk. 
 Plural < ( ^i_-au-/r i ^aij/r- l 5isfr they who do not walk. 
 
 eTr they which do not walk, 
 = one who has not.
 
 
 -/ 
 
 &L- 
 
 u^t*-/ 
 
 121,* 122. EXERCISE 39. 
 
 NEGATIVE VERB. 
 
 121.* VOCABULARY. 
 
 . n.). L^^p^i MATTU, tae relative value 
 
 , &e dispersed, come \ of a metal, its fi 
 
 neness. 
 
 to nothing, fail (56. II.). ! S-earr URAI, standard of gold. 
 
 LD NANAM, Wisdom. <3:LGL-I TEMBU (62.), Sob. 
 
 ^(gjigi/rioorin ANNANAM, folly, ggiu 6r (57.), cease rest. 
 
 ignorance, heathenism. Neither nor, e.<i 2-fi with a 
 
 eSlirr vipA=aS/i_fr incessant. negative. 
 
 j, thread, a work on 
 
 science. 
 
 Exercise 39. 
 122. (a.) J /f jiiGinLD 
 
 Q & til ILJ tr jid (7K KI & err .' Qu <f rr QtE^iLjiEissfr ! 
 
 o <sruui^-&jQF)L^? (How will the lesson come ? 
 How can he understand it?) 7 u^(y^ arrrflujLC) &p(y&i. 
 8 vr [88.] ui_rrp<5G)<u u6urr<5sr. 9 L_//r 
 
 Lj<$lujtbrD [Fronf =sy^2/^ 68.] 
 ! (131.) 10 ^/rs3r Q-SL-rru Qurresr 
 _sjn/r/iyii) )ffo3so (w^a^ is gro^ without 
 effort is not valued). n 6$i_/r (254) Ln<5S)LpiLiirau (136.) 
 
 (aurrtu-f Q & IT $ ;& &i <surr(/jjfEJ&ffir. (Idiom: without his knowing it. 
 Probably a corruption from ^)susjr ^y<s&p ^gy^tu/rLOisx).) [Many 
 of these sentences can be rendered in various ways. Try/] 13 
 
 (6.) * I had not seen him. 3 If he will not come. 3 Why do not 
 the servants open the doors ? 4 If they do not open the doors when 
 I tell them (prresr Q^/reujy/ti Quirgi) what can I do ^syrsyr^sn)^^ 
 ' 5 If the attorney does not properly represent the 
 huiriMivjFCUjjj^jXfaj fflujiriL<s -s/r/fttL/ansro^u QU&ITLZGO 
 what can the plaintiff do ? 6 This is a thing which has not 
 happened and cannot happen. 7 Silence ! this is an impossible thing. 
 8 What is not possible to us, is possible to Him. 
 
 92
 
 LESSON 41. 
 VULGAR FORMS. 
 
 123. 
 
 41. 
 
 SOME MISCELLANEOUS CORRUPT FORMS. 
 
 123. (a.) (70. 2.) The form u-q.pQpar, &c., is vulgarly pro- 
 nounced uisf.<f(Sf&r, and uu).s>@jgi is uff.cF.sFjD or ui$.<!F&. So uuf-gjg) 
 is ULQ-ffjK; This is not to be imitated, but in very common conversa- 
 tion can hardly be quite avoided. Thus, Qutr&fr^ or Qurrfa- is 
 used for Guxuflsargi or Quirssr^i. This is elegantly Quiri^fo^i. So 
 cgjuSsBrjB, 4BSOTJJ or ^itiibgii is vulg. 4g<F<flrjj or ^<F*. 
 
 (6.) The shortened Q<fiLujir is occasionally used in composition 
 where Q&iuuuiTLzeo (121. 2.) would be the full form. This is chiefly 
 found in the phrases D'6U6u/r eSiLifr&j, O<FUJOJ/T a$)/lL_/r6u, Qurr&fr 
 sSlL-L-n-60, and the like. s&tLitT6o=.if (you) Zeave (68). Thus, Q^tu 
 ttj.T abJili-fl'eu will mean "wo doing, if (you) leave" ; |)6U6u/r sQiLiireo 
 = "not being, if (you) Zeawe " ; Qurr&iT a9ilt_ff-eu=" not going, if (you) 
 leave." They are equivalent to " unless you," &c., "if you do not," &c. 
 
 The full forms Q^iijaj/ruaeu D(5,;ff<T6u, &c., are perhaps more 
 elegant. 
 
 (c.) For Q&iL ! 5ir) (95. a.) you will often hear Q<ptL<:,T&<3Sir=if you 
 do, G> UK <&>>&& IT =.if (you) go, &c. This is either from the poetical 
 form Q&ii<^&<n~&j, or from Q<piLi<ireo -sireo (su + ^/Dcf5, QftUjtfirjb 
 <E,rsu), where <S,TSXJ is a poetical word for /rsu/i time=when. ^ 7 J 
 
 (d.) Letters are often interchanged in different parts of the Tamil 
 country. Thus, Lg is Cu in Madras and sir in Tinevelly and the south. 
 
 G>WL$ a fowl, is G's/roS in Madras and GWsrfl in the south. 
 
 c? and uj are also interchanged. 
 
 Thus, sSliuiTijl sickness, is in the south often eBfsrjS. 
 
 (e.) The 3rd plural (mas. and fern.) is strangely corrupted in very 
 vulgar conversation. Thus, Q fill SUIT ITS r becomes QfUjsun-KiQsir, 
 &c. ; Q^FiLj^/r/rasrr is sometimes pronounced something like QcFul/ 
 
 (/.) There is a common form which the lower orders sometimes 
 use in addressing a superior, that is puzzling to a beginner : for 
 |)0u3sv they say {jjjeveSisis, &c. This seems to be the honorific plural 
 S.ISIS&T added ___ Thic^is carried to a great extentinMadras.____- - 
 
 (</.) We have in En^Iisir^r^u^jer-orf^ofdT^wnlchr^are apparently 
 mere reduplications, such as hurly-burly, topsy-turvy, &c. In Tamil 
 these occur much more frequently. In general any noun may be so 
 repeated (of course, in the merest colloquial dialect). If the word 
 does not begin with <&, the reduplicated syllable generally does. 
 Thus, a9/s>(^ fire-wood becomes sSlptg S;r)g>=" fire-wood, &c."; GLOSTO^ 
 Ses)<ff= is "the table and its appurtenances"; <f5L.ijz.6u <9 ilif.su for 
 <Silif.6x) a cot; Q<s/T(g5<Fii Q/st&j&Ln for Qsrr^^LD a little. This is 
 worth noting carefully, /z. 3 S _ z 7 ^ / 
 
 1^ [This whole lesson may be talked over with a munshi or other intelligent 
 native and such forms collected. These are given as a specimen. The great 
 matter is to know exactly what the people say. We can choose our own words 
 and forms at leisure.]
 
 124, 125. EXEBCISE 40. 
 
 VTLGAB FORMS. 
 
 124. VOCABULARY. 
 
 @3Tssriii INNAM, yef. : (^sro/o KUERAT, (56. 1.) 6e deficient, 
 
 QUIT p6, 00, added to intransitive j (56. III.) diminish, lessen. 
 
 words, gives the idea of com- ! ^i2?Lp TAMIR, Tamil. 
 
 pleteness, as Qua popu does ! L//nsro<a PASHAI, a language. 
 
 to transitives. 106. (5.) 
 
 Exercise 40. 
 
 LySZOT-^GZTJ^cF 
 
 Quir<s)<sti, 
 
 (68.) 
 
 having done, 
 
 become, is accomplished (58. IH.)=the work is 
 finished. Very common form.] * eresresr / (?<a;3oO ^fffr? (What, 
 has the work become ?=well, is the work finished?). 5 Madras cook 
 (speaks) G?/r9 Q&^^u QUIT&& for Q&irifi Qf^^pju QUIT 
 u9{bgu, the fowl is dead. 6 Tinevelly Shanan speaks: j^Q^syrasr 
 jretssT G&I* Q^tflujrrdjj (every R pronounced with a whirr), 
 GTsisTiotsr eQiurr^t <or<sisr^u Q 5 ifi uj IT jbi (I don't know what *^- 
 disease this is). 7 Q&sii&ir ! ^sy/B^ QsuBsd ^SSTSSTLCI 
 ^(Liir? 8 Q'fiij^QeijSso 
 (ironical). 9 /f ^esrssrio *!&, 
 
 jji)(!5&f D &l <oT<SGi<ssr ? 10 erGSTesTLb ^sF&gji, Q&insVGyi (Tell me 
 how you got on?) ^ arriflujLb (Lp ty. (&fj & gjj , for (Lpiy-ftp>gtf (The 
 affair is accomplished). 
 
 (b.) * This work is finished. 2 If you do this evil you will perish. 
 3 Don't go ! * You had better not go. 5 Put it on the table. 6 Do 
 you understand Tamil (^L/Sip or piQtpuutresHty) ? 7 I understand it 
 a little (red. form). 8 Unless you go you cannot obtain it. 9 If he 
 does not send his servant for it the gentleman will not give it. 10 If 
 you do not hear [obey] you will perish. n Should the little boy be so 
 disobedient? (<g>jii5i&/TL>@u, 56. II.) 
 
 becomes sssr&^r in common talk; thus, pesr&uj is 15 sssr '@S)i 
 
 94
 
 LESSON 42. 
 INTERROGATIVES MADE UNIVEKSALS. 
 
 126, 127. 
 
 Lesson 42. 
 
 WORDS AND FORMS DENOTING UNIVERSALITY. 
 
 126. Some uses of e-ii and. 
 
 (a.) When added to an interrogative form e_ii makes a universal. //. 
 
 ' <oruQutT(Lg#2 when? + -Ld = 6TuQu[r(LfigiLb always. 
 2- loTSussr who ?-\--La = <zT<5i]jjgtiL> everyone. <3 1*-*~*-3 / * 
 3 <orKi(9) where ? + s-Ln = Tizi(3j LA everywhere. 
 
 how ?+2-La = sTLJLJL$ttL//-o in every way, by all means, 
 who [more poet/| + &Lifi=(U/ra/(i{ (sar changed to /r) 
 
 all persons, 
 which -{--LCI 
 
 (6.) a.zi is also added to QL&QO, iSlssrQssr, Lo^pu 
 words used adverbially. [Comp. the Latin use of 
 
 and many other 
 
 besides. 
 (=another 8tep)-\-^-u^=-LCi^sui^.^LCi again. 
 
 127. <ST6u6u/r=a7Z, f&eoall, ^j^stsr so much. [Poet.] 
 (a.) OTsusu/r as an adjective is prefixed to nouns, but requires s./i 
 to be put after the noun. 
 
 Lbtsafi<iT<(!ofLci all men. 
 c, all women. 
 all houses. 
 
 So OTsueu/r tacBfl^/rtftoriqti (2nd case). 
 
 (6.) sr&j&jtruD (OTgueu^ + a-ii)) is a neuter noun= every thing. It is 
 declined after the analogy of nouns in ii, substituting ^/rijj; for 
 .j$j, and requires the a_/i after each case. 
 
 2nd case : 6rueu/rfiu/DDpajtJo, &c. 
 3rd <oT6v)rr<sii/b ( 3(yLa, &c. 
 
 (c.) &&6V is a Sanskrit word==aZZ. It is used as an adjective^ 
 ueuff-. <^sx; uxsafl^frcs^/i, &c., aZZ mew, &c. It is also used as a 
 neuter noun, &&SVLD, and declined regularly, like tojr/i but with the 
 addition of s_ii. fftfeu^fffflD^u^fi dssssn-rTsiir he saw the whole, all. 
 
 (d.) .jySsor makes ^Sszsr^^j (sing, neut.) so WZMC^, and ^SSOTUJ (plur. 
 neut.) so many. ^i%o5r<5giLQ=the totality, is regularly declined. These 
 are little used except in poetry. 
 
 (e.) OTeuisv/r, cF<5su and ^Sscr all form nouns plural (mas. and 
 
 fern.). Thus :- 
 
 LD, com. 87.) 
 
 
 , 
 
 > all people. 
 
 These are declined by inserting the signs of the cases between the
 
 128, 129. 
 
 LESSON 42. EXERCISE 41. 
 UNIVEESALITT. 
 
 |(/.) These forms are often put after the nominative case of the 
 noun to which they belong. Thus : 
 
 ULLi_63JfTii ST&J&JITLCI &eoKiln)jr)] (70. 2.) the whole town was agitated ; 
 rE-Birir&err all the villagers came; 
 uonrru-jLo <ffi-LJL9ili_/rs3r he called all who had 
 learned. 
 
 Many of the other words in 126 may be used in the same way. 
 (gr.) Instead of OTeueufr^Lo and .jycfesnaj^La, sreuG'eu/r^Lb and 
 ^'SsBrCcfflj/rjTjjii are elegantly used. 
 
 (h.) Q-pQf &d j. = whole ; (LpQ6G) LZ = the whole ; 
 =the whole. The last two are declined as the words in (e.). 
 requires 2.03 to be added to the noun to which it is prefixed. 
 128. VOCABULARY. 
 
 KOTTAN, a mason. 
 KOLLAN, a blacksmith. 
 KftLi, hire. 
 
 errti 9AMBALAM, wages, 
 a present. 
 
 CAND6SHAM, 
 
 (used also for a present). 
 
 ABARADAM, a fine. 
 ULAGAM, the world. 
 
 2_<srr<orr ULLA, 
 
 <Sv, ovaa, ov). 
 s. ^(5 TIRU, sacred, holy. 
 
 is existing (= 
 
 CABAI, a congregation, as 
 sembly. 
 
 the holy Church. 
 POTTU, extol (56. 31.). 
 KONCAM, a little, a few. 
 
 ARA^AN, @JT/T<F/T IRA^i, tt 
 
 king (with or without @). 
 KAL, time (for .s/reutn). 
 (S.g/rjy.;i) ORUKALTJM, a^ any 
 ttme whafever. Ji+rf-s*-.^- 
 r T!R, fee removed, 60rpcfcTf- 
 (56. HI.). 
 
 Exercise 41. 
 
 129. (a.) !Did you see all the peons? 2 Why are all the vil- 
 lagers assembled together? 3 A11 who had committed sin feared. 
 4 You must learn all the lesson well. 5 He wrote and sent a letter to all 
 the servants. 6 Why did all the carpenters leave their work? "Where 
 are all the bricklayers ? 8 Give all the blacksmiths their hire. 9 Have 
 all the servants received their wages ? 10 The boy who learns all the 
 lessons well. n The kings who govern all the world. 12 The king 
 who governs the whole world. 13 I will fine you. 14 He never learns. 
 15 1 shall never see him again. 16 How many came besides ? 
 
 (b.) 
 
 eu IB ^5 IT rs GIT 
 (58. IV.) (124.) 3 
 Q u IT <D jyi in . 
 
 l6\)6\)trt-D 
 
 U ff IT B LD 
 
 (50.) <3UIT!E1 
 
 i.U 
 
 96
 
 LESSON 43. 
 QUALIFYING WORDS. 
 
 130, 131. 
 
 Q a rr <STJ & u> 
 
 (58. III.) (108. c.). 
 ^ rsrrssr ujiru^ 
 
 (I'm a destitute wretch, 90.). ^ <o7"<5i/ayu9(77jtb 
 
 12> f< 
 
 sr<ssr a/susti sjrfrujfr ujrirujr 
 !" (This is poetical, but understood.) 13 ^/rs3T 
 
 Q & rr <sv s$i en IT <ssi '. 14) 
 ) (154.) <)<si7<a/6rr 
 Sl(7y<s$T. ^ 5 <F sin u ILI rr <stn rr [180.] 
 (100.) 
 
 oisr [239.] 
 
 Lesson 43. 
 
 QUALIFYING WORDS. APPOSITION. 
 Appositive Enlargements of Subject or Predicate. 
 130. It may be broadly stated, that in Tamil tffeere are no adjec- 
 tives, strictly so called. How then are nouns qualified ? [Compare 
 74.] The past relative participle of $ _ (58. II.) (74.) is ^ssr or 
 ^Slm (forms of ^oSssr or ^^37-):=" which have become." These 
 inserted between any two nouns will either convert the former into 
 something answering to an adjective, or place the two in apposition. 
 Thin iu cumuiuii ami dearly intelligible. 
 
 )<suuLJfl-<5BT #L-<5G)i a red 
 which has become red. 
 iiilinr<SF[reurr8iL 
 
 irrrffr 
 is used for 
 
 jacJcet (&IGUUL-I redness, 
 You may also say WQJUL/ 
 
 David, David the king. You can say 
 irrr&[T (in common language 
 
 uutLi 
 
 ^(gLQ or ^LQ (72*) is used for ^sor poetically, as is 
 (132.). 
 
 Thus, <s$ir$&)La ^ffffsvr a heroic Icing [a ki 
 
 131. Prom the above it appears that two^nouns may often be 
 simply joined to form a compound, after the manner of steam -ship, 
 brick-house, &c. This is constantly done in Tamil poetry, and is, 
 doubtless most in accordance with the genius of the language. In 
 fact, it may be laid down as a law of the language that every noun 
 
 97 
 
 13
 
 
 131. LESSON 43. 
 
 ADJECTIVE FORMS. 
 
 becomes an adjective by being prefixed to another noun, with or 
 without change. [The Sanskrit scholar may compare these forms 
 with TAT-PTTRUSHA and KARMMAD'HARAYA compounds.] 
 
 (a.) Sometimes this is done without any other change than the 
 doubling of letters ; as, jiuQurrfl a spark of fire ($? fire, QutrrSl a 
 spark) ; Q^Q^fS^lsm'&osur the outside verandah (0^0 a street, J^-sabrSsasr 
 elevated verandah) ; ^rfi<srojG?uiG > 6u(oLj/r<6ff;(6<jr he went (along) the top 
 of the bank of the tank. 
 
 (b.) When the former noun ends in LQ, that letter is elided. 
 
 [This is especially the case in Sanskrit compounds.] 
 
 Thus, Lmr&Q&mJzn a branch of a tree (^J-LD a tree, Q<sfrti>q a 
 branch); &ITGI] sueueusroui omnipotence (&fr<suLa all, sueueusroi-a power). 
 
 (c.) Various changes take place in the former word, of which the 
 following are types : [Com. 18. c. d.] 
 
 &r5jisSl an iron chain (2)<25ii>(// iron, &KjtleSl a chain). 
 <5fr3srr a young bullock (OTJT^^J a bullock, <ff/rctarr a young 
 
 sr fish from the river (=gp a river, iSear a fish). 
 
 a flock of sheep (=^ a sheep, L&tB6s>@ afiock). 
 <s/T a palmyra jungle (uSocr a palmyra, <s/r a jungle). 
 [The nasal is hardened intp the surd ; L_ of and p of ^ doubled ; ^ii 
 inserted.] 
 
 (d.) )Gvr, -jy^^Jj c^/ojjy are often used as connectives; and are 
 thus used as signs of the sixth case, uffieQesr uireo cow's milk, <su<sSs 
 L-<gi L>6sfi^ssr a man of this place. (L^6^~^~ 
 
 l^ [The inflectional base is used in compounds, Comp. 21.] 
 (e.) Some nouns of quality ending in e&t-a (184) when prefixed to 
 other nouns undergo certain euphonic changes. The following are 
 chiefl to be noticed : & r r7,jQr 7 n 
 ss, becomes Qu( 
 
 j&iu, 
 
 rfluj, .j 
 
 u&&, GZULZ. 
 
 , 7 
 
 (1.) Qu(iT)<se)L& greatness, becomes Qu(m, Quflm, QLJOJ, Qurr. 
 (2.) &jpjee)L& littleness, becomes )<p, wj 
 
 (3.) ^(TFjeroin preciousness, becomes 
 (4.) u&<5G)L> freshness, becomes 
 
 jE(6^<9r pride 
 
 Qufliti pesrGsiLn a great benefit. LJ i ~y~n 
 
 QUQTJUZ u/rstfa great sinner [before <&, <, ^, u]. 
 uiflesruLG heavenly bliss [before a vowel]. 
 
 [Qufliu may be regarded also as a kind of past relative participle. Compare 
 
 ULSlLl, 74. 
 
 QfjLQ is a kind of future rel. part. (74) from 0LJ(/5(@) 62, grow great."] 
 [Of these the roots are undoubtedly QUIT (u/r, ueu), ^ff) (^eu), ^fr, 
 but the Nannul, with good reason, (Sut. 135, 6.) treats each of them as
 
 
 H> 
 
 LESSON 43. 132, 133. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 having become first an abstract noun, and as having been variously modified, 
 when placed as the first member of a compound by the rejection of es>Lo, 
 the addition of g)(u or e_iis, the lengthening of the root vowel, or the redupli- 
 cation of the final root consonant. Comp. Pope's III. GEAM. 121.] 
 
 132. OTS5TJ32/LO is the rel. part. fut. of srsar say (70. 1.) (74.), Lit. 
 
 " whom] one would say" It is thus used '- 
 OT2<Jrj22//i gfijTrrffir king David. 
 
 1 
 
 "[of 
 
 *'* /n,Tffln-;*n /zrcza- ?n;/a <s/ruL/ f/ig defence of shanie. 
 
 - ^essfi ^/TL! ^Zawf <Ae ladder of 'piety. 
 
 This is rather stiff and pedantic. 
 
 133. The root a. err signifies " existence, the having within." To it 
 are referred the following verbal forms : 
 
 and numbers. ) ^ 
 
 2_6?r<orrjj} is used to signify " it is" but more generally " it is true," 
 " it is really so." 
 
 Eel. part. &-r&r containing, possessing within itself. [Co. 184.] 
 This last form added to a noun will have nearly the same effect as 
 
 Thus : |)jr<f5<5(tp<srrsrr (o^sussr ($)rrs<&Lin mercy) a merciful God. 
 Sometimes a-grr-srr and ^ssr may be used indiscriminately. 
 STGST LSrf?uj(LpSTrsrr (^Lairjrssr my dear son. - 
 
 Generally, however, the difference between ^<56r=liaving become, 
 and S-STT <str=having possessed, must be observed. 
 
 fir<s<S(Lpisfr<srr L9^/r not ^ffS<SLafrssr. 
 srrta/rszjr (o<srr&j not ,/f srr(yi<sTr(srr. 
 
 The opposites to 2-(srr<srr and ^SBT are ^jb/o, g)6U6D/r^, which are in 
 the same way added to nouns : 
 
 Thus, ^zfs&Lapro merciless. [^y,p cease, 68. 74.] 
 
 u SGGTLIJ GO rr<&= penniless. [$&i>=not, 112. a double nega- 
 
 tive.] 
 
 To Sanskrit nouns FFSST (HINA), desitute of, is added. 
 Thus, i-itsfiuSeBT S 
 
 > u^eafl^egr a senseless man. 
 
 [In Tamil grammar^the 4th class of words consists of those called a_rfl< Qfrrei) 
 = quality words. Comp. Pope's III. GRAM. 118-121. 
 
 These are subdivided into Quujfr _fl = noun quality, and sflSsor s_fl=yei-b 
 quality. 
 
 The words included under these divisions are used respectively to qualify 
 nouns and verbs ; they may, therefore, be called adjectives and adverbs. They 
 are, however, really nouns and participles, and it will tend greatly to aid the 
 learner in acquiring the Tamil idiom if he steadily regard them as such.] 
 
 99
 
 u 
 
 134, 135. 
 
 EXERCISE 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 VOCABULARY 
 i sweetness. 
 
 JLJ bitterness, 
 newness. 
 
 IT opposite. 
 
 i little. C * ft f^- ~v 
 
 i custom, familiarity.* 
 SUK'HAM, comfort, healt'l 
 ojguguisroio omnipotence. 
 {jfiffiTLzstir a proper name. 
 
 K!RAI, 7ier&. 
 
 i PANDAM, a vessel. " 
 
 (iT)i-esr TIRUDAN, 
 uisfrsrni a pit. A- 
 
 ^ 
 
 a creeping plant. 
 U6i)ssr, L/eu/i or Queusijr strength. 
 
 /v> 
 
 Exercise 42. 
 
 135. (a). * This is a joyful day. 2 I have come to (7th case) my 
 merciful father. 3 This is an evil thing. 4 He is a just king. 5 This 
 is a reasonable complaint. 6 The accountant has brought a right 
 account to the bazaar-man. 7 Four accountants gave evidence in the 
 court. 8 Will the watchman put the thieves in prison ? 9 All my 
 familiar friends came with me to the place of justice. 10 This is 
 David the accountant. (3 ways.) n This is an affair concerning the 
 church (!ilQT)<F<ff : <sus smtliuuz). 12 A new vessel. 13 Sweet Tamil. 
 11 Are you well ? 15 This is a herb garden. 
 
 irreurriu (81.) 
 
 ujrirujrevr. 
 
 Q & IT 62537" tfi. (7K 15 ;3> IT IT <35 6TT. 
 
 . - er&ff 
 
 uir 
 
 (Proverb.) 
 
 14> 
 
 =whick is suitable for.) 16 
 
 . (Here 
 
 \)<5E^J5y< 
 
 which is not, 87.) 
 
 ^^
 
 i ,'.' 
 
 _ ^glrr 9r ;*. 6) **e $*<-+ * 
 
 ^ tt^/^^S-fc~/r^~t*~^ 
 
 LESSON 44. EXEECISE 43. 
 THE VERB =f AND PABTICLES FROM IT. 
 
 136-139. 
 
 Lesson 44. 
 
 Idioms connected with 
 136. (a.) tgtTKi-ssir pireyj QULU^LO 
 
 ^ 
 
 [We four persons, to become, if come] 
 = If we four persons come together. 
 is used in summing up=aZZ altogether. 
 
 _p, cgyswrr Q^/rO^^js 
 That which I gave (is) four, that which he gave (is) five, 
 
 ing altogether nine. * ^^z_ 
 
 ^^IjrLctfT'Su L\<3S)^f53$ <s<au bury it carefully. Here ^sly, 
 added\j;o a noun, converts it into an adverb. (40.) " a^f 
 
 Q&iresr<5Gr<ir& $%5GrJsQ 1 5n- I thought^he 
 
 me tb\come ^Qfirssrssr^, ^<s as though it said. Q&irssr'Ssr'Sn'uj is 
 also used/ 1 ^tL'=as if.~\ g>^ 
 
 137. a. <s5ar<35<356sr $j (ffj & <> (y <ssr an accountant is. 
 
 b. <B6scr&&<!o6)'dS!(rr)<fBi(ysBr he is an accoimtant. 
 
 c. &G5GT&&65T @ (5 * Si (y @) is the accountant (there) f @6uSsu 
 . he is not. 44 
 
 d. &'Sssr<(E&<GS)il(irj!{5l(y<G) is he an accountant? .jyeueu he is 
 
 not. ti_u~ 
 
 ^ ^('u added to a noun shows it to be the complement of the predi- 
 cate. (81.) 
 
 THIS is OF THE UTMOST IMPORTANCE. Carefully consider the 
 above examples. 
 
 138. VOCABULARY. 
 
 P ATT A NAM, a town. 
 
 KIR A. VAN, an old man. 
 an old woman. 
 
 down t$, descend, alight 
 
 that ivhich is common. 
 2-Bi_isroi> possessions. 
 
 rr substance, wealth. 
 TAVALAI, a large brass 
 
 vessel. 
 
 & tr LA IT ear goods, utensils. J 
 (Lp^^ero/r MUTTIRAI, a seal. 
 
 A , 
 
 PATTIRAM, care. 
 } z /vr H- IT 
 
 nne. /, 
 
 place, put (56. HE.) </ ^^' 
 <sj<3M- limit (<su0s)fr^(^Lo 4th case 
 + a. La = until) . , J&r**^*- 
 bury (56. 
 
 &ITUU eat (68.). 
 
 139. (a.) x 
 
 Exercise 43. 
 QUIT 
 
 101
 
 
 
 139, 140. 
 
 EXERCISE 43. LESSON 45. 
 
 THE TJSES OF =<5. 
 
 (in common) 
 
 (50.) 
 
 (68.); 
 
 [79. (2.)] 
 
 , QUITU., (68.) (?u>(?6U 
 iBirmseir\ IB IT gaQ u QJJL 
 
 go 
 fu 
 
 (6.) l Here (are) 5 and there 4 ; total, 9. 2 If he and you together 
 to the old man's house, he will give you the goods. 3 Put it care- 
 ully in the house. 4 He has great wealth which he has carefully 
 buried in the garden. 5 At which house has he alighted ? 6 When 
 we obtained the goods which he had carefully sent by the peon we 
 put them into the store-room. 7 Is this honey ? 8 No, it is bitter. 
 9 Did he eat this sweet honey ? 10 Is there honey there ? No. n Did 
 he speak as if (d,*) the Muhammadan would come ? 13 1 have not seen 
 jthejald man for many days (for=^f,<s adverbial). 
 
 NOTE. The learner~>H- feel inclined to translate I' It is bitter '/ by sffU 
 uiT'Ssr l(rfj&SlfD!, instead of <s&uun~LU $)(rFj<95SlD^I. 
 
 It must be remembered that in Tamil an adjective (so called)- is never used as 
 a noun or with a noun understood. In English !' bitter '^=1' a bitter thing 'f ; in 
 Tamil it is, f this is a* bitterness.' L 1 __ 
 
 To convert the adjective into a noun the terminations must be added as in 
 87. We then have a&ULJirssreLHssr, -efr, -jjj, &c., or tSfULjerrerrsuevr, -sir, 
 -jjjj. We can then write (though it is clumsy) &&LJUrr65r^rruS!QTj&!SrDgi. 
 
 ^iii must be used to connect the complement with the verb of incomplete 
 predication. 
 
 1 
 
 OPTATIVE AND DESIDERATIVE FORMS. 
 140. a. g)^ @t^lu36u stiffs <si_<ay5? LET this fall into tlie pit. 
 
 b. j <siitTieuiTujsT& MAYST thou prosper ! [WISH and COM- 
 
 MAND.] 
 
 c. /fr GuiT^s MAY you prosper. [BENEDICTION.] 
 
 d. Qurr&LLGlLa LET it go ! 
 
 SLLi-'&srruSlesruu}. (157) fifr 
 
 ai/ti act according to the order I have sent you. [POLITE 
 
 IMPERATIVE.]
 
 LESSON 45. 
 OPTATIVE FOEMS. 
 
 140, 141. 
 
 (a.) The defective root si ought, must, is regularly declined, 
 thus : 
 
 15 IT GST [Q&UJILI&] ^iQsussr I ought or must [do]. 
 <j> [Qff\Luj&] <SL_<a;/ruj thou oughtest or must [do]. 
 It is added to the infinitive of any verb to form a kind of optative 
 mood. 
 
 (b.) ^s [like the Hebrew H } comp. Nordheimer's Hebrew Gram- 
 mar, 204-206] added to the future of any verb forms an optative 
 mood. The neuter participial noun future is used for the 3rd person 
 future. / a~*^~~tZy 
 
 I will do, QfftLQsm^s)B may I do ! I much wish to do ! 
 he will do, Q&iu surras may he do ! I long for him to do ! 
 may it take place. 
 This seems to be a strong breathing merely, expressive of desire ; 
 but it is explained by the Grammarians as the inf. of ^gj, 41. It is 
 pronounced AHA. 
 
 (c.) <s like ^s forms an optative mood, but it is added to the root 
 of a verb, is the same for all numbers and persons, and is chiefly 
 used in poetry. 
 
 jsiT&sf (oUiT<& let me go ! fifr Q-SU.S may you hear! 
 
 (d.) Is an unauthorised, but very common form. It consists in 
 the addition of ^iLGlLn or ^il to the root, inserting ss when the 
 present takes fBQjpi. The form is abbreviated by casting away the 
 final vowel of the root. It is the same for both numbers and for 
 the 1st and 3rd persons. 
 
 jzfTzsr ) ^ . m (let me do! sfrssr Q& LUUJL-I IT may I do it? 
 
 . > (f>)ff(L!UJ'L(blL> < -, J I 
 
 ^sassr ) ( he may do ! 
 
 This is said to be a corruption of ^L.LC>= permit, from gj 
 (e.) This is a polite imperative: add a.Lo to the infinitive 
 
 141. VOCABULARY. 
 ^ privative ; 
 ^1 j iu mu LD injustice. 
 qjr/i PURAM, a town. 
 
 or ^?fr DTTR, a prefix =evil, 
 
 a way. 
 one who walks n, 
 
 way 
 
 ter. 
 
 (s. BUDD'HI} sense., 
 a counsellorTprime minis- 
 , . 
 
 kingly I'ule.f^C^/ 
 ~ 
 
 3@ be abundant to- 
 past. rel. p&rk. = which 
 abounded.) 
 
 has 
 
 MIGUDI, abundance. 
 
 -YANA (SO.), abundant. 
 a sensible person. [The 
 termination <s : /r6iS=s. 1 ' ^ALIN, 
 one who possesses, is often 
 used.] 
 Sjtrr <S<SLD length (pronounced D!RK- 
 
 KA^in the compounds). 
 jjfr is &tr \L\ffi long life (^u3<* or 
 , life), 
 prophet, a seer 
 
 one who sees). 
 
 Qurreo as (Gu/reu, 0>urrQ&i). 
 Slgjl (56. III.) prosper, succeed, 
 
 answer. 
 
 ; ^yl
 
 '#/ 
 
 142-144. EXERCISE 44. LESSON 46 
 
 " <7 ^ Z- ' VERBAL NOTOS IN >*. 
 
 Exercise 44. 
 
 (227.) 
 
 Q u tr & 
 / 8 ^y t$ ILI rrtu LJ jr LD (131.) GTG 
 
 S3r(5) ^fftr&fr&Lb UGSsres^^fr, 
 (185.) 
 
 ffoSso, 121.) <5T<5srpcB&. 
 [(Poet.) wo by-paths']. n <5*n <s fl m & rr <s9l &JIB 
 
 (o.) ! Say not so. 2 Pray do not say so. 3 1 beg you to do this. 
 4 If I have destroyed his house may I myself perish. 5 There is 
 much honey in the town. 6 Let the unjust man perish! 7 He who 
 commits injustice will not prosper. 8 Although I perish I will not do 
 injustice. 9 May I walk sensibly ! 10 He is a very sensible person. 
 11 Let him do as his counsellors said. 13 May my affairs prosper ! 
 13 It won't answer. u Hail, O king ! 
 
 Lesson 46. 
 
 ' ' W*~*' VERBAL NOUNS IN s>&. 
 
 143. By adding sro to verbal roots which take Qgu in the pre- 
 sent (WEAK forms) and &&& to those which take sQjpi (STRONG 
 forms), a verbal noun is formed nearly equivalent to the English 
 verbal noun (gerundial infinitive) in -ING, expressive of the act or its 
 result. 
 
 Q&'L QfftLsas the doing=a deed. 
 
 /EI piseas the walking=a line of 
 
 144. Some of the above are in common use as mere \ouns; but 
 more generally they are used to farm an abooluto case^lik-e the 
 
 ablative absolute in Latin, (or thegen. abs. in Greek/ retaining a kind 
 of participial power. ^~ *~- C-~ A^.-*? ff-^-^) A 
 
 \\\ np.<f 
 
 while he was saying 
 
 ^ 
 
 7 
 1 
 
 104
 
 <-}. i*-> ft 
 
 EXERCISE 45. LESSON 47. 
 VERBAL NOUNS IN S<S. < 
 
 145-148. 
 
 AGARAM, food, what is 
 received into the body. 
 jyuLJti APPAM, rice caA;es, fereacZ. 
 2-QjrrrL-up. UROTTI, bread, a 
 cfDEVi, ^e goddess o 
 
 145. ^sTOcSiu/rsu (<.^)=by the becoming : therefore. 
 146. VOCABULARY. t/L**-rf 
 
 tSsssrZessr TINNAI, a pial, elevated 
 
 seat in front of a house. 
 
 g)jrs3ar(6) IRAXDU, two. 
 
 srQjift up, take up (/6. IIL)TW 
 ef^^LjQufT^ take away. ' 
 "^JULJ/F food, a meal. 
 QuiTffssfLB food, nourishment. (SI 
 ^zvrserLQ ANNAM, food, chiefly 
 
 baited rice. -= < 
 
 147. ((X.) 
 
 kick (56. 
 ^err@5 TALLU, turn away (56. II.). 
 
 Exercise 45. 
 
 /5/TGTT 
 
 (131. c.) (OLJ&& 
 
 (o u tr en & uSl <sv 
 
 */ 
 
 <5T <S5f (Rf ft , 
 
 ^ fT <SS) <3B SU /B ^5 
 < GIT 6ff <5V IT LL> !T ? ^ S-Q JT fT L. l 
 
 &L-6UITIJJ. 
 
 fsrrssr <si//5jS76W/_Wf_6ar. " &fr<s3)xei]fB< &(J^eM<onuj& 
 
 )&oSsu/u/r ? 
 
 U65VTGwfl<35 
 
 /_//T(S3)/r<55err. 
 
 (6.) l While the bazaar-man came running (getf oj^eocSuSeu) the 
 thief, knowing that, came down from the tree. 3 Give me the loaf. 
 :3 Give us bread. l While there are rice-cakes there is enough for us. 
 5 While the mother was gone to procure (94, note) food the child 
 died. 6 While the five men were sleeping in the verandah of the 
 house, the peons came. 7 May I go while he is learning his lesson ? 
 8 While all are working is it right for you to be idle ? 
 
 ~^' 
 
 Lesson 47. 
 
 VERBAL NOUNS IN .jysu, &c. 
 148. Verbal nouns are also formed by adding ^eu, <g;j, SB&J, 
 <5so, or cS6u, <$<&}, or <S(3^6u to the root. These are like the 
 gerundial infinitive, and express the act merely. 
 
 14 
 
 fc^
 
 149, 150. LESSON 47. EXERCISE 46. 
 
 VERBAL NOUNS IN ^6U, Jf^.^ / 
 
 (a.) Verbs which take fe)jr in the present^ take .jyeu, ^eu. 
 Qffuj - (o!&<Luj6o, Q&'L'&eu a doing. 
 ^t-isigj - ^L-rsis&j, ^i-E/gj^eu a submitting. 
 The few cases where su or @^eu is apparently added may be thus 
 explained : there was a root in (, now obsolete, to which 
 was added : thus, 
 
 QUIT (Quir<$) - Quirseo, G>un-<g6u, QUIT <<&). 
 
 (6.) Verbs which take sSjyi in the present^ take 
 
 6u a living. 
 eu a kicking. 
 
 tsi - !s<s@^&} a walking. 
 
 (c.) These have no power of government as those in 87 have. 
 
 149. VOCABTTLAEY. 
 
 M6R, butter-milk. uu?. PADI, measure, manner (added 
 snq- TONDI, an earthen pot. to relative participles =a). 
 
 ELiAu, that which is easy. , ; 5jr<a;su EVAL, a command (<rsiy <ir 
 AEiiu, ^a< which is hard. . up, 56. II.). 
 
 He began to consider. 
 
 // 3 / J [He a studying became. 
 
 He fell a thinking. 
 
 ifijdipm, though poetical, is sometimes heard in common con : 
 
 Exercise 46. 
 150. (a.) l i < G>L&irir 6iirriEi(3jpib(&j (4th case =in order to} 
 
 SltpsQ off* L i$-G> e_ Qumiip 
 
 a~ 
 
 _ 
 Q&rrossrGl eurr'l srsyr^u ^gy sgj u i9 <&) ir & err . 2 / f Q <? ir ev spi p sv 
 
 a) srsifl&j ; Q&rreveQiu [70. (I.) for G^/rsarsar] 
 v ^gy ifi j3t rr LC> .i 3 psrsar Q <F iu ev IT eu gu \*M,) 87.] UJ/T 
 
 _, 47, 172, 126, 
 whatsoever] ^)6u8so ; ^W?^ Q < 
 
 .'' (Poet.) 
 
 fB G$) I UJ IT (JLJ j(f^<3^^D^J. JZV/5^ o L-l$-o$\) <^t ^/LO U IT L-. 
 
 [Comp. 40. Any number of nouns may 
 thus be united together bv S_LD ; and ^i/J added to the last con-
 
 LESSON 48. 151. 
 
 PARTICLES USED WITH OR FOR CASE-ENDINGS. 
 
 verts the whole into an adverbial clause.] ".jyaysj 
 
 $ Q^luj6Vrreiiprr& 
 
 (6.) ^tis easy to send the watchman to buy milk. 2 While he 
 commanded I submitted. 3 This is the king's command. 4 It is 
 difficult to walk thus. 5 The submitting to the command of the 
 judge is easy. 6 The having pity is easy. 7 May you kick the 
 earthen pot ? 8 Is it hard for boys to learn their lessons ? 9 Is it 
 not easy to read a book while walking ? 
 
 Lesson 48. 
 PARTICLES THAT EMPHASIZE OR REPLACE CASE-ENDINGS. 
 
 151. (a.) Particles used instead of, or in addition to, the proper 
 terminations of nouns are : 
 
 tr, 
 
 ST6BTU6UZ3T, <5T SVT U 11 (off, SrsSTLJ.Jp, <oT23TLJ<21//f , OT 'SST U fflj IT < &T ', 6T68T U6SXSU. 
 
 The participial nouns from the roots srsar and ^ are sometimes used to point 
 oui^ and throw emphasis on the nominative case. 
 &c. are alscTused in^eiy commonTlialk. [87, 88.] 
 
 These answer in some degree to the Greek article. They are not 
 to be translated in English. 
 
 (6.) ^/r, LQ/r/r are added to nouns honorifically. 
 
 PITLU a mother, but ^iriurrir is more respectful. 
 a-uG^^ a teacher, &-uQ@&uunir. 
 LQ/r/f is plural, <sfr may be added. 
 
 <3&uusrLniTiT the fathers 
 / (gj(75*.s<5?rLo/rrr the spiritual guides (0(5). 
 'fr the school-masters 
 
 (c.) An honorific form is made also by adding /^/r to certain words; 
 of these Q^enifir Thou, God, is common. 
 
 (rf.) 2-L_6sr (=g) together with, SliLi near, ^GGCTQ&L by the side 
 of, $,sr signifying connexion (@6orf-b) are used as casal terminations. 
 ^escre^L is often redundant : Giffeisr ^jsasremiuussL^ on the south 
 side. Put them on to the inflexional base, as case-endings. 
 
 (e.) " Trees, leasts, &c." = Lzrrfa&&r o9(5/5J<S(srr (Lp<ff<stiuj6<su<s5etr. 
 Selling, buying, and other affairs," = Q<5/rt.E6u GUITISISGU 
 /r/fliuffi/csefr. 
 
 /' Call the carpenter, bricklayer, &cJ*=jff4Ffar 
 
 /?/?
 
 LESSON 48. EXEECISE 47. 
 
 HENING ADJUNCTS OF CASE-ENDINGS. 
 
 " Foodtyhes, &c" 
 for (tp^exj.) Thfe^words aref 
 Tamil 
 
 is the Sanskrit 
 a Sanskrit compound with 
 t.- / J/, 
 
 ir, m. and fern., are added to nounsxm the nominative 
 sing, or plural, and are then equivalent to " &c." (^seu =" first. "- 
 TT as if a part, noun from root (Lp^^yj (87/S^) ; 
 
 ^6Br6G>fflj6fr) those which have become. 
 followed by a noun common to all th/ particulars 
 intended to be included may be used : (y^eu/rser sirflu/isi&isir. 
 
 (Lf><g;6$uj6S)<si]<se(r, &c. (and in the last case <&[nf)iuiEis<3p, &c.) may be in 
 any case ; but the particulars enumerated remain in the nominative. 
 
 (/.) g)i_^^3 is used for 
 eusSli^^&^LD everywhere. 
 152. VOCABULARY. 
 Si a much, more. AT^I^A- 
 Mount Meru. 
 a straw, 
 a house-wife. 
 
 protect^ (56. II.) [Co. 
 
 (7th case) ; sr& 
 
 for 
 
 the strychnos tree (add 
 free (add 
 
 <ffi_iSiysfr Deity, 
 
 e (56. I.) exult, 
 
 ^g](rfjLr>uir&<F 
 Q&Lueffrr. (136, a.) 3 ^/eussr 
 
 121. [(2.)] Translate, so 
 
 )ffl) ~ 
 
 OT63r^ar<5B &rruurrrby6urrir. 
 
 ot come. 5 ^jGvrLDn-ira&ir&ffrr 
 
 f 
 
 GT en ( 
 
 uuSlir-Q<fUJ^i-6u/5^rrssr. ^ Q&rrGia&GV eurriEi&ev (used 
 for business in general), CLp&eo/revr arrfliLJiEi&Giflev 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 uir#iTi5J(3j QuSdu
 
 LESSON 49. EXERCISE 48. 
 
 THE NEGATIVE VERBAL NOUN. 
 
 154-156. 
 
 (&.) l He came with his wife, children, servants, &c. 3 This is my 
 mother. 3 Thou, God, art our Father. 4 The spiritual guides came 
 with their disciples. 5 Come not near me. 6 He is just in all his 
 dealings (Qstr acseu sufnsi&eo (Lp^&jfTssr). 7 Come to the north side 
 (fiuz_60srn>_uu<fftfl). 8 What is the name of this tree Qg)Jr) ? 
 9 Near Mount Meru is a sea. 10 On the south side of the strychnos 
 tree is a silk cotton tree. n The next house caught fire (^SWSTOL 
 <E). 13 The king with his counsellors and others came to the town. 
 [Compare 233-251.] 
 
 Lesson49< 
 
 NEGATIVE VERBAL NOUN IN 
 
 154. A negative verbal noun is formed by adding ^STOLO to the 
 root (or, more precisely, by adding <ss)La=ness, -ty [184, a.] to the 
 abbreviated form of the neg. verb, part., 121 (4): Q&iiiuj/r + sous'). 
 The form Q^iL'UJ/rG'Lo is also found. 
 
 Q&iLujrreoLz the not doing. ui^uj/rsroLo the not learning. 
 
 su/r es) LC> the not walking. .j/eueu/rsroLo the not being so. 
 
 the not existing. 
 
 to the present (and less frequently to the^pasfc)'^elative 
 participle to form a^ affirmative noun corresponding Ja tbis: thus, Q&CuQ<cisr(Q 
 (not Q&iiiQp} + <ffiuz = Qffdj@ttjp@s>r1fie doing, 
 <SG)Lto the having learned, ffhis iaTIttle used.] 
 
 This noun with the 3rd ca,se=because . . . not (a negative sentence 
 of reason). 
 
 155. VOCABULARY. 
 
 PORRAMAI, envy 
 endure). 
 
 one of several wives, a 
 rival. 
 
 LI PARI, guilt, blood-guiltiness. 
 _<s^ KUVU, call out (56. II.). 
 
 y, PU, flower, bloom (56. III.) ; 
 
 also, as a noun, a flower. 
 &s5<iluuLc> CATTIYAM, truth, an 
 . oath. - 
 
 thoughts 
 
 NANRRU, it is good, a good 
 
 A TIRRAM, ability, faculty. 
 
 thing 
 
 156. (a.) * 
 
 4r 2 
 
 [rather high]. 
 
 tt9(65)(oSU Q 3, IT 65T (ftf 61T 
 
 Exercise 48. 
 
 <5 6B/T(WJ)<S3)LOUJ/rG > eV (o U fl ILJ <sQ l_ l_ I! IT 
 
 (double negative) ^&J<sSli_-^ 
 
 <oTLJ\olLJ IT (LSJEl l.b fesjOLD \ol <f ILI IU IT 6$) L> f5<58TfpJ 
 ^5-= r- _ , X ' /- 
 
 W LJ /T" (V/p G^) LO 
 
 109
 
 157. LESSON 50. 
 
 ADVERBIAL PHRASES AND CLAUSES OF PURPOSE. 
 
 Q&ILJUJLJ 
 
 (196.) 
 
 (Because there is not) &^<sliuLn uossTGnpiKJ&GiT. "' ^gyavsar 
 
 (mind Jcnoiving= wilfully) Q< 
 t$ (U IT uj rr JE! u tsl ^gyeuBssr^ ^6miy_ujrrLDSv 
 sv/r^sS <5B rr ifi ILJ ^ <sy> 35 g 
 
 6U L> uSl (a l> Q & 6V 6\) IT 63) LD 
 
 (&.) 1 Why do you envy him ? ~ How can this guilt be removed ? 
 3 They have submitted because they had no money. 4 I suffer much 
 because I have no food. 5 Because there were no witnesses the 
 gentleman sent the complainant away. 6 Why did the rival wife kill 
 the little child? 7 I climbed the tree to look for grass. 8 He came 
 down from the tree because there was no grass on it. 9 Do you 
 think it is good not to talk ? 10 You will die from not eating bread, 
 rice, and other food. 
 
 Lesson 50. 
 PUEPOSE, INTE^TTION. 
 
 157. It may be useful Lu Lht lu>mcr to compare the variety of 
 ways in which an English phrase may be rendered in Tamil. Take 
 the sentence, " man eats to live." ^ 
 
 (a.) Lssfi^zzr L3L<s& fffUu(SQ(yeer. Literal, but not very 
 clear. The inf. governed by the following verb~V~~ 
 
 (b.) LDGsfi& 
 
 ( the step that } 
 Lit. ? as the step that > =in order to, that he may. 
 
 (to the step that ) 
 
 The use of uif , i_/tf ILHT&, uuf.s@ added to the fut. rel. participle is 
 perfectly idiomatic. Added to the 6th case of a noun (in jg/ear) it 
 means according to. 
 
 (C.) LCXoBfljSGBT iSl6B)Lp<3<g <$<&&;$K<&& & [T U U Q Qtf GSf . Lit. /' OS tt 
 
 thing that is fit for him to live'l=that he may. 
 
 [R. ^@ (68.) be fitting : defective but reg. Pret. ^^GsOTr, rel. pail. <&&, 
 part, noun yptffiuBT, ^(ffiSGuefr, <s&&ajj, &c.] 
 
 This use of ^s,s^i\3, is not inelegant. 
 
 ) ~\ f The part, noun 
 
 '.&vuul \neut.sing.pres. 
 Y ^ j and m S$* the 
 
 ) (^4th case. 
 
 The future forms are esteemed more highly than the other. 
 
 110
 
 LESSON 50. ^IXERCISE 49. 
 
 SUBORDINATE SENTENCES OF PURPOSE. 
 /I 
 
 158, 159. 
 
 \ 
 
 minutes. 
 
 ^,Q(g- LDg5gf)Q' ) /gj-Lb an English hour 
 ^ 
 
 & IT U U Q (y S3T =for the 
 
 pose of living (rather high). 
 
 [Qu(r(77)Ll from QutTQ^&r ( + J*7, 184. b. srr + i <=LL:-L) substance = that 
 which has the property of.'] 
 
 (/.) LQSsR^SCr L$SG)Lp-t5<95 Q S1J SSST Lb toTSST^! & [T U U l (Of ZZT . Lit. 
 
 saying, U is necessary to live (colloquial). 
 
 (g.) Lnssfl^ssr iS&SiLp^SfeSssr fluS^^u* &;ruLj()l(ys3r = for the sake 
 of living (somewhat stiff). 
 
 [_$ U ; is cause, is used absolutely, alone or with ^uj or ^a added to it, 
 in the sense of "for the sake of."'] 
 
 (h.) 6r65r<5<gj (3j<anrriaLj eurTfTLo&j $)uuiy.<g : QffiLQjSfor I did this that 
 no deficiency miyht arise to me (<3urrir*5ui$-<s@). 
 
 All these forms will often occur in books and in common conver- 
 sation. They illustrate idioms with which the learner must take 
 great pains to familiarize himself. 
 
 158. VOCABULARY. 
 SLsrrQffrr ULLE, inside. 
 j.lt_Ln 6TTAM, a rapid course. 
 gpilt iDLSiff. take to flight, gallop 
 
 off (L% seize, 56. III.). 
 
 , three. 
 a Tamil hour=24< 
 
 LbiTfSJSIffLZ MATTRAM, Only. 
 
 (56. III.) pray, beseech. 
 -Ld ISHTAM, pleasure, desire. \ 
 PANGU, a part, share. 
 j, cotton. 
 
 VARTTAGAM 
 
 bell, 
 
 time. 
 
 - an hour (<SJ<ST is a gurry 
 on which hours are struck). 
 SUJITILHT^IU^ a judge (^lUinuiJci 
 right, jfj&ufi a ruler ; a San- 
 skrit compound). 
 : @/ruq TfRppu, a decision. 
 j &L-L-LZ c ATT AM, regulation, rule. 
 LJUJL PADI, according to. 
 
 aisfff (56. III.) A bring up, educate, 
 train. / /T/> / 
 
 , or a.([5<flf, proof (H. 
 
 example, proof. 
 
 159. (tt. 
 
 rra^ ^ 
 [properly 
 
 Exercise 49. 
 
 _S!J)L_S35LDS 
 
 Q^iu^/rsar. 2 2_/E7srr 
 v^^sJTLJ^-Co't/jJ 
 
 V, Q & IT (Si <fB <5B <S 
 .tEJ&fffT QufT(7T)^oiT 
 $ ft U Lj <3~ Q & IL1 Q SU 33T 
 
 & IT rr tr p jsi & ' 
 
 111
 
 160. 
 
 EXERCISE 49. LESSON 51. 
 
 CAUSAL AND DERIVATIVE TRANSITIVE VERBS. 
 
 (136.) 
 
 Q <EF (U 
 Jt /j9 ILJ Lb U ty- tLJ IT & & <3h- 
 
 rG3) STT. 
 
 l (S3) /r <s err 
 
 (6.) ! How can you prove this ? 3 What example have you to 
 afford evidence that this house is yours ? 3 He went to fetch his 
 wife. 1 1 beseech you to do me justice. r> He traffics to obtain 
 profit. G He gives an example to prove his case. 7 You must act 
 only according to rule. 8 Do as you please. 9 1 will give you a 
 reason why you should learn diligently. 10 Prove clearly before the 
 magistrate that this house is your father's. n From the absence of 
 proof and examples the house will be taken from you and given to 
 the merchant. 12 The cat runs to catch the rat. i 3 Will not the rat 
 run to escape the cat ? u What is this for ? 15 1 obtained this money 
 by his means. [242.] 
 
 Lesson 51. 
 
 CAUSAL VERBS AND TRANSITIVE VERBS IN GENERAL. 
 160. From primitive verbs how are causal verbs to be formed? 
 The following examples will render explanations and rules un- 
 necessary. These forms are generally to be found in the dictionary. 
 They may be divided into two classes : 
 
 I. Forms indicating that the person causes another to perform the 
 
 action of the verb. *^L^i<L, 
 
 (a.) From root ^jss>Lp call (56. III. where the present takes sSi^i] 
 
 is formed ^cnLpuiSl cause to call (56. III.). Here L$ is added and u 
 
 doubled. 
 
 ^ffffssr srearVoer f >j<oLpuL$: < g]& Q<SiLi[TiT=the king sent for me 
 
 and asked. c*-^A 
 
 (6.) From root 0<5=oj do (56. I. where the present has Sign] is 
 
 formed Q&iL'sB cause to do (56. HI.). Here a9 is added to fornf the 
 
 causal root. 
 
 90 <UL/3su< QffiLJsSl<5piT6sr=he caused a ship to be built, 
 (c.) From root srear say (82.) is formed sresrLSl ('"56. III.) cause to 
 
 112
 
 LESSON 51. 160. 
 
 CAUSAL AND DERIVATIVE TRANSITIVE VERBS. 
 
 say, prove ; root <&frsGsr see (70.), <s/T6ssrL9=<ffi/rL_ (<ff/ra0r-4-^iO cause to 
 see, show. 
 
 From s-SOT ea/ [56. (III.)] is formed 2-smiSl feed. 
 
 From <$&) learn (70) is formed /r)L9 eac&. 
 
 Here iSl is added. There are many other forms of this kind in 
 common use. 1 
 
 II. Simple transitives formed from intransitive roots. 
 
 (d.) From root pi wallc (57. I.) is formed jsi^^i cause to walk, 
 
 lead (56. II.). There are few of these, and chiefly from roots in ^ 
 
 and a.. 
 
 [The root jsi_ has also a causal rsi-LJiS, according to (a). (56. III.)] 
 
 (e.) From root <&)) ascend (56. II.) is formed (gr/Djj/ cause to ascend, 
 
 lift (56. II.) (com.). To ^p^ and other transitive forms sSl may be 
 
 added to form a causal. 
 
 igg" [In this and the following forms the causal strengthens the root by 
 doubling the consonant, or by hardening a nasal.] 
 
 (/.) From root 5 run (56. II.) is formed g^/l cause to run, drive 
 (56. II.) (com.). o^^-.o-ty^' 
 
 [In Ind. I. comp. cF/T, ffrnL ; sun, 
 (g.} From root ^&e\)> be A ^emoj2ed^^.Y^ formed ^ajbgu remove, 
 put away (62.) ; from a. roll [56. (III.)] is formed s-^tl roll 
 over (62.). 
 
 (h.) From root ^itbigj submit (56. II.) is formed ^>IL-S@ put 
 under, cause to submit (56. II.). ^ ^_ ^n^r-^-^ 
 
 [In Ind. I. comp. JJIEI(^, ^ ffijgj.] 
 
 (i.) From Gu0@ grow, increase (62.), is formed 
 multiply, fy u r?\$ , I ! 15 
 
 [In Ind. I. comp. ^;@, ^@ ; ^P(5, <fjl)l&@> & c -> &oj 
 
 (j.) From root ^I^LDL^ turn one's self (56. II.) is formed 
 ?/.rtt another, cause to turn (56. II.). 
 
 [In Ind. I. comp. )smr>L/, SlsfTULj ; ^lffLaL\, r$jruLj ; <oT(Lpii>L/, OT(t^uq ; 
 
 (A-.) From root striL become dry 56. 1., is formed' GfTuj&si- boil, make 
 dry by heat (56. n.). There are very few of these forms. 
 
 (I.) Many roots may follow 56. I., and are then intransitive ; or 
 56. III., and are then transitive. (Compare 15. g.~] 
 
 [In Ind. I. com 
 &c., &c.] 
 
 3ST [An intransitive verb in the p ggr jotsir 6V is called ^esr-sS 'Bssr = own-action, 
 and a transitive verb L9ff)-fifl2sOT another-action. These terms are taken from 
 the parasmai-padam and G.tman6 padam of the Sanskrit ; but the classes of verbs 
 are far from corresponding. Comp. Pope's III. GRAM. 100-106.] 
 
 113 15
 
 >c^_^, ,. ^7-r 
 
 161, 162. 
 
 EXEECISE 50. 
 CAUSAL VERBS. 
 
 161. VOCABULARY. 
 L^be lying down, 56. (I.) 
 ' (c.) lay down, place in a 
 
 suffer, 56. (II.) 
 
 inflict upon, cause to 
 suffer. 
 
 >, pass (56. HI.). 
 (56. II.) cause to go, 
 fischarqe. 
 
 (60. n.). 
 
 (56. II.) place, cause to 
 
 afl infant, 
 astonishment. 
 
 nearness. < 
 
 ua.Tjj/ other, different. l*> ^J (- f >* 1 7 
 -o disguise, appearance, 
 make known 
 
 [See in. Gram. 103.] 
 
 Exercise 50. 
 
 (b.) a They brought a little infant and laid it before me. 2 The 
 physician led the mother to the house. 3 The gentleman caused the 
 watchman to be called. 4 Why have you caused the merchant to be 
 sent for ? 5 Turn the bandy round. 6 Put that man down. 7 Lift 
 that bundle. 8 Put that bundle upon the bandy. 9 Boil that conjee 
 for the infant. 10 Drive the bullocks. n They lifted up the child 
 upon the horse. 13 The rats are astonished to see the cats. 13 The 
 cats rejoice to see the rats. 14 Did you boil the milk? u Will you 
 lift the cotton-bales ? 16 Don't drive the bandy. 
 
 * These two verbs are added to nouns to form intransitive and transitive verbs 
 respectively; thus, & ifjG> < x S$>LO joy, ffrsQtfSirei^uu rejoice,
 
 LESSON 52. 
 DERIVED FROM NOCJNS. 
 
 163-166. 
 
 Lesson 52, 
 
 VERBS FORMED FROM NOUNS. 
 
 >- 163. Verbs are often formed from nouns of Sanskrit derivation 
 ending in ^LZ by changing .jy/i into g). They follow 56. III. These 
 are not very common, and should be used sparingly. 
 
 iS rr <& IT & LD splendour, LSrr&fT&l shine, L3jr<ssir^<s8(SfDear I shine. 
 
 <77 p y <rv// G*J / f C^ L3 jr & rr $3 u(o u sir I shall shine. 
 164. Many nouns are also verbal roots, as in English. 
 <$sif) exceeding joy, <seif) rejoice (56. III.), ssif)^Sl(Sfl)fsr I rejoice, &c. 
 .&d)l praise, jssi) praise (56. III.), ^jsisSKSpssr I praise. 
 
 165. Lj3srjp/ make, perform, Q<fiL do, ^ become, 
 to become, are often added to nounsof quality.. Thui 
 <ff-a;<Lci purity, ^ ~~*^g?ZoZJs3Br 
 
 ffitSjSLztr become pure (56. II.). 
 <ff-<5>LB [T&tg, cleanse (56. II.). 
 investigation, sSlfmr'SossTQfJj investigate (56. I.). 
 ^ [These forms may be divided into two kinds, in one of which there is a 
 manifest ellipsis of the 2nd case ; in the other the noun or particle forms with 
 the verb one compound idea. The former are explained in 50, and in them 
 <5> <<F J> LJ at the beginning of the added verb are not doubled generally. In 
 the -latter case they are. [App. xi.] Thus, jjl^eo = stability, a standing place, 
 and ifi'S&jQu^! (LJ not doubled) (56. II.) = < /$3sv(Srou_/LjG)L-/ e fl3/. But /^SsuLJLJ 
 (161.) is a compound = become settled, fixed (u is doubled). They are in constant 
 use.] 
 
 166. VOCABULARY. 
 
 appoint, establish (56. 
 
 II.). 
 
 ^Soor ANAI, an elephant. 
 
 Qfsir TER, a chariot. 
 
 ffi/reu/rerr a foot-soldier (sir &j foot, 
 
 ^(sfr person). 
 ehjSjIff a woman. 
 &IEISLC> pure gold. 
 
 a load, weight, fff W) ^ 
 
 manner. *- tnr > ^ 
 c suiTjii a weeJc. &) L( <^7 ^= 
 ' the divinity, providence, 
 
 the mind, the inner man. 
 > falsehood, guile. 
 @STOLB (56. 1.) become soft, dissolve 
 away. 
 
 ANRU, that day. 
 INRU, this day. 
 ENRU, what day? when? 
 (These three words form their 
 fourth case irregularly : jyesr 
 vr<sro<B5(gj to-day, 
 for ever. <orezrjr)i 
 is doubled generally in the last 
 form ; r63rG)^D6ffr6o ff)t&5{s\Lci for 
 ever and ever,} 
 
 ^ ir (infin. of =^/r be full, 56. 1.) is 
 used idiomatically; thus, 
 
 clearly, face to face. & ^C r7 * L 
 willingly, knowingly. 
 <sir<&[rir clearly, distinctly. (?&. 
 Q s> rr is s; s <my trouble, 
 
 115
 
 167, 168. EXERCISE 51. LESSON 53. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 "Exercise 51. 
 167. (&) 
 
 Q u l iu <sii sisT ^& (3)Q <sij GST . [Here 
 is a compound.] ^ 5^(5 JiT3~^g>i& (& > 6fTGirir& 
 
 6 ^rEjaLb ^stntruSlsv ^ rr zvr &;! i fG ^B rr ev <orssresr 1 ' GTK^BU^ \ 
 ir & nr IT LA tr & & 
 
 (or ^j^luurrfrsstr^. 10 
 
 Q p rfl tu rr ^i . 
 
 (fe.) x The king came with elephants, chariots^ and foot ^ 
 
 2 Although you saw it with your eyes do not speak ~bf ft to anyone. 
 
 3 He will perish for ever. 4 That king's foot soldiers carried burdens 
 of gold. 5 We all rejoiced and praised the king. 6 They purified the 
 chariots that day for the women. 7 If you sin wilfully how can you 
 escape? 8 1 heard distinctly. 9 To-day I shall have much trouble. 
 10 Pray examine this well, my father ! n Will not the judge do 
 justice to the villagers ? 12 The gentlemen will punish the watchman. 
 
 Lesson 53. 
 THE INFINITIVE MOOD [III. Gram. 140]. 
 
 / ^i / q 168. The verbal form obtained by adding ^ to the roots of, verbs 
 ~E~I~ \^bieh-form their present with & y and <&<& to the remainder, has 
 been called the infinitive mood, because it answers to that part of the 
 English verb in some respects.,, The learner must beware of sup- 
 posing, however, that wherever the English has the infinitive mood 
 this Tamil form can be used, or vice versa. The following examples 
 require attention : 
 
 (a.) eujffQfn-ear^iT he told (me) to come. The English idiom and 
 "iteJfamil correspond. [PURPOSE.] 
 
 (6.) i^TStJ-ff Qj-MTLU ,-gy.ir<F63flL_d ( 6U QfffT&Jei), ^ij ff <f i^) SST <SU IT ^SO)L0LJ 
 
 LS^^rrir when somgoiwr went and told the king, the king called (him). 
 [TIME.] ., *^ -*--* 7 (*L*-A-(/-J fi //y) 
 
 (c.) firrQ&rr&jev or Q^/reueusytL please to say. [FOR COURTEOUS 
 
 IMPERATIVE, 140.] /jLf^t^T^~j /^^- ^> r *~-^^^&~*-~---i7'*~*--^-\7' /-[ / 
 
 Q fiLiu &<$>-i ir gi (jov) must not do (it). [PROLATIVE.] / 0-i~<K*-*~* 
 
 ^- "'' ^' _,^r X was beaten, .s ^""^ ~ "* " 
 
 %- G) #-i~<-> t*~ r
 
 *-K 
 
 (e.) Q&L-&U us35r 655^(30)^ he made me hear. [A way of forming a 
 -causal. Cornp. 160.] 
 
 ((/) Qt-irr <oTS5ru QUIT [" Go " (I) to say go] go when you are told. 
 
 169. The use of the infinitive in (&.) answers to the Latin ablative' 
 absolute, and is very concise and elegant ; but sometimes it is not 
 ^very clear. It is essentially a poetical idiom. _ ^^ qC, I, 5 
 
 LESSON 53. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 369, 170. 
 
 tr^-* .i^-i 
 
 170. Several infinitives are used as adverbs, prepositions, or 
 conjunctions : 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 without . 
 
 to- 
 
 5 to- 
 gether. 
 <J$ILJ besides, 
 but, 
 
 near 
 
 with, to- 
 gether. 
 
 (tfjLp round 
 about. 
 
 tgsSlrr except . 
 
 L/guj5<s loudly. 
 
 clearly. 
 Quirev as 
 
 Verbal Root. 
 
 alesce. 
 
 unite. 
 91.$ fail, 
 &L-, draw 
 
 OT6U6JJ/TU 
 
 3r lie became clean from all sin. 
 
 they ttna/mmously said they did 
 not want it. 
 
 (njLa ^ ^ 
 GOT they all came together. 
 
 there is no ^vay besides this, 
 when they came near the town. 
 
 (&)(! surround. 
 
 i_/6u grow 
 
 strong. 
 
 Qun-\j] resem- 
 ble. 
 
 quickly. 
 La&j6u slowly j 
 
 make haste. 
 Probably of 
 
 gra- 
 dually. 
 
 spon- 
 taneously, 
 off. 
 
 eS be im- 
 pelled. 
 
 get out 
 of the way. 
 
 <Siresr my son came with me. 
 
 [susD/Tc^ (CSJLP il<58r(yir<r they stood 
 round about him. 
 
 OT6U6U/T0/i &JB 
 
 5TT they all re- 
 joiced but him. *-*~'t~ 
 usv&au Qu<g- speak loud. 
 
 that also (is) 
 
 | 
 
 f Q<Ffrs3r<65)3r he spoke 
 u do it slowly. 
 
 this. 
 
 quickl 
 
 OLQ6U6U 
 
 / / (SiJ JT (SU JJ" t&> cff/Tt/J J^^jQufT&l IDjEl the 
 
 flower is gradually drying^ up. 
 
 <trir he freely^ gave 10 fanams. 
 sStevsuQutr get out of my way.
 
 171. EXERCISE 52. 
 
 DIFFERENT USES OF THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 The expressions \g$ ijl/b-ss that standing so, {jjjuuiy. @0<s<s this 
 being so, ^uui^. ^(f^sssQstr&r&T that being so, seem to be inelegant, 
 though not absolutely incorrect. 
 
 Exercise 52. 
 171. (VOCABULARY, 166). 
 
 (#') 1 6B/_ajSTT ^J/Suj /5/TS3T (j)<otn5&' (ol -f ILJ IU fflW 6V CfeX) . * U IT 
 
 JE)<F Q& <%_/_LJ (aurr&6$6V%s\) (not even half the mud was 
 removed. <%_i_ = eve?i). ^ /? QJTLDU& &mJLSl(J>ll(7tfiLJ 
 vulgarly for iQiru^u to be full, inf. of /S^rLDty. 56. II.] 4 
 GlffLbUGiiLb (o! ^ rr fSiir ey usssr <ss$n QiQy ssr. (QjriJbueiJLCi, sometimes 
 very vulg.) 5 (^(rrjsijsgu&tt iriszotp Qei/srr&rr^^ 
 
 /T llfl<GV Jl Sol) (L) <5B &Qlb Q 611 617" STT iL 
 
 ^ IT fssr(S u ser ? " ' 
 n^ -"'^^ - 
 
 (unless you de). 
 
 6U27" <SUir Q'lBITliT ^ JBl -X ifi & Si QTj>U G>UlTeti (^gyp6B flfsSlfD^J 
 
 n& n*i5ir<9\ uessnsssfl^Q^sfreyyr 
 
 eurrssr. 
 
 * (.'(it ftbfD <STiLi s^eu^^ie. 10 fa {si IT /E $(7^/5^ UL^LD 
 
 (6.) l Unless you pay the money you will not be allowed to go. 
 I 2 Unless a man eats he will not live. 3 I did not obtain even that. 
 4 When shall I obtain knowledge so that my ignorance shall depart, 
 my doubts remove, and my heart rejoice? 5 He gave the money 
 spontaneously to all who asked him, so that their hearts rejoiced. 
 6 My servant goes and comes when I tell him. 7 By conversation the 
 way will seem short. [Comp. 244.] 8 You must not speak or think 
 so. 9 He gave much, -r 
 
 * Inf. of consequence.
 
 LESSON 54. 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 172. 
 
 172. NUMERALS. 
 
 (1.) Simple Forms. 
 
 Cardinal Numbers. 
 
 one (vulg. epswr 1 
 
 Arabic \ Tamil : Adjective 
 Signs. ! Signs, j Forms. 
 
 iafcr., 
 
 &o> ftP> 
 
 fBtrssr. 
 
 
 
 STSOT, OTil. 
 
 Derived 
 Nouns. 
 
 sr (m.) (or 
 
 . ) a cer- 
 tain person. 
 )QT)<surr two per- 
 sons. 
 
 three per- 
 
 !B tr 90 SUIT four per- 
 sons. (POET.) 
 
 ggsufr five per- 
 sons. 
 
 / 
 
 (2.) Compound forms : LJ^JJ changed into u^ + ^jesr, or into 
 usvr, or unchanged. // , 
 
 Cardinal Numbers. 
 
 Tamil 
 
 , Signs. ! Signs. 
 
 &c. 
 
 . i 12 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 19 
 
 (D/H- 
 
 i sons. 
 
 UGST soft au fr = twelv e persons. 
 
 * This seems to be = one from ten. Compare the Roman numeral IX. where 
 the idea is the same. 
 
 2/ 
 
 ^^
 
 172, 173. 
 
 LESSON 54. EXERCISE 53. 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 (3.) The adjective forms of numbers 1 to 8 prefixed to u^i, the 
 shortened form of 
 
 Cardinal Numbers. 
 
 Arabic Tamil 
 Signs. Signs. 
 
 JBJTjDUgl 
 
 20 
 
 . 30 
 
 . 40 
 
 . ! 50 
 
 . I 60 
 
 . ' 70 
 
 . 80 
 
 . 90 
 
 . 100 
 101 
 
 -. 
 
 ) 
 
 ( The adjective forms of all the 
 < following are similar to this : 
 (_ u^jij is changed into ujj. - 
 
 Probably from Q^rr&r (a root 
 signifying defect) and jprjpi. 
 
 The adjective form is 
 throughout. 
 
 Vulg. 
 
 , &c. 
 
 The adjective forms of 1 to 8 prefixed 
 
 . 2./-V 4 d 
 
 The adjective form of 
 
 100,000 is gg)6Uil*ii a lac. 
 A million is ujsgs ^6VL_<fiJD. 
 (Jdf/rif is used for 10 millions. 
 
 (o&irirr Q&rriy- for 10 million 
 
 times a 
 
 Exercise 53. 
 173. (VOCABULARY, 166.)
 
 ~C, <U^7 - 
 
 x* 
 
 EXERCISE 53. LESSON 55. 173, 174 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 JTIEI Qd5/r<S)dE 
 
 ^ IE1 <5B tB Jl ffO &(&) LJ fT JT g> 68) <3>JLI LQ Q<5F/T 
 
 3 
 
 [175.] <5U(tf)S$>t$l(o6V *f^l fBL-fSp^g] (vulg. ^llSl ff ^ tgl STS33T 
 
 (130.) 
 
 (the Tamil way of saying, I is noon) 
 <sii IB t rr ir <ssrr (136. a.). 
 
 & (40.) 
 3r (165.). 13 
 
 <Svfl ILj LO S^eJST/Dl^. <5T <SGf g)l Lib 
 
 (?/_y/r(S3)/r<5Esrr (ife Zegf t Zi^e a siicfc, &c., is owe 
 familiarly = "m7/ friend," sometimes in contempt). 
 
 (&.) l Fifty persons came. 2 The whole 50 persons came. 3 This 
 happened in the year one thousand four hundred and twenty-seven 
 [175.]. 4 There are 60 narigai in one day. 5 There are seven days in 
 a week, and 52 weeks in a year. 6 How many peons are there in the 
 court (37.)? 7 What o'clock is it? (How many bells ?) 8 They 
 came, ten together. 9 Give the boy 10,000 pagodas. 10 Has the com- 
 plainant one eye or two ? n He brought 10 fanams to the bazaar. 
 12 You may buy two rice-cakes for a pie. 13 The Hindus say there are 
 six sects. u Give the servant three rupees five annas six pies. 15 Five* 1 
 times five. 
 
 Lesson 55. 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 174. The Tamil people do not ordinarily use the decimal nota- 
 tion ; it is now introduced into schools. In Tamil 
 
 * Observe the ellipsis of the plural sign <ssrr, the noun put before the 
 numeral, 2.LO omitted, and all summed up by (SjJEdELJ LSlfftSirffLJa. Compare 
 the following where the same is expressed more precisely, but less idiomatically. 
 The placing of the noun of number after the noun it belongs to is often elegant. 
 
 121
 
 175-179. LESSON 55. EXERCISE 54. 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 5,815. This should, of course, be written ^&@. The Arabic 
 system of notation has been introduced in all Government offices. 
 
 175. The ordinals are formed from the above by adding to the 
 cardinal forms ^ua or <^wgi (3rd pers. neut. fut. and part, noun f ut. 
 of ^g), (72, 88.). But gdflrjp one makes (tp^su, (Lp^gu/rti, or (tp^su/T 
 suji; first, and in compounds <spssrgi becomes ga/r (taking the adj. 
 form) : L/^GPismjr/r/i, &c. 
 
 the 2nd day of the month. the fourth minister. 
 
 (Lit. two-which will become.) (Lit. four-which ivill become.) 
 
 176. The former is used as an adjective only ; the latter is either 
 an adjective or an adverb. 
 
 ^sussr (tp^gu.Tsujj sufc<ff7ssr he came first. 
 
 177. Some of these numbers are repeated in a peculiar way to 
 form distributives : one by one, &c. &c. Thus : 
 
 (the first letter only of Gpzsrgv is taken) one by one. 
 (the first letter of ^irsssr, @) two by tico, in twos. 
 (the first syllable of Qpssrgy shortened, (tp) by threes. 
 
 *>_/ 
 None is formed from GBTU. 
 
 178. VOCABTTLABY. 
 
 chapter. 
 
 more or less (<rr> to 
 ascend, (Sjeoroiu to decrease). 
 
 about, more or less. 
 on an average. 
 Lc> doubt. 
 a blind man. 
 
 a hunchback. 
 
 contempt. 
 urrirssxsu vision, sight. 
 
 back, 
 a bundle. 
 
 other. 
 
 Exercise 54. 
 179. (a.) 1 
 
 2 
 
 Q&iiiT<ssr (obs. the two uses of Q OB sir, 70.). 
 sr^sssytL 3n.sarssr 
 &63sr UIT frssxsu&sir irQir ! " 
 
 (182.) 
 
 <suT0a3, en IT ST IT til** come up ! ^ QuziLtSn-ssr quite true ! 
 
 122
 
 ^-<?fe r*> G 3 % ^^ 
 
 LESSON 56. 180. 
 
 DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 
 
 <35 SSST <jj3)] LD fTUJ U 
 
 uj IT su sin triLj LD 6^(75 
 upj^p- Qp& 
 
 (Lp <5^l 611 IT & (Gffj Ld 
 
 3) ( 2)C?Ly/r(Sx) 
 Qurreumu. 
 
 (&.) l In the fourth chapter. 3 A man blind of one eye. 3 One 
 was deformed, and the other had but one eye. 4 They must come one 
 by one. 5 Place these bundles by threes. 6 The children are arranged 
 five in a class. ~ This is the fiftieth time I have walked round the 
 temple. 8 On an average he comes every fifth month. 9 On the 
 second day of last month. 10 Ten witnesses, more or less, proved 
 the complainant's statement. n The fourth person had a bundle on 
 his back. 13 Come for your wages on the first of the month. 13 1 will 
 pay you the money on the 20th in the evening. 
 
 Lesson 56. 
 
 DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 
 
 180. From primitives are derived what are called appellative 
 nouns. These are in constant use. 
 
 From nouns in LD they are formed by changing to into ^pgi (18. e.) 
 and adding ^gysar for the sing, masculine, ^efr for the sing, feminine 
 (*9lgi for the^sing. neuter), ^/r or ^/f*<sfr for the epicene plural, and 
 jj/srosu for the neuter plural. Many other nouns simply add these 
 terminations ; thus, 
 
 (o&rrsjSslsTLa a tribe, (o&rr<jJ5lij<5<giT&!r a man of a tribe. 
 
 (Ssir^^lir^fSiTfifr a woman of a tribe. 
 GW^^jr^/r/r, <E(srr people of a tribe. 
 esc/f a village, ^rsrirser, 
 
 g^" There are many exceptions to this, since Sanskrit words intro- 
 duced into Tamil follow the rules of their own language. 
 
 Thus, LjeserGGsfliuLz virtue has i^sssr&s^uuw freer, which is the Sanskrit 
 for a virtuous man ; so utrwia sin, makes urreSl a sinner. The dictionary 
 must be consulted for these forms, rsir makes ^mLifriT the country 
 people (Comp. 18. c.), but also /sm-rresr a landholder, a head man 
 among certain tribes. (^/ ^ r, ^ <i a <u* ^-^ ^ ^ "-$ ^ t ^ /^ /-/> 
 
 * ^en ^i = as folloivs : lit. that ichich will become. 
 t These two are not so frequently used. 
 
 123
 
 181-183. 
 
 LESSON 56. EXERCISE 55. 
 DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 
 
 181. /rjr5r (m.) and /rifl (f.) 
 
 [S. a maker, doer.~\ 
 ^,eift (m. and f.) 
 
 [C^ISTT manage affairs 
 &!re$ (m. and f.) 
 [S. a ^possessor.] 
 
 From -ssissr a debt, we have i_ 
 debtor, siesrsfrfl (f.). From cf$ 
 sheep-man, ^iLGls&iTtfl (f.) ; u/^jg? 
 Q @ ft iLiib a garden, Q '< IT L-L-& SITIT 
 
 182. VOCABULARY. ** r ^' 2 
 
 LZ a part, ability (Ang. a man 
 of parts). . 
 
 Isw/i kind, family, n^tfi^- /**-+ 
 happiness, luck, wealth. 
 irnsijr (m.) a happy man. 
 ' (f .) a happy or blessed 
 woman. 
 
 a race. 
 
 ~) 
 
 I These suffixes are added to 
 [ the inflexional base of nouns 
 .'] j (131.) to make derivatives of 
 | agency , possession or relation. 
 J (_ g^JZi&zl^J 
 t^)srfi a debtor, si-sor&tTffGsr (m.) a 
 a sheep, we have ^iLGlg&inreBr a 
 sense, i-i^^l^ireS a sensible person ; 
 Br a gardener. Htsi^~ ^> im / *^ o~~f- 
 
 caste. ZZrrtf) S. 
 <SIILI&LC> family. 
 
 umLirreift (LJ/T suffering) a 
 laborious man. 
 
 <ffii_ili_/rsYfl a partner. 
 LfljTTjsrrfrsrfl (aiQRefr bewilderment) 
 one under the influence of a 
 demon. 
 
 a criminal. 
 
 iir near neighbours (^ujeu). 
 s. 
 
 a jislierman 
 j a hook), ^-o-vi^- i~~- 
 a float used by fishermen 
 
 fr elders (g become old). 
 
 Exercise 55 
 
 183. (a.) l 
 parties). 2 
 
 /rex) 
 
 (3r. 5) [Prov.] 
 
 i." (Poet.) 14 (^o^Co^/r/r O<F /rear ear ey/r/r^sjo^ ^uiS/r 
 
 u i 
 
 15 
 
 (6.) ! All the villagers stood near. 2 My people. 3 The people of 
 my tribe. 4 All the people of the world will be astonished. 5 All the 
 
 124
 
 LESSON 57. 184. 
 
 DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 
 
 people of the inhabited country and those who dwell in the wilder- 
 ness (pir(>, <E/r). 6 The inhabitants of all lands praised that brave 
 person. 7 They are all of one caste and family. 8 The watchman is 
 a very hard-working man. 9 You must inquire from the neighbours 
 of the criminal. 10 Many foolish people go about as if possessed by a 
 demon. n All the sailors left the ship. 12 The fisherman sits on the 
 bank of the river. ~. 
 
 Lesson 57. 
 
 DERIVATIVES. 
 
 184. l?roni primitive roots used as adjectives many nouns are 
 formed, which^are both common and elegant. /T-J^Li^r^^ <z^- 
 
 (a.) By adding s^/, many of these^ become abstract not 
 quality. 
 
 js<so good [or that which is good], ps3r<5$>L& goodn#6~{3M-\- /i=ss<5ni). 
 (6.) By adding the suffixes (Comp. 
 
 , ^sussr, ^yesr, CJOTT, sing. mas. rational. [Comp. 29.] ^ ^ 
 
 , ^su&r, <^r, sing. fern, rational. 
 ^>l<siJ!T, ,^/r, gg/r, plural mas. and fern, rational. 
 , g], sing. com. irrational. 
 
 * = gy, ^JSST, .J1/S5X2U, plural com. irrational nouns are formed. 
 These terminations may be added to any nouns. ' *n>-> *- ^^^ <-*- 
 ^F Final *- becomes @ before these terminations. Those given 
 here are colloquial forms. 
 ^eu good, makes i ^jj/ small, makes 
 
 a good man. ^nS!uj<sussr a little person (m.). 
 
 1500 eogi good thi 
 
 good woman. 
 good people. 
 
 things. 
 
 a little person (f.). 
 r/r little persons (vs.. & f.). 
 that tvhich is little. 
 
 those which are 
 
 little (n.) L 
 
 (c.) The above belong to the 3rd person. But such nouns may be 
 formed for the 1st and 2nd persons also. These are not much used 
 in the common dialect ; thus, 
 
 ^LJL foot makes ^i^-QiLissr I a servant (<&esr being the verbal per- 
 sonal term, of 1st singular. 31.). 
 
 When a person wishes to be very humble in his address he says : 
 
 ^Lp.G'uJear ^rsj^&flL-^^l&j svjsQ^ssr for prrssr, &c. 
 I a slave to themselves am come. 
 
 Even prrQiuesr I a dog, and other disgusting expressions of the 
 same kind are sometimes used. 
 
 * Comp. this with the rule in Lat. that the notn. and ace. of neuter plurals 
 always end in a. 
 
 125
 
 UJ/^ /^. 
 
 185, 186. LESSON 57. EXERCISE 56. 
 
 DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 
 
 And Q<sn~(l crweZ makes Qsiri^-iumL thou a cruel person. This is 
 not used in common Tamil. 
 
 [Tamil grammarians consider these to be a species of verb. An ordinary 
 verb is called Q^rfl^Ssu si9Ss!5r = [Tinderstanding-position-verb] a verb which 
 implies an action, a time, an object, or an instrument. But these forms are called 
 (3)fSlULJ s$ctesr = sign verb (i.e.) they can only inferentially express time, &c. 
 
 They have been called " conjugated nouns," " verbal appellatives," and 
 " appellative verbs." (Nannul, Sut. 321.) They are formed in poetry in great 
 abundance from nominal roots, which are divided, for this purpose, into six 
 classes ; viz., 
 
 (1.) Nouns expressive of some thing possessed (Qun~(nj<sh) : (&)6S)Lp an ear- 
 ring. 
 
 (2.) Nouns of place Q)i_iL) : q/D/i outside. 
 
 (3.) Nouns of time (sfrffD/i) : Larr&LD month. 
 
 (4.) Nouns expressive of some member, or part (^Ssor) : <SSSJT an eye. 
 
 (5.) Nouns of quality, outward or inward ((ajssBTLo) : S-S3brLa fidelity. 
 
 (6.) Nouns expressive of something done (Q^/ry^e!)) : Qffireb word. 
 
 RULE. Prepare the noun in whatever way it is prepared for the reception of the 
 casal signs (18), then add the personal terminations as in 31, 87. [Compare also 
 App. xii. Paradigm of verbs (xii. )] The nouns thus formed for all persons and 
 numbers may be regularly declined. Comp. Pope's III. Gram. 93.] 
 
 185. VOCABULARY. 
 
 From 2.63)1 that which belongs to, are derived 
 
 a-0i_uj, a sign of the 6th case. [Comp. 21.] 
 
 S-isroL-tuffljOTr he who possesses. ___ . 
 
 a.6roi_uj<suisfr she who possesses. 
 
 2-<SE>/_u_/j2 that which possesses. 
 
 s_6roi_uj<5E><a; those which possess. 
 
 2-(STOL_ujia//r<(sfr they who possess. 
 BL8>i_^F/rsBrffljr, &c., are also used. 
 [Here ^.eroL-^^j is used for e.eTOL-iujs. For ^ssria/sar, &c., see 87, 58, 151.] 
 
 2_fr (133.) 2-6?r<?rr<a,'s5r (s-&iQ&rtT^r)'=-Ueto ^vhom there is, who has. 
 2.6Tr<srri3i;<s?r=s&e to whom there is, who has. 
 7=i7 to which there is, which has. 
 
 (^.mQ<B(TiTfr)-=they to whom, <fec. (in. and f.). 
 
 <&r=they to which, &c. 
 O The above are regarded by Tamilians as finite verbs ; but the 
 plural neuter nouns, as a.<sroi_<ij, a.sfrsrr, @eu, Qutfliu are capable also 
 of being used in every respect as relative participles, and are some- 
 times so considered. 
 
 Exercise 56. 
 
 186. (d.) l urr&liLj(Lp<5nL-iL]<siJir&fff 
 3 rBevQevirir ujtreu^Ld ^yeuemtru L/(T^0iy/r/r<z<srr. 3
 
 EXERCISE 56. LESSON 58. 187. 
 
 FOREIGN WORDS IN TAMIL. 
 
 <oT SST 6VU Ld Q U ILJ GV) fT ILJ <5V) L-. ILJ gS>(#) LD<5\)6ti<35 QggL-ty- (here e_<335/_UJ 
 
 governs the 2nd case). 4 & /$ G> vu rr n IT iLf is Q u iff G> LU rr en rr ILJ LQ 
 
 jy 6$) Lp fB jg} & Qt55/T6wS) /SUIT. 5 {)& IS GV e$ gtf *B IT 68T . 6 Q U ifi 
 
 (oiLirrrr GurrrrStstntsisinujss LL/U./TLDSU /si. ^ Lzflsztr ILJ rr err <5\) 
 
 Q p IT fs p IT <si] Q^iu^svev. 9 ufrsSKoiusyr UL-.i_urr 
 
 10 
 
 (<sr= ^ds} 
 
 Quifl(oujrnr 
 
 (6.) l There are none who are always happy. 2 The great have said 
 so. 3 He is a man of great wealth. *Well. 5 Cruel people give 
 trouble to the poor. C A11, both small and great, will be there. 
 7 What shall I, a sinner, do ? 8 Three of his partners are great 
 people. 9 The inhabitants of that village are little people. 10 He is 
 a man of mercy. 11 Your humble servant is well by your blessing ! 
 12 Help your servant who is but as a dog. 13 All generations shall 
 call me blessed (f.). u Little people must be humble. 
 
 Lesson 58, 
 
 FOREIGN WORDS IN TAMIL. 
 
 187. Many words of foreign origin are in constant use in Tamil. 
 
 (a.) Some of these are English ; thus, ?<(< sick a word of 
 universal use, Q '& /r fr L Court, 6ULo column of a MS., L$<SW fees, &c. 
 
 (&.) Some have come into Tamil through the Hindi. These are of 
 most frequent occurrence in official documents. 
 
 (c.) Many are of Portuguese origin : (9)0sfi kitchen, &c. 
 
 (d.} Some are derived from Mahratta, Telugu, Canarese, Mala- 
 yalim, &c. 
 
 (e.} Sanskrit words can hardly be spoken of as foreign to the 
 Tamil. 
 
 ^3T [In regard to these words it may be remarked, that they cannot be 
 altogether dispensed with. However we may dislike intermingling words of 
 foreign origin with what we choose to call pure Tamil, these words are in 
 universal use and must be learnt. Again, since many of these are names of 
 things brought into the country by foreigners, there can be no reason why they 
 should not bring in the names as well as the things. It is mere pedantry to 
 refuse to use the Hindi Qu^issiff for table, and make the compound Gurr&GGru 
 u<o06S>& (food-board). On the other hand, if there is a really good Tamil word 
 for a thing, why should a foreign one be introduced ? Why say $&> when 
 aSloJirSl sickness is well known. Most of these words will be found in these 
 Lessons or in Index I. and the equivalent Tamil words where any exist.] 
 
 127
 
 188-190. EXERCISE 57. LESSON 59. 
 
 FOBEIGN WORDS IN TAMIL. 
 
 188. VOCABULARY (as specimens). 
 
 uSeu a mile. 
 L-& judge. 
 
 hospital. 
 <r number. 
 T (Arab.) a person. 
 (sabot) shoes. 
 
 eorrjF'Sn' a lantern (also 
 
 (Hind.) boots. 
 (Arab.) a prisoner. 
 
 musquito- curtains is 
 Tel. D6MATERA=musquito-veil, 
 
 Exercise 57. 
 189. (a.) 
 
 Qunesr 
 
 (6.) J Bring my shoes. 2 Let down the musquito-curtains. 3 How 
 many miles is it to the town ? 4 Has he laid the table ? 5 Bring the 
 kettle. 6 Have they made a complaint in the court ? 7 Has the 
 collector arrived ? 8 Where is the clergyman ? 
 
 [Obs. There are peculiar ways of expressing foreign words in Tamil 
 which must be noticed. No native would understand l&=sick, but 
 all recognise 
 
 M/"^~ ^ -/^-*_~- - ~ _ 
 
 * Lesson 59. 
 VERBAL DERIVATIVES. 
 
 190. (a.) Some verbal derivatives have been noticed in 87, 88, 
 143, 148. Besides these, many nouns are formed from verbal roots 
 by adding a/ or UL/ according to the analogy of the future : 
 
 Verbs which have QJ in the future take <ay ; those which have u or 
 uu take LJi_/. The nouns treated of in this Lesson differ from those 
 in 87, 88, 148 in having no governing power. Those are in every 
 sense parts of the verb : these are nouns formed from th^verbal roots. 
 (&.) Passive nouns are formed chiefly from roots in a. by changing 
 a. into gg. 
 
 Q^rres)! a garland (that which is strung) from Q^T string 
 together (Poet.). 
 
 a garment (that which is put on) from a. put on (s_uu). 
 a burden (that which is earned) from <0FLo carry.
 
 LESSON 59. 190. 
 
 VERBAL DERIVATIVES. 
 
 i Sanskrit nouns in A generally change ^ into gg when they are brought 
 into Tamil : so SITA = {?&$.& ; SAB'HA, a congregation, is &<su. 
 
 (c.) cgy/i is added to some verbal roots to form nouns. . . 
 
 wealth (what is made or acquired) from =^c5@ make. **~^ 
 i a motion (what is moved) from ^iL move. ^^t^t^ 
 "In some cases the consonant of the root is doubled or hardened before 
 the adSition of ^is as G^/nliLa from Q^frsssr, &c. There is, however, 
 a form QjgtTL_J( ^7 KJ^ - ~+/Jfy -1 P> ^ . X 
 
 Many roots consisting of one short syllable (final a. does not 
 reallv belong to the root) lengthen this in order to form nouns. 
 
 Qu)j Tyring forth, obtain, makes Qujpi that which is gained or 
 
 brought forth. 
 
 LJ,T(TT) meet, fight, makes Quirrr a heap, battle. 
 @ give, makes FF what is given as an equivalent or pledge. 
 
 gaT [This is almost the only case in which the Tamil violates the principle, 
 that through every modification in inflexion and conjugation, the ROOT is 
 unchanged. Of course final 2. does not belong to the root. But compare 131.] 
 
 (e.) Some roots in jp, jj/, (not short monosyllables) double the 
 final consonant. [Comp. 18, c., d., 131, c.] 
 
 Thus : OTfip^js a letter (OTIT^JS write, 62.), UITL! a song (LJ/T sing, 
 62.), @fog)! a 
 
 line (?p scratch, split). 
 (/.) sSl is added to some verbal roots. 
 
 Q&etr hear, aslc ; &&&l^eSTa question, report. 
 
 Q;5jT&iJ>e defeated, Gprrw-sS defeat^ 
 
 (g.) @ is added to some rootsu: ^ppSl a sweeper (^JI/DJJ/, 56. II.). 
 
 These nouns then indicate the doer of the action. From jy comes 
 
 ^Uf.. t-^'I^ ^ ^-ff) ^- + 
 
 (h.) $ is added to some roots. 
 
 ruin () ; u>p-$ forgetfulness 
 
 (t.) <F) is added to some roots : 
 
 L>S) <--<?, {jjj&t.fi-ff&l (/joip rejoice, @<L& despise). 
 
 (j.} STOLO is added to the present and past relative participles. 
 [Comp. 154.] Thus, Q<fiL-Slzsrrr)-<58)Lr>, Qffuj-^-esjLd. But this is by 
 no means common, and is strictly a verbal form. 
 
 (fc.) In many cases the root of the verb is also used as a noun. 
 [Comp. 164.] Thus, 
 
 Qau/1 a cut, or cut, 62 ; <S>L_ a tie, or tie, 62. 
 
 (Z.) Some nouns are formed by adding a. err = existence to the verbal 
 root. Thus, 
 
 Q^tLu-jsrr poetry (from Q&UJ, as the Greek Trot'^o-is from Trot'cw J 
 mafce) ; Qu/r^sfr substance (from QUITQ^ come together).
 
 191-193. EXERCISE 58. LESSON 60. 
 
 VERBAL DERIVATIVES. 
 
 191. VOCABULARY. 
 
 learning (.sei; learn, 70.). ! QjErr&SLG intention (Q^iT'S^ look, 
 sr a neighbour (iSro other). -V~ f 56. II.). 
 
 a bird (LJ/D fly). 
 vain (<s65sfi(2)=in vain). 
 
 ^i on 
 
 ILI (56. IJfsend (as a missile, 
 
 a.rivywl A 
 
 collect}. 
 
 a congregation (&-L- 
 
 destruction (Q=s destroy), 
 urr suffering (u suffer). 
 jE@5)L- walk, conduct (/si walk). 
 
 i> fear (..gy^cff) : UUJLO. 
 
 arrow). 
 
 i_ sweep, c(2j<j3 intention (s^^ think). 
 46. II.) a church-sweeper. \ s. ^/r^^ti meaning. 
 
 Exercise 58. 
 192. (a.) ^euSsO effessfl/b u p an en &> GTT 
 
 -s Q&rreasrGl 
 s_ S35 /_ s:n LD wy to si/^p/sjoLmtyLD 5^(5 su/.^ tQ <s\) sv tr j] . 
 
 
 LJfT, fSH SU <5ST &1 SST LJ IT ^V 611 GST 6ll 6&H &; (&i . Silf5< 
 
 63) IT < &6&3rQ)l _gy ITI& <f fBsljrssr LD && LA R> &> IT n~ , 
 
 (b.) l Do not rejoice too much in prosperity, nor grieve too much 
 in adversity. 2 Call the church- sweeper. 3 Neither praise nor blame 
 affects the dead (@p^sufr<ff(5@ @6u3su). 4 The household are 
 much delighted because a son is born. 5 They all fought in the 
 jungle. 6 Do not neglect learning. 7 The young (^jj/aj/f, 185.) should 
 not kill birds. 8 What is the intention of this verse ? 9 What is the 
 meaning of this word ? 10 What is the substance of this sentence ? 
 11 What is the purport of the letter he has written ? 12 This is a fatal ; 
 affair. 13 He is a very forgetful person. u So I hear ! 
 
 Lesson 60. 
 
 INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 193. The following are used as interjections. 
 (a.) ^jjy Oh ! 59, ,Q&iT Oho I @^/r here, behold ! ^jjs^fr there, 
 
 130
 
 fc30N 60. EXEECISE 59. 194, 195. 
 
 XOTEBJECTIONS. 
 
 , see/ gg(?uj/r alafriQiLi hallo! oh! 
 s / ^Garr hallo ! A 
 
 These are used at the beginning of a sentence. 
 ^esrQ>(y? ^ebeoeuir ? ^eusuGsy/r (corrupted into .jyeuCoeu/r) ? i* t< 
 
 i I suppose, forsooth ! certainly. 
 
 (6.) ^*@/i is put at the end when it signifies forsooth, and after 
 the emphatic word when it indicates certainly. 
 
 jj/Qjsar rseoensussr ^S^LC, he must be reckoned a good man I 
 
 suppose. 
 ,jysj;;EB)<S(<gjii jseoeuGuesr he indeed is a good man. (This is not 
 
 classical.) l4~t*st~-i. *n-> 
 
 (c.) ^>j6sr(o(y (rather high), ^evevQsurr, ^eoeosuir, ^ebQajir (vul- 
 gar) are put at the end of a sentence or after the emphatic word=is 
 it not ? 
 
 (d.) sirsssr, &iTfj%)iLb (imperative of stressr see) are in constant use 
 in much the same sense as we use the word now : smvresr 
 
 * 
 
 *> 
 
 discretion. i*fy& ^ *r <*^ Q&irjj} (s.) j6Ti, brightness. 
 
 &LQ detriment, danger, deceit. ^t-rr ! (mas.) you fellow ! 
 
 SjsiQLGfr&LD loss of sense ; with ^tf (fern.) my good woman. 
 
 QUIT (58.) lose one's senses, be- uiYL-iq- grandmother. 
 
 come senseless. / ^JLJUIT! father! 
 
 subtility, nicety. *3 - ^.t* . UILJ&J a worthless fellow. 
 
 ./ft^tn^^^i-'fff^ ^ Guirffiruj come up! well!' UA ^~ ? 
 
 pQ>ro a little. /ttfi^C&^-^J <sn-Lu and <g<&uusgr are used as 
 mistake (56. II.). words of respect. 
 
 grow up (55. 1.). ^suuQssr ! 
 
 much (generally used with ^u5 mother ( = <triu). 
 
 Exercise 59. 
 195. (a.) l jp(o&rr, i^GTrsrr/ruj (21. h. ^ is changed into 
 
 (3j L_ & L& LD 
 
 (185, 6.) &p<3p i9fSl^)<^> ^y& urr 
 
 5 
 
 <su<s(r 
 
 Q IL> IT <&& s IT if) (182.). 
 
 9 <ST&ST uirtLi^- ^sy(Lgl(yyiLJ ? 10 
 ? (vulg. for sresr, yL_/r.) n J 1 
 
 131
 
 3 196. <^ - LESSON 61. 
 
 ^V-^02- 7 ^-^ /-v-*"v^ DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 
 
 13 
 
 (Observe the inversion which is very idiomatic.) 
 
 (6.) l Well, is it not ten o'clock ? 3 Alas, I am deceived, what shall 
 
 I do ! 3 My mother. 4 Which is the way to Tanjore ? (^^/ra^/r) 
 5 This boy is the clever fellow ! 6 So this is the learned man you 
 mentioned. 7 Here is a rupee for you. 8 1 will come myself. 9 Hallo, 
 gardener, come here. 10 1 suppose that physician was your father. 
 
 II Stop a bit, you fellow ! 12 He 's a great scamp. 13 Alas, nothing 
 has grown in my field. 
 
 re 
 
 Lesson 61. 
 
 FORMS CORRESPONDING TO THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE 
 DEGREES. 
 
 196. From 130 to 133 it appears that there are no adjectives, 
 properly so called, in Tamil. 
 
 The noun, used as an adjective, does not, of course, admit of changes 
 expressive of the degrees of comparison. How then can we express in 
 Tamil, " this is better than that " and " that is the best of all f " /^ i+s**- 
 
 (1.) "This is better than that." i^n^i^ *^-c ^l^-^fyi^L-^yf-^^i- /. 
 
 a. ^<ib(3) $>gi /Feuev^j. The dative of that which has less of the 
 quality spoken of : " To that, this is good." 
 
 b. ^.ghp/i @jp {EGoevgi. The 5th case with a.tL (denoting com- 
 pleteness) : " From that altogether, this is good." This is to be 
 preferred to the former. If this be regarded as the 7th case, in 
 opposition to native Grammarians, the sense will be " In all that, 
 this is good." 
 
 c. jy^eu ( c gy i C'6i>) $gi jseosvgi. The 5th case: "From thai, this 
 is good." ((7 should be added.) 
 
 These three are elegant. 
 
 56. III., although you see, 100. (2.)) = " Although you see that, this is 
 good." 
 
 e. ^easju uirir<s<s @js rseoeo^i (urrrr&<s, the infin. of LJ.T/T, 169.) : 
 " That while you see, this is good. 
 
 These are common and quite correct, though not very elegant 
 forms. 
 
 ^gro^sflL. jD^j rseoeo^i (a9<_ to leave): "That to leave, this is 
 
 This is rather colloquial. 
 
 cgy^/Df^j Dj3 =gy,<s pjeo^i (<g>ijJ5l'& more, may be prefixed to {seo 
 in all the above. It is not needed.) 
 
 132
 
 LESSON 61. EXERCISE 60. 
 COMPAEATIVES AND SUPEBLATIVES. 
 
 197, 198. 
 
 (atrtLifL$B& from SITL. show, 
 
 56. II., although you show) =*' Although you shoiv that, this is good.! 
 This is decidedly a vulgar form. yVi^:^ ^ /^&t~ tfa^ ~Cju~. 
 (2.) " That is the best of all." 
 
 a. cgyjTjj OT &J sv IT <su rp /Si ^j us (<oi&o@o[T S)jlG\}jLb) is<sos\>^s. The 5th case 
 with s-Lo and IT word denoting universality: " From all this is good." 
 
 b. c^yjo OTeusu/roj/r^/Djyjji-Q (OTeueo/r^.^s^tii) ^eueu^j. The 4th 
 case with &.tr> : h To all this is good.'' 1 // z > / 
 
 c. ^^jGfiu s-^^LoiL (^(^jr/lLti). .These two words are Sanskrit, 
 and signify besf^mosTexcellent. fc^~ ^^'-t-^^-^_ . 
 
 d. Q&6osi]<jf$@(r (o><f&jeuLa the greatest, highest degree of prosperity 
 
 197. VOCABULARY. 
 
 QLDesrQLo^jtJD more and more I kingly, snj^/rj/i observance. 
 (G > Loeu + (2 > Lo6u + 2_ii>, the first j ^ + 2.=^ in Sanskrit corn- 
 syllable shortened for the sake ' pounds) kingly honours. 
 of euphony). 107. jiUJ^-y^cJ ^smiiusar one of the shepherd 
 
 (Lpfig] go before, 56. II. ^^ f ^L.^ Jr Y "^~casfe. ^/^."^ *-> ^ firfC"*) 
 
 (verb, and part.) before, u, ;,-' ^ Laessrisi( (LBIISIC^ a weight, 
 
 (infin.) (ippp (Lpjs<$ first of f 
 all. (Com.) 
 
 maund, time, -fold. 
 
 (ufi(g exceed). 
 
 ^ ^-^^to^' 
 
 198. (a.] 
 
 Q rp $ 1JA_ ^3y<su6$<otnL-UJ6V)j<35(<sj /5/T(oT5(^ /5/rerr [from day to 
 day] ^sy!sl&L>rr& IEL^IB^I <5ii(tF > LL>uty-iu!T&<5 (157.) tsiL.!^ (165.) 
 
 j Qufi 
 
 TQ<ofT U JT Lb(o ILJ fT 35 Q UJ <53T . 
 
 T^S Q<5E/T(jt<5<35LD " (Poet.) = 
 
 C> UJ5l<55T (173.) LbGG3TIEl(3j 
 
 &j && IT OF 
 
 *%LD. 6 2_S3T 
 
 <3B L> IT <3S <35 SITU 
 
 (Poet.) 
 
 iS Qf) <5 /E afiofTU U/T/fdE^^/LO 
 U IT IT Si 6$1 LQ 
 
 /_ujisi//rt5BeTr/ruj 
 
 Q LJ fl ILI ^1 ; 
 
 <5T<5VeV[T 
 <SS) ILI U 
 
 SttLCi 
 
 f 
 
 133
 
 199. LESSON 62. 
 
 " SO," " THUS," " AS." 
 
 (6.) l You must learn more and more in the school. 2 In the 
 school you must get the first of all. 3 He is the most stupid of all 
 the shepherds. 4 This minister is greater than the king. 5 It is 
 better to work than to beg. 6 There is no wealth more precious than 
 learning. 7 She is the best of all the women in the village. 8 The 
 mother rejoices when her son is said to be wiser than others. 9 The 
 elephant is greater than the tiger, but the tiger is more cruel. 10 This 
 is the heaviest burden. n The son is better than the father. 12 This 
 is greater than that. 13 This is sweeter than honey. 
 
 Lesson 62. 
 
 So, SucH^ As. 
 199. (a.) @uuif f Q&iLnu&j[TLA[T ? May (we) do thiis ? (103.) 
 
 g)d.'fii9 / g'/-o/r<5, @afQj(S5)<suj/nij, @a/a/S3?r6S5rLa/r,s, $jjs@ eS^LctiriL 1 , &c. 
 &c., might be used instead of @ui_/if . 
 
 (&.) ^uQuiTUUlLs- <9SrTlfllUp<oS),$<F QfLLiUS 4^LatT? (103.) Is it 
 
 right to do such a thing ? (Qufr name, u suffer. This is common, 
 but not elegant.) 
 
 (c.) )uu^-UUL-L- Lams6r&($<$i[T<oBr -sfrfiuj^es^^ff Q&ujiueDiTLarr ? 
 (Thus-affected honour-destroying thing may [one] do?) 
 Is it right to do such a dishonourable action ? 
 (d.) ^jLJUUjL&Gsn-fS^sueor GrssresTg ;&(? 
 
 To this-likened person, to what? \_<sp agree, be like, 56. III.] 
 What is such a (fellow) good for ? 
 (e.) $)$5iQeu OTd'Suorra/ OilqL/r.ff-(J@) ^y^Geu ^a/suswei/ 
 
 In this how-much he is clever, but, in that so much 
 Qp/_(GB)aS/(5ULj/r?r. (sreL'Qjerra/ with gg and ^eLa/orr/.) 
 a blockhead he will be. As he is clever in this, so is he a blockhead in 
 that. /^ ^ /*-/ /^^C^o ^J, /Zr^-v ^ ^, c^*^ ^i afe^ 
 (/) ,^<5LJLJsar Giuuuj-QtLin' LSefrSErr ^jUULJjL^ffaresr. 
 
 As is the father, so is the child. 
 This may be also thus expressed : ^suu^ssfu Qutre^u 
 
 [It can hardly be necessary to remind the learner that in rendering as into 
 Tamil, he nmst consider its exact meaning. If as = u<hen, the sentence must be 
 changed. Thus: . ^ 
 
 (1.) As Iu-as going =p [resr Gu/reosaSeu, G u n ^ L* b >-> n 
 
 or jsrrssr QuirQfoeiJL^u^&j, 
 or ^/rssr (SurrSfD GswSstruSeu, 
 
 or ^/rgar suL^aSeu r5i<sgiGu!Tp ffioiu &$&), &c. &c. 
 (2.) TJn'8 is AS Zar^re AS that = 
 
 or , , 
 
 Qufl 
 or ^) ( ^ < @2/Bi_(L/ <gi<8tr<sq utrrrss 
 
 i, &c. Ac.] 
 
 334
 
 EXERCISE 61. LESSON 63. 200-202. 
 EXCEPTIVE PARTICLES. 
 
 200. VOCABULARY. 
 
 find out (56. HE.) ! &>:&$$ murder, from the San- 
 
 having seen, /_9i_ seize skrit). 
 
 upon). . OT/5j<Sjgg)//x) everywhere (for sris 
 
 & an infant.CS tf9 **>& (L*)- 
 
 infanticide (^<i>jS, ,jy3ai wander (56. I.). 
 
 Exercise 61. 
 201. (^.) * eruuiy-LJ L/L_L_ I&ILI/TILI 
 
 Lj B &l <S& LU <35 Q& rr(l U U fT IT . 
 
 ^)J<oin[_lLJ iTL>6\) iBfT'oST 
 
 LD J^/sy^iLo <or <oisr jry LQ jy^\)ujis\)/r(?Lo/r ? " (Poet.) *jf6U6tff 
 
 "LJ LJfTfT<!B35 ioTo37<5E^ ^cFSJOcF 
 
 c /TT-/ ;/ i /n miff) ,?MII^ ^^ any rate) )susyr <SFL>LoSlss(o^ 
 
 (Such a child, com.) 
 
 10 
 
 (&.) 1 Did you ever see such a boy ? 2 What is this dog good for ? 
 3 The more he wanders in the streets, the more will he learn evil 
 things. * What kind of people are there in the village ? 5 Why did 
 you commit such great folly ? 6 How can I do such an evil ? 7 He 
 has gone as he was wont. 8 At any rate 1 have seized the thief. 
 9 What are such boys good for ? 10 They are talking just as they 
 used to talk. n May we do such a thing ? 12 What kind of things 
 may we do ? 13 Oho ! is he such a fool ? u Such an one came. 
 
 Lesson 63. 
 /.?.<&<} <r. BESIDES, EXCEPT, BUT. 
 
 202. .-gysuewLneu, ^ssrfSl (from <ji/eu, which denies a QUALITY), and 
 g)6usu,TLQ6\;, ^sisr/S (from @eu, which denies EXISTENCE, 43.), are in 
 constant use. 
 
 su and ^eueu/rLneu are neg. verb. part. 121. (2). 
 and ^eueuiT^? are also used, generally with r: 
 
 are irreg. verb. part, from the unused past tenses 
 ar, 77. Comp. 56. (III.). 
 
 135
 
 202-204. LESSON 63. EXERCISE 
 
 EXCEPTIVE PABTICLES. 
 
 eu and ^eueu/rineu thus involve a double negative ; they 
 are negative forms of negative verbs. 
 
 (a.) gjgueufruieu and {jysisrjS are both used for without, ABSOLUTELY 
 DENYING the existence of that to which they are attached. 
 
 LDsroLp ^eueu/rLaeu @(.<se?r oj^dj^u uQ(tyrr&GfT the inhabitants 
 suffer from the absence of rain. 
 
 ujvQ&rTQij 2_^S)SiL/u3 ^stf/Sl eii^^jgu utLirreor he suffered without, 
 any aid whatsoever. 
 
 These, obviously, govern no case. 
 
 (b.) ^'eueu.Tuieu, ^esrrSI are used for besides, except, but, AFFIRMING: 
 the existence of the thing to which they are attached. 
 
 ^eugu/TLoeu being thus a preposition, and having the meaning of 
 excepting, excluding, governs the 2nd case: 
 me. 
 
 seogrsscr Qufsiu unsr^ss)^^ ^,T/E/S@)6 
 setrirjE^] sfcSsrriL/Quj/T ? QjSsrruj.T^ if you put a heavy burden on a stone 
 pillar, it will break, but not bend. 
 
 (c.) jyajeu/riajy/ii and ^zisrf&^Lz signify moreover. The e.ii may 
 be added to the previous word thus : 
 
 Compare also 170. Many particles have an exceptive force, 
 especially ^ * and wfiu.^f ^ ^ _ ^ ^ 
 
 203. VOCABULARY. 
 
 _ . . . S-LO any whatsoever Geuaxr desire (58. IE.). 
 (luirgi which, 9^ one . . . e_ii j &a;ii the supreme^ (used chiefly 
 
 even, 126.). 
 trouble. 
 
 be troubled. 
 
 by worshippers of 
 
 (also sSeop, 
 
 Exercise 62. 
 204. 
 
 IL/LD 
 
 (vulg. 5y63rc3fla9^o) jyeugDjetniiu p mu rr em tr ILJ LD 
 
 ptrfr. 8 ergjr eQ^lesitu iBfr&sr Q^/r^OdB-s (?ayOT(?) 
 
 Compare these two: fSfffiffStUfffii sSSsrra'^j s.essrQL-rr? Will 
 anything besides that which is sotrn 6e produced ? 
 
 s.essrQL-rr ? Will anything grow trithoutseed?
 
 LESSON 64. 205. 
 
 ALTEENATIVES. 
 
 <5E/T/f?UJiL GTSSTSST ? &_ 63T (faff ILJ <S\)6\) /TLA 6\) UJ/T/T 
 
 10 
 
 (6.) x This child is the only witness ; there is no other. 2 Will any- 
 thing grow without water ? 3 This seed will grow, but not that stone. 
 4 Are there any besides this ? 5 Will they coine without it ? 6 He 
 must learn his lessons : what else ? 7 He troubles me without any 
 cause whatever. 8 1 have told you one thing : besides that, there is 
 another which no one knows but myself. 9 The people are suffering 
 from the lack of true wisdom. 10 They are wandering about without 
 any light. n It is hard to live without sin. l * Come without delay. 
 13 If there should be no water. 
 
 Lesson 64. 
 
 ALTERNATIVES. 
 205. " Either this or that must be true. 
 
 (100. (2.))=a^d if it be this, and if it be that. 
 c. 
 
 d. @^j ^eusu^j ^^3 (ottaujUJinLi 
 
 e. @^j QLZUJ; @eveotrsSL-i[r60, ^^ QLCHU (123. 6.). 
 y. gBSOT-^gu g)j>J, egssr/ri/el) .jy^J QLaiLuumii @0ffi@iL. 
 
 ^T Observe the use of the future in the above=mws be acknow- 
 ledged to be, must be, you must confess that it is. <gr may be added . . . 
 
 (a.) ^su^j is the part, noun, neut. fut. of ^, that which will be or 
 become= either ... or. It must be repeated after each of the things 
 disjoined. [Lesson 29.] ^-/^^,-^z^i^ 
 
 i-\ It is also used for at least: J^/rajj^ QLotLnuiriL g)(5*@G ) ijQ this, at 
 least, you will grant to be true. And for at all, ILHT^S&ST^^I to any- 
 one at all. ~~- J/^- ^ **-- ^-/ 
 
 (c.) cgyeusu <sisr^yeo (^^leo/euQsusisrQyeo) if you say it is not, then. 
 
 (d.) ^eveo^i neut. par$. noun of ^so, that ivhich is not so, is used 
 for or. It has some authority, but it seems a doubtful use of the 
 word. 
 
 * Here the cprfelative conjunctions, either ... or, must be rendered by ^<sa^ 
 . . .^GUMS by ^SlgjjLn . . . cgjfi^y/tn, or by cfj}@)jtfii . 
 appendedto the alternative subjects. The other examples are not literal. 
 
 m rr-r O-rrn^^J&r^rZf- ^ 
 
 n 
 
 C^r^ 3<~^y*
 
 206-208. 
 
 EXERCISE 63. LESSON 65. 
 
 ALTERNATIVES. 
 
 (/.) epsarpSlto), 7th case of epzsrgu one=in one (case understood) this, 
 in one (case) that is true. This is not a classical form, but expresses 
 the dilemma very exactly, and is quite intelligible. 
 
 206. VOCABULARY. 
 u^l&i>, u 3 <SD n~ & in place of. 
 
 without any appa- 
 reason, suddenly, by the 
 
 rent 
 
 visitation of God. 
 Q<siu<sS<$La[r<$ by divine appoint- 
 ment. A 
 
 day ; but 
 
 that, 
 
 day} to-morrow. 
 
 ]s3nstn&<g) (Comp. 
 166.) (pron. p /r sift ssr jfl &(&j or 
 rEirwsGsrZsGsr&tg)} the day after 
 to-morrow (^^TJQI 4th case). 
 
 v L a LD rr & & Q & p ga uQ> u tr & & gji 
 , u^lsvrr 
 
 . for fut.). 
 
 3r(y<5V, jg) u u m-jsujg) _ <W 
 
 (&.) ! Either this or that must be true. 2 Either he is guilty or 
 the witness is speaking falsely (e. or/.). 3 Come to-morrow, or else 
 I will punish you. * Bring me either a horse, or a bandy, or an 
 elephant. 5 Give it to some one or other. 6 Put some one in your 
 place, or I must fine you. 7 This, at least, you will acknowledge. 
 8 They either suffer from the absence of rain, or from some other 
 cause. 9 1 am a learned man and not a merchant. 
 
 Lesson 65. 
 
 NEITHER . . . NOR. 
 
 208. "Neither this nor that is true." 
 
 (a.)@jj<a/ii 0LHL jyeueu, ^^KS^LTI QLBUJ .jyeuev this is not true, and 
 that is not true. 
 
 g)j2 QLQI'U .-jyfcveu, jy^a/uj QLAUJ ^&j&) this is not true, that also is 
 not true.
 
 EXEECISE 64. LESSON 66. 209-211. 
 
 ALTERNATIVES. 
 
 (&.) @)<iTGiJgi, ^pirwgi QL&iLujiriii {j)Frrgi. (Neg. of 205. a.). 
 
 , 100. (2.) = ad *>' # &e Mis arccZ i/ t* 6e that it is not true. 
 
 209. YOCABTOAEY. 
 
 saffron-yellow. \ gg)if thunder. 
 
 ur. Q&&J61] expenditure (Q&&) gro). 
 
 /@ (56. II.) </ive way, recede. 
 
 Exercise 64. 
 
 210. (-.) X /5/r<o3T {JDeiJZsflL-^^SlGV <55t_S3T 61] [T IE) Q GST gj] Lb 
 
 <3SfTlfi 
 
 LL &161ILJLJLC) 
 
 Tj rr ssfl it] LQ 
 
 3T Q <? FT <53T 63T ^gl id <SF LD 
 
 LDSSTLG ^nSltG^j QUITUJ 
 
 s^ (77j si; <asr 
 
 usv <sr u u iy- ly LD 
 
 L-fT (63)6-0 61J if! Gtn<Fll-l(Lp633r ().'} (PrOV.) 12 ^gy ft & ILf L& <5V'(fa) , 6J if) 
 
 (6.) T Neither the king nor any one of his counsellors was present. 
 2 This was known to neither the watchman of the village nor to the 
 inhabitants. 3 The book is neither here nor there. 4 Neither of these 
 is sweet. 3 Neither has. the physician come, nor has he sent his 
 servant. 6 He has neither friends nor relations in the village. 
 7 Neither of these will yield to the other. 8 1 cannot quite believe 
 what either the plaintiff, or the defendant, or the witnesses, or the 
 peons say. [Compare and go over Lessons 12, 38.] 
 
 Lesson 66. 
 
 WOEDS SIGNIFYING EXTENT. 
 
 211. The word toil means extent (probably a corruption of 
 a circled) 
 
 sue IT boundary (susro/r draw, write) ; 
 
 term, limit (Sanskrit) ; and 
 
 139
 
 211, 212. 
 
 LESSON 66. 
 WORDS SIGNIFYING EXTENT. 
 
 These words are used to express extent, duration, &c., and are 
 eqB^^entto"as/ar as," "until," "unto," "to,".&c. 
 
 c^^PWPToiLLii until to-day (not necessarily including the day 
 spoken of). * ufa/r^P**--? 
 
 ()<aja9/_/i LQi_zi to this place, as far as this. 
 
 -3T(GS)6u ^65TLDLL/-> A Ljip. learn as much as you can. (By you 
 which-has-become-the-limit learn). <9#/^ /* J,^T . U^~~ 
 
 LQLlffi@ii (4th with 2-ti>) is also used, but is not elegant. It 
 should follow the nominative, or the relative participle. 
 
 @Loa3LlLi thus much, .jytiLDLL^ so much, <OTLGLDL-(ILD how much, 
 are also used. LaiL.Qi-.fTiS)- (75 keep within bounds. 
 
 to this day. 
 
 Lb up to the neck. 
 
 j $uui$. Q<5 : (uS/oQjsro/r<ffi@LQ as long as you do this. 
 is elegantly added to denote completeness (126.). 
 
 follows the nominative or the rel. part. 
 c. ufliuLn should only be used in combination with a Sanskrit 
 
 noun. LzjrioGsruffliuis-sLD till death, is elegant, and is a regular Sans, 
 compound. 
 
 d. $<a/3r e.efrsrrsrro/ii as long as I live (e-srr existence, used abso- 
 
 as long as I live (LSsmi^, 56. III., 
 
 lutely, and sfr doubled). J- ^ 
 live.) 
 
 )<aajisrr<a/, 
 
 ^jSITdUjLCi 
 
 until I come. 
 
 , OTajsjjsrrsi/ thus much, so much, how much (25.)>, 
 ^ow mwc^ soever, 100. (2.) 208. c. \^f^^U^^ 
 I (will) tell you as 
 as I can. ^^ ~-*^/ ^-^- 2^-* s- 
 
 [m/r^^jr/i S. MATEAM, 
 212. VOCABULAEY. 
 
 L>L MATTTT, as an adj., scanty. 
 sr a rash, hasty per- 
 
 ELTJMI^CAM-KAY 
 
 ^55r TANAI denotes measure, and 
 is only used in comp., thus : 
 
 @ ^ g'ftoGl IT-TANAI, thus much. 
 
 ^tspfyssr AT-TANAI, so much. 
 
 <oT,g<'8sGr ET-TANAI, hoW milch 
 
 r or many ? (25.) . 
 
 9A<AM, boiled rice. T^i/ 
 
 -loyicr 
 
 i TAEKAM, disputation. 
 
 i) TAEKA-SASTEAM, 
 
 L^-=.rom that to this. 
 
 140
 
 EXERCISE 65. LESSON 67. 213,214. 
 
 & "WHY," "WHETHER," "SOEVEB." 
 
 Exercise 65. ., . 
 
 J-vW . . ^X A 
 
 / ( j* 
 
 <f & IEI & rr ILJ 
 
 i (ol&tr, ^G 
 
 f 10 utg 
 
 & rr 61V 5) IT LD 
 
 LCi fV)tt(oLDrr, GTLJUtp. ? GT <58T QTf 63T . 
 /5/TS3T (57^ iS^I-S S (oQOSW" <oT&ST(yir. ^ j mil 
 
 14> ^j <& rh & <srr <sQ ev'fa) . 15 ^)7 
 Q&UJE] {jjgjuuq-. 
 
 (&.) J As lonw as we all live we must labour patiently and dili- 
 gently. 2 1 will not yield a jot of what I claim. 3 He was up to the 
 chin in water. 4 Thus much I have borne. 5 At least take up this 
 little burden. 6 Be thou faithful unto death ! 7 It is as large as a 
 lime. 8 1 will wait till to-morrow. 9 1 will do what I can. 10 From 
 the time the learned man came until now I have been thinking about 
 the matter. 11 His wisdom is immeasurable. 12 Until to-day. 
 
 Lesson 67. 
 
 IDIOMS CONNECTED WITH 
 214. dr why ? 
 
 sresresr what? (Less. 13.) Poet. 
 
 a. <&GST 6uJF<[TiL? Why did you come? [vulg. <oiKiQ& 
 These words are sometimes used in a manner that may perplex the 
 learner. 
 
 &. (giuui^ QftL&irQesreor ? Why does he (anyone) do this? 
 @UUlf.f Q^iLeuQ^eN-? Why do this? 
 
 c. ^jQ^Qssrioafiev, <gjG><5Q<5Gr6eT(Trf&) [.jyjs, 27sr, srssr(y&j] if you say 
 why = wherefore. 
 
 (Many similar forms are in use.) 
 
 d. / @)uuu?-& QfLL.lpQ<g6or65r? Why do you do thus? 
 
 e. <gr.g52/fi= soever. [This may be {jjsr + 2_(i or a corruption of 
 
 ] It is equivalent to ^Sjyjii in such forms as 
 (OT, ^srrfiy, (gr^j/'i) how much soever. 212. d. 
 
 141
 
 215, 216. EXERCISE 66. 
 
 <^SST " WHY," " WHETHER," " SOEVER." 
 
 f 
 
 What matters it whether (they) remain, or go? live or die? 
 This is common, and yet strictly classical. 
 
 g. srssrQufl&j $)rri5i(&jLQ ejsvr ! Pray have mercy upon me ! 
 Here ssr=pray do, is either for <j emphatic, or from ssr = why 
 not? 
 
 215. VOCABULARY. 
 6Y, cease (56. I.). susysru^&j a bandy. 
 
 NIXJI, revile (56. III.). ^/ Lzff&irssr 
 CAJ&I, deceit, ;#-/ ssresr) a brother-in-law. 
 
 inJct ^ASTRAM, science. ?/ pgatj, relationship. 
 ARAY, search into (56. L). ^^^JT_ claim relationship (56. 
 ANDTJ, draw near (56.11.). II.). 
 
 ANAN|5AM, felicity. / <s.rSsrr a InillocTc. 
 VE^LAM, a flood. ^jS'Sirefr an elder sister. 
 
 (56. L). 
 
 Exercise 66. 
 
 216. (-.) 1 6(UITLbp QufTUJ 
 
 (184.) /S/B^-sS^si//^^^ Qupp 
 
 srssr, QurrQuj&srssr ? 2 I 
 _ '* 
 
 3 S7(?(g) prr(o^s) eroxrnSq^&SltTyiosr. * ^>]$<ssr 
 
 6 
 
 u QurreuirQesrssr ? "' /f 
 3rs3r (tfjGtnp) uir 
 10 .^^ fr 
 
 ev Gnssrssr ? ll erevev/r/s 
 
 <F Q <? IT <5V <8U IT Q SSTGST ? 12 
 
 ( . 13 
 14 Ques. 
 
 Ans. 
 
 [This is a specimen of a kind of riddle very common among Tamiliaus. 
 " The bandy runs why ? 
 
 The brother-in-law claims relationship ichy ?" 
 By means of the ( ^ (jf /rB ' = JM* *^ ,25-) 
 rQ</ras!r 239 1 ) e *''*'' (cgyas/nsir, marriage with whom constitutes 
 ' J (^ him a Lnffffrreir, App. x.).] 
 
 142
 
 "LESSON 68. EXERCISE 67. 
 'WHETHEB," "SOEVER," "ALTHOUGH." 
 
 217-219. 
 
 (6.) J Why do you do this ? 2 He will not give because he has no 
 money. 3 He will not give even a grain of rape seed. 4 Give me a 
 little water, at least. "' You must examine those who claim relation- 
 ship ; for they seem to be deceivers. 6 It rushes on without ceasing. 
 ~' Draw near to the Giver of blessedness. 8 What is all this noise 
 about? <J What matters it whether such people come or go? 10 Please 
 give me the money. 
 
 Lesson 68. 
 
 WHETHER, SOEVER, ALTHOUGH. 
 
 QffrrjjjI&tffjLb QL/,T (75 !!_< Q&frssrGlssrssr* I said so to try whether there 
 was devotion in him or not. 
 
 b. {j)uut$-& : Q&dj&lnoeijzsr lUirQrrir, Censor sdrsfrsyr. 
 Whoever does thus, he is a robber. 
 
 C. _STKlG>S c^S^y/ii .SJJ/LJL/^/nij Qa/STrSsYT^/nU ^(GjLQlT? (100.) 
 
 In any place soever f will a black dog become a white dogj - 
 
 Although it be a small snake you must strike it with a big stick, 
 e. lu^tr ^<siloj (140.) (=let him be whom he may ~ 
 = whosoever. 
 
 218. VOCABULARY. 
 
 PAGARU (60. HI.), speak 
 
 ~feet. 
 
 MALAR, a flower, s*-^*^^ 
 MALAR-KAL, flowery 
 
 9ENNI, a head [Poet.]. 
 MigAi, upon [Poet.]. 
 M^LAI, a corner. 
 
 T gamble (56. II.). 
 , low persons (^^p, 
 184.). 
 
 rr URAI, speak [Poet.]. 
 " NERRI (64.), stiffen, wed. 
 
 Exercise 67. 
 
 219. 
 
 <oT 61J 
 
 urnsv 
 
 63}J LA 
 
 Q&UJJE!. (Observe the order. This is very idiomatic.) 
 
 * The gg is the proper interrogative particle, where doubt is expressed, 46. 
 f- " So-ever " is expressed by an interrogative + gg. 
 
 143
 
 220. EXERCISE 67. LESSON 69. 
 
 CERTAIN NEGATIVE FOEM8. 
 
 QuSSST tglSil^Lb QiJ fTlLlQcF [T<oOJ>\}l QnQGl] ir&Bs 
 UD (3^ IT (Si ) f> S1J SST 
 
 9 " " 10 
 
 i9<stnLpuJrrLarb Q&pgnu QUITO-&. (Observe the con- 
 fusion of subjects. The sheep died, and not the spasm.) 
 
 12 urrjrirQuj rr STSST^IUJJTLCI srsoeorrio? ggturr ! 
 
 Dost thou not see [110, 46.] my sorrow [oO.] all ? Lord ! 
 usfVj (LpssrQssr Q^fliLin'Q^iT ? urrsSQiuesr^Lpssr 
 
 Before (I) speak is it not known ? Before sinful me (185. c.) 
 QJ IT ff ijQ LU IT ? @ ssr sw ti epQK&treuLb ^@)^/ii 
 
 wilt thou not come ? Yet at any time whatever 
 
 the flowery feet (131.) my head upon (251.) wilt thou not place ? (263.) 
 NOTE (1.) In poetry < after ssr is sometimes changed into p. 
 (2.) When LO follows LQ one of them is often elided. 
 (3.) Honorifics are not used in Tamil poetry generally. 
 (6.) 1 Have you seen my elder sister anywhere? 2 I will run away 
 somewhere or other. 3 He is hidden in some corner or other (gesrft^ 
 tj!(i7)-$i(rr/ : 6gr=}ie is having hidden). 4 Whoever teaches well he is a 
 munshi. 5 Whether he be rich or poor a liar will be despised. 6 Can 
 a murderer escape any where ? 7 Can you tell me whether the price 
 is what he says or not ? 8 Although he is a young man he is a great 
 physician. 9 I asked him those questions to try whether he had 
 learnt the lesson or not. 
 
 Lesson 69. 
 
 CERTAIN NEGATIVE FORMS. 
 
 220. In 121 we saw that the negative relative participle ended in 
 ^^, and that the form in ^ was chiefly used in poetry. The nega- 
 tive participial noun ends in ^t,<sgi. Note the following forms : 
 
 a. j g)/5j(o<s eusrrr (LpsarSssr before you came here (<aj.j/r^jjj<s@(iS3r 
 Qssr}^ ai($8{Df;fb<$ or euQ^eu^^t^ is probably better Tamil. 
 
 6. jsrresr ^isiQs Quir<ssiT<5 1 grb(3j (LpssrQ&sr (4th case of neg. part, 
 noun) before I went there. 
 
 c. ^eussr epsBr<3nrD(L]tg$ QffiLiUfr^UL^.^^ <sS^&5)iu< ^ifi&(yesr he 
 wanders about idly doing nothing (very common, but not very elegant). 
 
 $ uuiq-ff Q&'uujtT^uu)- <35rr)L3<i($<$68r I ordered you not to do it. 
 
 [More elegantly $)uui$.& Q&iLiu<&&-L-tT^j
 
 EXERCISE 68. LESSON 70. 221-223. 
 
 REDUPLICATED ADJECTIVES. 
 
 221. VOCABULARY. U & 
 
 LSsroLD a fault. 
 
 <S(KjD regard, thinJc of (56. II.). 
 2/ieZd moisture, ooze, weep (with 
 , (56. I.). 
 
 (3) melt (56. II. 2.0ffi@, act.).> 
 
 , remember (56. III.)? 
 (56. III.) 6ear wi^, /or- ^ 
 
 222. (&.) x ^ .SBisvisu/ru iSl en Lp ILJ IEJ , 3>qr ) ptTU l <stn LP ILJ KJ , 
 <35 &l fb ^j QJJ Si [Sevsvrru iSl <ss) Lp ty LC> , fSBovnuiru 1$ <ss) Lp ILJ IB , ga^l 
 
 ILUTU iSl T> Lp tL] /B , Q^fTLprrU lSlss>LplL]LCiy <or<5\)SVfTU iSl 6V) Lp ILj /i , 
 
 Exercise 68. 
 
 Q> ; IT <55T (fTj> <5 ^ {b (ffj OpSOT'G'iSSr f G> ^ IT <5$T H t {> (&j 
 
 , Q j5 IT GST ji in (ipsjfrG'szsr) (o6u%&)<!E&rrrrrr <su /B ^ rr ir & err . 
 
 f>Lp sisr u LD _633r/_/r(S3)ffO ^gy fSi 'uj IT u Q u sggr s$y)i IEJ 
 
 urrorr. 
 
 (&.) ! Pardon my fault in not thinking of it. 2 He goes about with- 
 out speaking a word. 3 Before the sun set he went to sleep. 4 Before 
 I thought of that I wept. 5 Why does the boy go about learning no 
 lessons ? 6 Should anyone go about doing nothing ? 7 He is a block- 
 head that understands nothing. 
 
 Lesson 70. 
 
 .ADJECTIVE FORMS. 
 223. VOCABULARY. 
 
 very black (&<5$r6$rKi <ss^i <<$) 
 UJ quite alone (<6sr65rjs 
 j &fSuj very little (^(ssrecr^ 
 ci Quifliu very great (Queynosru^ Qu(rFj<s<g'). 
 ^ These and similar forms are in constant use. No rule can be 
 laid down for their formation. Either the ADJECTIVAL FORM is used 
 as .ffiffliu, or the QULUIT IOT&&LO (76.) as 
 
 * POET. IDIOMS. (1) the sign of the 2nd case omitted 
 (2) <s6U6U/r, &c., for 6U6UfT^f ; (3) ^(jjsfrsu/rtu, future for imperative or 
 optative. 
 
 145 19 
 
 ^ L
 
 224, 225. EXERCISE 69. LESSON 71. 
 
 " BEFOEE," " AFTER." 
 
 d. \ ft rota a colour. 
 
 (56. II.) to languish. I QutL a devil. 
 
 b lust. ; Q&&&&&&JSBP red. 
 
 l lust, &c. (151.) u&G$ffu uf^^ green. 
 
 demon. \ Lf^uqjsuj new. 
 
 a butt to be aimed at. @<SO>L_ the waist, middle. 
 
 Exercise 69. 
 224. (&.) 
 
 ^5 (iJ /H S3) STT . 7 Q&&&& & S17 /5 
 
 10 " &68TG8riEl SlfltLJ $)< Sm^ilT^ rnTSa^xfLJ (oLJUJS 
 
 Jet black in hue lust and other diabolical demons unto 
 OssrS5T g)sUc5<s/T# o^su^f Q^sisrQ&sr ? (215.) u 
 Me a butt why hast (thou) left ? Godhead ! 7 
 
 <p<& S/TLQ/T^ (151. e.) jr/r 
 <S/TLOLQ 
 
 (6.) ! The demon's face was jet black, and he had great broad 
 shoulders. 2 She went all alone in the desert. 3 He has a very 
 little dog. 4 A very black cloud hid the sun. 5 Must I languish 
 alone ? 6 The corn is quite green in the fields. " That cow is 
 entirely red. 
 
 Lesson 71. 
 
 BEFORE, AFTER. 
 LS8r. (See Vocabulary, 84.) 
 225. (1.) (Lpsvr before, in place or time; L$esr after, in place or 
 time. 
 
 Both these words, which are in fact nouns, are used in the forma- 
 tion of innumerable compounds of very common and idiomatic use. 
 They require the fourth case or the sixth. 
 For (y:6Br are used also 
 (2.) (LpeerQssr, emphatic ; 
 
 sometimes with ^tu and ^s ; 
 
 146
 
 LESSON 71. EXERCISE 70. 226. 
 
 "BEFOBE," "AFTER." 
 
 (yj6arjr(?to, generally relating to time ; 
 , vulgar; (Lpesrssrir, poetical ; 
 , and (Lpssr^Qev. (y t-rr Zg^J &> f? R> 
 (3.) (Lpssr and iSlssr form compounds thus : (y}ff)<s/r6ViL, LS 
 the before-time and the after-time. Here evr becomes p before s. 
 
 (4.) LSssrGW, LSIesrL], L^esrssrir poetical, i^puir (utr=a state), 
 LSlza-<g)G&j, L5/r?@ (S. Prak), are also used. 
 (5.) iSesrQssr is used for moreover. 
 
 (6.) The verbs (ippgi and LSljsg, (56. II.) are also used for go before 
 and come after; of these the verb. part. (Lp/H and iSlpSjl are idioma- 
 tically employed. ^^Uy 
 
 (7.) (Lpesr and iSlssr are used in composition with many verbs 
 Thus : 
 
 (68.) put before. 
 syj (70.) stand before, protect. 
 (68.) put after. 
 (62.) imitate, follow after. 
 (62.) draw back. 
 
 Exercise 70. 
 
 226. (a.) 1 ^tbnSQeti L/(/}j<s>p,Gisr (ipeisT GSVLQ Q u GMT <? IT $ 
 tSl 63T GSM LB rr & u (136.) 
 
 Qurrasr 
 5 
 
 fiiEi&err srevsv/r^LD GuiTfjtjiEi&Gfr (com.) 
 
 6VT Q <S3T ^cbtftT (cLJfTL- 
 
 (Prov.) 8 Q_p<5sr iSlssr Q-fiiuSlpui^- Q&iiT*! 9 isirssr 
 
 . ll iSl 'esr eu rr IEJ 
 
 13 ^ 
 
 Q & rr en en <sv 
 
 /' l ra 1V u . __,_ (J ^ ,,, _ ,_, _ 
 
 ,.Aw 
 
 H^V^- 
 
 (6.) l The brother went before and the sister came after. 2 Dig ^^. 
 your garden before the rain comes ; for afterwards there will be no 
 time. 3 Afterwards I heard them say so. 4 Compare the context 
 (sentences before and after). 5 1 knew this before. 6 The criminal 
 stood speechless before the judge. 7 There were upright judges both 
 before and after him. 8 Look well both before and behind. 9 Could 
 you not have written the letter before this ? 
 
 l^i- 
 
 <t"J~
 
 227-229. 
 
 LESSON 72. EXEBCISE 71. 
 " AS." 
 
 Lesson 72. ^ ^~-/* 
 
 QUIT}, QUIT} AS. 
 
 J227X)f Qurrgy (56. [in.]) resemble, be like, the root QUIT}, the 
 a. QUIT), the 3rd neut. fut. Qutre^Lz, and the past rel. part. 
 Quiresrp (rarely), are in use, and signify like, as. 
 
 In the higher dialect many other such particles are used. [Conip. 
 Pope's in. GRAM. 109".] M 
 
 (1.) All these govern the 2nd case. . 
 
 (2.) But as in other examples, the nom. may be put for the ace. t-^- 
 (3.) <& may be added : QuirQ), Quir)Qeu, QurrsyjtoLQ. *-* 
 
 (4.) Sometimes QUIT}, QUIT) are added to the subjunctive in 
 c^eu, 95. a. Thus, Q&JjjSir) Quir)=as if one should do. 
 
 They are often added to the verbal noun in ^ : Qffuj&rogiQuiT) 
 (87. )=like the doing. 
 
 (5.) The forms QffiLSfyuQurrQ} and Qffiu<tTuQun'(o)=a8 soon 
 as (you) do or did, are in VERY common use, being pronounced in a 
 very hurried way so as to sound like Q&ujQyLjuQ) and QfiL^iru 
 uQ). They are probably corruptions of Q<?LU!&I<D ^ Quir)=like 
 the way of doing (^ in old Tamil means way, manner). 
 QUIT), which also frequently occurs, is a correct form 
 egj QUIT)) as if (he) would do. 
 228. VOCABULARY. 
 
 f (56. I.) totter, grow feeble. ^jQ^GOLaujiresr costly. (*** ">) ^ 
 
 a bubble. (Lp&gi a pearl. $ ^J 
 
 a bubble on the water \ Jj&^esr /i a gem. 
 
 a jewel (131.). 
 ear a washerman. 
 
 a barber. . ^ 
 yr a potter. 
 
 (56. III.) to beat clothes on 
 a stow, 
 
 (56. II.) to sharpen. 
 
 a hone (<i 
 
 HI.). 
 
 jj^ a potter's stone, 
 manner, fashion. 
 
 su a body 
 Qsifl parrot, 
 [price. 
 
 very valuable 
 r, 56. I., be high.}. 
 
 to ascend, Giuibp which 
 has obtained, u,p obtain, 56. 
 (II.)). 
 
 costliness. //S// 
 
 229. (a.) 
 (&) before u into 
 
 p 
 
 .-^5^ f~ - - . 
 
 (QeiflenujuGuirev). 3 
 
 Exercise 71. 
 
 ii i3errsrr < errir rs p n <b QUIT) 
 - -'- rir @)(7rjrB&iL[> rsiresrfr 
 "-- Si&fl Quire* 
 u QUIT 
 
 A.**- 
 
 **b 
 
 ^7 
 
 148
 
 ^Lst^ 
 
 ^g_j y^ /_ 
 
 SL-V .-Y 
 
 EXEECISE 71. LESSON 73. 
 
 " COXCEBNING," " ABOCT." / . s <^_ 
 
 229, 230. 
 
 u & uj gj Quires Qptrssr 
 (for 
 
 N^ "X 
 
 ft; 
 
 . 
 
 <F rr L &) & & tr frir 
 
 6\)(fa)u (o u rr e\) 6ij LD } jDJLn 
 
 (oUfTSVeiJLDj (SjlLlSlJSSr t3/^.<55&0SOL/ (o LJ/TSX) a/LO, 
 
 Lc>rr!s;lrflujrr&<F Q&iiigj] Q&rretssr eu^^/r/r<5Bsrr. 
 su^Q^Qfrerr Lb/5$ifi srizpp Qp&p 
 
 l Q 6V) L U U ,] il & 61] Lb .jy/f?^/. 9 =gy <Z sf) S3) (U LJ 
 
 <5T (L> ; ^JjJ LJ 
 
 (&.) x Is there anyone like him ? 2 As you sent me, so I will send 
 him. 3 Iu colour it is like saffron, in shape like the moon. 4 It 
 would be hard to find a man as sensible as the shop-keeper is. 5 In 
 fashion that garment is like the mother's. 6 Don't think of him as 
 of others. 7 Suddenly the messengers came to fetch him. 8 Is a 
 black rock equal in value to a precious stone ? 9 Are there any 
 counsellors as valuable as these ? 10 Youth is like a bubble on the 
 water. n It would be very hard to find a friend as faithful as he is. 
 12 So in this case also you may judge. 
 
 Lesson 73. ' 
 
 230'.7@^jo is the adverb, part, of @/$ (56. IH.) poy 
 sign=having pointed out ';\(-irQ$ is the adverb, part, of ilforfl lay hold 
 of (56. H.) = fam'w<jr laid hold of'-^Q^tnL is the adverb, part, of 
 Q<&n [56. (II.)] touch=having touched. __ *^- ,/ 
 
 These are.used for concerning, regarding, about, touching. (&jn5l<s>gi 
 is correct and elegant ; uprfil is correct, but not elegant ; the use of 
 D appears to be a mere foreign idiom.' ^4/^ 
 
 <ke spoke about/that affair. 
 
 , 68, 263.) is used in the 
 
 In very comrnon 
 same way : 
 
 ^>]<5:5 g)/l G)QJ@ un-^UL-Qi-eer I suffered much from Jhat 
 sy Qufleo or Quujffl6yx(fth case of G>urr or Quiufr name^about 
 / 9(5 e3^^ieu(T^ef^ ^ffiriuir Qufleo 90 i^jrup^Lz usx 
 
 A learned man about the king a work &-3 com- 
 
 - 
 
 posed. 
 
 1
 
 
 
 231, 232. 
 
 LESSON 73. EXERCISE 72. 
 
 " CONCERNING," " ABOUT." 
 
 part, of Qpn-&(3j look at (56. H.) = having looked at. 
 r i ufrfr^^i verb. part, of UK IT, see (56. ~LLL.')= having seen. (So fc v-*r-f (. 
 ' These are used as equivalent to to in such sentences as, he said 
 thus TO him, ^4***^- ~^ -=- tf4 r -A*>v*--fe-vA . 
 
 cgys^Sssr Qptr&Q ^uu^L<f Q&[r<o3r$oG)6vr. (This is rather stiff.) 
 
 .jj/suSsoru U[TIT,S^! ^uuis^<f Q & IT &sr @)63r . (This is colloquial.) 
 
 ^sueafli^^exj $uui$.& QffrreBrtGGjssr. (This is better than either of 
 the preceding.) 
 
 <*>]jggiL-(o6Gr @uuif & Qffreyr^sar (This is not very good, but 
 common.) /L-<--~-/^-_^_-*-- 
 
 i^" The -verbal participles are often elegantly and idiomatically 
 used in Tamil for particles. This requires much attention. Comp. 
 77. 
 
 231. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Stuirflffi (Pers.) recommendation. ^^sro/i disgrace (63^ -(-SOLO, 
 ^L_OT a fool. 184). 
 
 a hindrance ((Gjfc^s -SBSTLD weight. 
 also used). ^ . sssr adj., much. 
 
 & LD cause. ( &**^*~ fe*^? / j .RuzLoir idle, without reason. 
 
 Ljff-,part. uniL &<= on account j & <s8iu IT GSSTLZ a wedding. 
 
 of. \ Qeusssr (56. II.) desire, seek for. 
 
 (Here 
 
 (outriLi 
 
 ^] might be used.) 6 & e vu rr em p <sm p & 
 
 7 ^y 611 6J & (o <35 fT & JT LD ^ $ & 
 
 UL-d>tGsr (^&ffic> is used here for (35 
 
 suevSso ; g>)(/5 
 
 10 
 
 < 6\) 6$ 6V) LU U 
 
 UL-QlGST. 
 
 eujr 
 
 1 
 
 <L^
 
 '^^0^-5 
 
 4V 
 
 ^> i^<4~~ to n >- 
 *jlilk'. f fr/r 
 
 l^/r f~^ f =: f-aj^t^^-f Cp*^ 
 
 EXERCISE 72. LESSON 74. 
 
 THE FIRST, OB NOMINATIVE CASE. 
 
 233, 234. 
 
 (6.) 1 1 have inquired concerning it. 2 He talked about the affairs of 
 the village a long time. 3 I told you before all about it. 4 What will 
 you talk about to the mother ? 5 It is said concerning this in the 
 3rd chapter. 6 He has some end in view in coming to you. 7 What 
 are the villagers saying about the matter ? 8 He addressed the king 
 and his counsellors concerning the affairs of the country. 9 He has 
 composed a poem about the king. 10 The man is very much troubled 
 about the means of subsistence. n The teacher said to him, learn 
 this lesson carefully. 
 
 Lesson 74. 
 
 / 
 
 233. Examples illustrating the idiomatic use of the 1st case. 
 [Comp. Lesson 48.] 
 
 ~ ELLIPSIS IS THE KEY TO ALMOST EVERY TAMIL IDIOM. ^ 
 
 The first case often stands for the other cases (50.). /'^-^ 
 
 (1.) uLLt_i533rC l Lo (193.) QufT^sisr he went to the town (1st for 4th J. 
 
 (2.) ^(^LoLS ^fiuesr U-LC> Qutr go to him again (1st for 7th : IL 
 
 there was a king called Su-dari^ana (good-aspect). (An example of 
 apposition.) ij'tu* I*JL-^ ~fy~^ a~-o~-i^~*- *f- ^-i^a^^-^^ r~^f ^ 
 (4.) -s/rSsuU-jLo LQ/rSoUiLji-b n}[Tv&r(3) QSHS;LCI G^JSRSJ ^^^SSSTIT 
 agfr ^^<si^ L /J3.(127.) UjgQff (nom. for 7th and 2nd) f^ose Brdhmans 
 who do not recite the four Vedas in the morning and in the evening ar< 
 
 (5.) <>IQ! (50.) &GGGT 685)1 Ld &J5&IUJ dt_p&(3jLD ^j,<5& (136.) <&J15J<l 
 
 1$ ssr (trj &sr with weeping eyes he stood, snivelling and confounded. /r^-f^^ 
 [Here ^& with the nom. case is used for the 3rd case in |g, or there is an 
 ellipsis of a.sfrsrrfiKS3T (133, 184.) after the nom.] 
 
 (6.) sprtTjjSfrefr gB(J5 LSffiTLasycrssr QoLlLjLeu ^JQ^SHQ^LC w eu n 'LJ t-jfDLQ 
 eStsisff (168.) <ff r JTULSLL/_/r*<5<5Tr one day in a Brahman's house they both 
 ate tiU their ribs were well lined. 
 "used adverbially.] 
 
 is 6th case; /srr&r is 
 they lived pros- 
 
 (7.) ^>j(ojssrBtrsrr[ruj < 
 perously for many days. 
 
 [Here there is an ellipsis of <S6TT. C 
 234. VOCABULARY. 
 
 a foreign country 
 s ^^m,) "***- -h-a^-Ta^^^- 
 (56. IL.^stumble, trip. 
 Q/srrsssru?- lame. 
 LJS&& moisture. 
 
 (Qsjjisrr white) a 
 well-picked bone. 
 Qsernay (56. II.) snatch at:
 
 ""/ Az -~~v 
 
 235-237. 
 
 EXEECISE 73. LESSON 75. 
 THE SECOND, OR OBJECTIVE CASE. 
 
 Exercise 73. 
 
 235. * QjB &^rji>jjnJ QurT<s$)<s5r ; 
 [106. (2.)] gp(/5 /5/rgrr ^yts^ <sr(fJj&i s/reo 
 
 . [123. a.] ' 2 ^IT&LD sr(Blj&i< pem&drir 
 a&u (oLJ/T(S3)S37\ 3 fsmij usn& Jj) sv so /r^ QeufffrQerrGpiiA 
 
 .gjLCi [100.] u& $Bn~ir 
 
 . 4 ^ ff <f Qfj ti^ Q IB (ft) U LJ LD 
 
 is re- 
 
 #60 
 
 dundant). 
 
 urnr^j 
 
 (L//r<ay0i 
 
 LJ68T. 
 
 Lesson 75, ^ 
 
 236. Examples illustrating the idiomatic use- of the 2nd case. 
 
 ( IB-) 
 
 (1.) ^GwSszsr QLamLioini <g>j t$- & * j sir he shaved him bare. 
 
 (2.) 9SL0s>iruQufrujf Q<fir^^[rssr he went to the tovm. (For eci(5<ffi@ 
 (50.)) 
 
 (3.) ^sro^u ux&fTtsiQsasrj!)} ^^uj/rLosS^^/rOTr he did not know 
 that it was mere pretence (it, that it was). 
 
 (4.) a.ujflJSSsssr srsjr^p uasafl^ero/T^ Qfrresr^fr ; 
 Lfl^sroajsSsrr* Qcy/rciJrig)^ Ae caZZed we% "AigrA caste" ; and other 
 things "low caste." [The technical words for the grammatical division 
 of nouns into (1) those which indicate rational beings: 
 (2) irrational beings : ^fiZessr (29.).] 
 
 [The sign of the 2nd case in Tamil is gg. In MalyiiHnriY in Telngu it is NU 
 or NI, "v^^ ^t^ 1 ""1 nnffiy in prnVinViiy-v ; Jn ancient Kanarese it is AM ; in 
 modern Kanarese A or AXXU; and in all the languages of the Indo-European 
 family M or x is, for the most part, found in the accusative. 
 
 The origin of the Tamil suffix gg seems to be this : the nasal was dropt (the 
 Tamil people often pronounce wa/sar AVE'), and final w (retained in Kan. and 
 
 lengthened into E in Mai.) became gg (as 
 IA.U.). Comp. Bopp. 149.] / 
 
 237. VOCABULARY. /g 
 Uff-Lpra Qeasrjpi an old^well. <-//np ! 
 
 (allied to uenrtuj') forsaken, 
 
 decayed. u/ri-e + jj/iii + SJeOTjj,' ; 
 
 and ^ elided. 
 
 Qjstrsssr (56. HI.) be lame. 
 QiL (56. IJ.) draw near. 
 
 is the Tamil for the Kanarese 
 
 baldness. 
 
 jytf make bald (strike 
 bald, lit.). 
 
 9 an axe. 
 
 crookednt 
 
 152
 
 EXERCISE 74. LESSON 76. 238, 239. 
 
 THE THIRD CASE. 
 
 NOTE ON SECOND CASE. 
 [Comp. III. Gram. 58 ; Nannul, 296.] 
 The Nannul Sutram runs thus : " Of the 2nd case the increment is go aloneT 
 Its meaning is (that the noun which receives it is the object of a word denoting) 
 making, destroying, obtaining, removing, comparing, possession, &c." Examples : 
 1- <su^osr^s;[rssr he fashioned. 
 
 2. 2_6G)i<<5rr8r he broke. 
 
 3. Q&irjs.sn'esr he approached, 
 a vessel. ") 4. ^Lp^^fresr he lost. 
 
 5- 6,<gi[Tsr he resembled. 
 6. S-STOiUJ/rsiJr he was owner of. 
 The Tamil term for the direct object is (olffUJLJU (o)LJ[r(iR<txr = the thing 
 which is done. [III. Gram. 129*.] 
 
 A verb may have two accusatives : LJcfffsQSssrLJ LJfrJjgUiS ^g-g> & <y> n <o8f Jie~ 
 milked the cow ; ^S/fliL/SioorLJ QLJ/rr/sSR^- "5Sf@5^s>S/(<SJ5iS3r he asked the professor 
 the meaning. 
 
 It is the case of the nearer object : <M$jl66)UJ<<5 QsfrfL&M worship the FIEST. 
 
 Exercise 74. 
 
 15 ^ 
 
 . (Two accusatives.) 
 
 Lesson 76. 
 EXAMPLES OF THE THIRD CASE. 
 
 239. The particles connected with the regular terminations of 
 the 3rd case are : 
 
 153 20 
 

 
 L*6 
 
 239. LESSON 76. 
 
 THE THIBD CASE. 
 
 &.L SOT = tog ether with; QatrsssrtSt^by meoms o/ 
 (1.) 
 
 You one one a whole melon with 
 
 Qurreu, 
 
 like, deceit to make to right 
 
 (is) opposed thus he reproved. 
 
 (2.) ^GUSK @&ltr,g!il($&j &u? 
 OT^^] awiF^/rsfr sAe rcm wi^/i ^asfe a/id brought the nee in the leaf. 
 
 (3.) OTdrq^j^Sscr OT2OT-(3 > .@(?i_ &-i<p Qfrrss QeuzscrGlLQ, gguj.r/ 
 w husband ! 
 
 (4.) ufrQeofr Q^szer <s6v^^(f^sSro^i there is honey mixed with 
 milk. 
 
 (5.) jy/^u LSvofrSsrrsaxu Lo/r/rG ) i_/Ti_Ss3sr^jj (tp^^m QsirfSl^fiTssr he 
 embraced the child and kissed it. 
 
 (6.) ^fiuSssr ^!$($ujm-i5&LaiT<& G&iLQs Q'SrrefT^isisetr hear him 
 from the beginning to the end. 
 
 (7.) dtsS(iT)Guira&r ep($jr ^uLo/raS^aSff) uu^uun-eo since these two 
 are both of one shape. [LJ^L + ^SU (often Written 
 <gv)(20o) = by the step that, since.! 
 
 (8.) STssrQuffem&Js ^str 
 (?L_e3T <oTsisr(y3r he coughed when I told him not. Therefore, I stabbed 
 him. 
 
 (9.) Qgcargzsreo/rG'gu Q^^sroauu u/r/r^ptfQs/rsRjr rfjesrty&r she 
 stood looking o ut of the window. 
 
 (10.) ^jsuesr euiriu&Q&ir&j'&svs Q&rrs&rQi $)6<<g ^f&jbQpsisr his 
 mouth-word by means of indeed this I have known. 
 
 (11.) ^irsOTLossrG'iajSsu</rrfl fSsarLjige^QtGS) Qfrresr^etr the 
 palace servant-maid told her husband. 
 
 NOTE ON THIBD CASE. 
 
 There are several significant particles which are used as signs (so to speak) 
 of the 3rd case, besides Qsirsssr ( 56. = having taken) and Q_ i_esr = together : 
 apf>OLQ[rtLi = by means of, juQ^^Ld == salce. ^suir ptpsvLo/niJL 
 Q;TSBjr(oL_6sr I obtained it by his means ; T&sr<safiLl,5<LD (OTSCT, 
 $LJULO_& QfiJu do so, for my sake. 
 
 Of these a.t_8T, which is evidently a cognate form of gg } gg, is classical. 
 Thus, 
 
 (1.) L9&RjftQuJ/r ^tpUL/ii <SUQ^LD together with disease old age will come. 
 
 (2.) LD^r^Q^rr smrdjos^Ld G*u^@)6u if you speak truth from your heart. 
 
 (3.) QurresrQ^rT ^^iisrouiJ Qu!rsS(t^sQ(yffs<3<r a./iG'i^/r ta^ 
 p<SU!T<SB<Sfr others when compared with you are like iron when compared with gold. 
 
 164
 
 EXEECISE 75. 
 THE THIBD CASE. 
 
 241. 
 
 (4.) tS/reu/reu (LpiLo lameness of foot. 
 [Comp. III. Gram. 59 ; Nannul, Sut. 297.] 
 
 It is necessary to observe that a Tamilian would not always use this case 
 where we use by and idth. Thus, He did it with difficulty : 
 Q&iL-stmsr is not quite so good as 
 
 f^^u, ^.i^^j/^v/^ ^pjpv viyiuwix \Lfiuf-J5 3> g$ suQE^tgiJD. With, in adverbial 
 phrases, often requires a peculiar idiom: With much pleasure-- 
 
 6 " <E05r ^^srftsu, .ji/iff'aieroLpaQeu* s-sgiSlsBrrr) ^eu'2io(r<se{r QU/T&J, 
 In gross darkness [and] in thick rain, croaking frogs like 
 
 F &[T,iijr<<rr6\j ^rrssLD ^L-ifr&j (163.) 
 
 k j itself which does not understand by means of science, disputations if you 
 engage in, that which will result (is) what ? 
 
 r (?<su/r 6U/5^ /f/r urrev ^LKKLCI, ^u<sv<otiiTgjj i IT rr ILJ p /s 
 
 10 / f 
 
 /s/resr 
 
 STIE) & GIT IT < 
 
 a poet, form, 270. (5.) 
 
 155
 
 . ^J^* - Lesson 77. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF THE FOURTH, OR DATIVE CASE. 
 242. The particles connected with the 4th case are : 
 (I.) ^s=for (vulg.) ; (II.) OTsarjy, 82. (@<aj < 22/<Qs<Jr c 
 
 cr I gave saying to him) ; (III.) ^ofl^^ui/r^, gpeuuk/F=s/0r the 
 sake of, 157. f ' , ^n<^^(T) 
 
 (1.) uj/rSswffi^LQ L//rs5T<S(^ii ffiflujfriLu (3un-u3ir>/J> (Gu/r^*) <^e 
 elephant and the pot are equivalent (in the account) : Put one against 
 oth 
 
 (2.) 
 
 the other. ^ _ c n L/V_ 
 
 UA?- 
 
 To me twenty cows there are. 
 This is the Latin idiom : a dative with the verb to be=have. 
 Comp. 43. 
 
 (3.) open _ 
 three(personsjcame and disputed about it, each claiming it. ^ _, ^^ 
 
 (4.) ^(Tj^, 9(5<5/r<flfffi(g U?OT eurrKiS oup^ eaxsij&pn-err a certain 
 woman FOR a cash bought some fish, and ^trtnging^ it kept ti^in. the 
 house). 
 
 (5.) 
 alighted a kdfamfrom that town. 
 
 (6.) a-isar^/ruj/risro/ru-jii) &-<ser<5&uutV)<as)tTU-\LC! 
 ^^/i)p (your mother and your father I having seen, a long day has 
 elapsed) it is a long timesince_I saw your father and mother. 
 
 (You to them I asliaving said to say which must 
 
 as it follows.) You must tell them from me that, &c. 
 
 (8.) Qu(ffj&(&) g^a/ Q<a;/r0 .QjF/iL^ fr Q<ssfr>s<s Q& ^^^. . 
 
 To each one one A vessel of water to give he commande<L_^- r J- / 
 
 V' where is my child Y to the asking, *' 
 
 ^(g ij <-f) *- & ft) ^ -^ ^4_v ' L .^ 
 here,'' they said. 
 (10.) 
 
 He which had grasped the wealth to the scholar having taken, 
 
 he gave, and to the thief according to the law punishment ' he awarded. 
 (11.). eS'LL<ffi(S><s?r(2 > rr ^(^s&(ryer he is within the house. 
 
 156 
 

 
 > ; 
 
 ' 
 
 j I iU 
 
 LESSON 77. EXERCISE 76. 
 THE FOUBTH CASE. 
 
 243, 244. 
 
 jre<r a sow 
 
 [Here ^ is the sign of the 4th case, to which is added S-sfrCW, a sign of the 
 7th. This accumulation of inflexional particles is frequent in Tamil, and in the 
 other 8. Ind. dialects. 
 
 Thus, IN-TO, WITH-IN, &c., combine two prepositions.] 
 
 who imparts present and future bliss. 
 243. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Qurre$ (64.) feed, nourish. 
 
 time in music, 
 agree with (56. III.), 
 
 s-jfl 
 
 whence s_rft<s5>L> 
 
 possesson. 
 
 err, 
 
 belongs 
 
 whom or which (it) 
 (governing a dative of the 
 thing possessed). 
 
 a leguminous plant. 
 jLmKUU peas, ^tsasia UQEUL^ 
 (131. c.). 
 
 c^^9^ 
 
 to a 
 
 r 
 
 step, 
 often 
 
 (one time to a step). The latter 
 is vulg. 
 
 244. i <p 
 
 ti 6>j rr IEJ Si <s , 
 
 <oT <oST <35 (tt <5B (o<3SfTUU^ eUfSjSga S_S3T<5B(g 
 
 L ? (for 4th). 
 
 iurrQprr(fij 
 
 10 
 
 elegantly for 
 
 12 
 
 Q 
 
 u rr c ^J & 
 
 15 
 
 !Ti5ST(t)l3>(ffjLb Q U ifi ILJ <3F 6S3T <oft L_ 
 
 19 ()^/r<F/r
 
 245, 246. ~ LESSON 78. 
 
 -** THE FIFTH CASE. 
 
 Lesson 78. 
 EXAMPLES OF THE FIFTH CASE. 
 
 245. (1.) {?5&; f&Qeo Lj/r^uS^Coev & IT 
 
 OF that water wUh the half (my) feet well 
 
 I washed. [106. (4.)] 
 
 ll6S(Tij!S& 0j/5j(^<seTfl6u geeorjjj owe OF &e monkeys that were in it. 
 (2.) uirjglffiQffjr)) ^aSjSB/ti S.SST sireSQe 
 
 (Half the mud even joiir fpgt FEOM has not 
 Yo?* Aave wof ^aZ/ cleaned your feet of the mud. 
 (3.) )Qja3(Tfj<ajrr<6rfl(oei> e.jr i_/0Gi^s3r UJ/T 
 * O/ ^ese <wo [is] % husband which ? '/ 
 
 Comp. <5>--<Sl}(TT)Qp ^6U0LJUJ3)/rU LJ/Tfi^jn ^) STULJi^l. 6T GIT (1$ SST 
 
 he asked some of those who came with him how it was. 
 
 (4.) jDB>a/rfK?6U OTsro^uGuff-eu ^^.sSsijr.iDffljgOT s_<5jLasvr of these 
 the best is he who resembles which ? 
 
 (5.)f auJe3T(Lp(sro/DUJ/r ^enjrsvirs&r es)<3stiSlsS(i^^^i /j3/r/iutp(i 
 
 {In order each one's from the hand the mango-fruit Q-7 
 
 which came the way is plain.) [7] have found out m ordw ilie way in 
 ivhich the mano-fruit assedfrom hand to hand. 
 
 (6.) c gy/a5)(5 / .jj tutrffnea^ euQ^QroQufr &.<sssn-ir ? is anyone coming 
 from that place ? (<>\tv@ that place, used as a noun, and @(5/?^? used 
 as the sign of 5th case.) 
 
 (7.) <s6ira9uQLJfr(/56Yfijy;(g5 Qff&jeuuQu.TQ^sifl&^isi (@G)rDu&60JtTg5 
 <sjj/f<sefr those who abound in the wealth of learning, and in the wealth, 
 of earthly good. 
 
 (8.) sr 
 
 [Here the sign of the 7th case is put between ^ie root and the sign of the 
 5th case. Lit. = haviny been in the place of me.'] 
 
 (9.) 
 
 <5uj5<treor the owner of the tree hearing the noise came running from his 
 house, scolding all the way. The thief hearing him came down from the 
 tree. [Obs. the uses of <ifS.~\ 
 
 246. VOCABULARY. 
 
 for Q&LB<5LaujniL (<3^iriii(-3j a monkey. 
 
 SLO (S. HITA+AHITA, pro- 
 per and improper) good and 
 evil, right and wrong. 
 Jo a livelihood, 
 suitably (infinitive). *7 & 
 
 rightly, well. 
 
 ffesr (LpeD (a/jreu the coming, 
 (Lpsro/r) order) in order. 
 
 $ (56. HI.) deliver up to. 
 
 s charge, care. 
 
 :
 
 EXERCISE 77. LESSON 79. 
 THE SIXTH CASE. 
 
 & (<3ffj<35 (3j IS GST <S&> LQ Q <EF ILJ U J SV IT LD 
 
 ^FSI/SSTLQ 
 <&tbr)j.5Gti 
 
 Lesson 79. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF THE SIXTH CASE : THE GENITIVE OR POSSESSIVE 
 CASE. 
 
 248. Comp. III. Gram. 62. Summary. What may be called the 
 genitive relation is expressed in Tamil by f tnu~*^*-^ ^_*_^',j2! 
 
 (i.) Composition: <tr iLisS.^^L- <Q<g fl~6uv_ _Here the inffexional 
 base is the genitive form.// ? /y 
 
 (ii.) The use of $j)<oirr (or jyar), a particle signifying connection : 
 Qftr&JsSesr lifpjLQ. 
 
 (iii.) The inflexional particle .jy,^. [In high Tamil ^^ is used, 
 and <j!/ when the governing noun is plural.] 
 
 (iv.) The significant particle 2.sro/_ujy^n31the dative + a. fliu. 
 
 All these are classical. Thus in Kamban's Eamayanam we have 
 ^LniSlssr LQ/rjfl a shower of arrows, ^SSUIL/CTOL.* &s&tjgpLz the torrent 
 of monkeys of firm array (S.D/_UJ is not found) ; ufrib&ieo the 
 sea of milk. We have too, =^/osJr S-JTJL/ ^e sigfw o/ the 6th (case). 
 Another poetical form is ^jrg9^ggr @uii <^e race of the sun ( 108). 
 
 (1.) ^3r sFil^ Q^iTtLi^^ GUL$iUiT& eu^^iTssr he came by the 
 way of his house-garden. 
 
 i^" eSiL, Q^ITL.!^^. Ellipses of the casal sign, the nouns 
 sS and Gy/rtli-ti) being prepared for its reception according to 18. 
 This has been termed the " oblique case," or the oblique form of the 
 6th case. This is a very common, and at the same time elegant, form. 
 Comp. 131. 
 
 fSsuuzsr a.^^js^eusu/riueu / GUSTS &-u.rr^i you must not come 
 without (your) father's consent. Here also there is an ellipsis of the 
 sign.. Comp. 50.
 
 248. 
 
 LESSON 79. 
 THE SIXTH CASE. 
 
 (2.) Qurrsorissfissr @t_iL ^.os>L^f(rp Quiresr 
 <gji_fi &_es)i!5<<&rr&} srsar ^@ii> ? When the vessel of gold is broken 
 it is gold ; when the vessel of earth is broken what is it ? 
 
 [g)sar used for the sign of the 6th case, 18. 
 would be better " a vessel made of gold.'" 130.] 
 
 (3.) iLifrjr^i <orsxJr0>3T (for njiTQ^ss)i ujjg jer iurnri)J~who8ei8 it? 
 
 [The form uj/nrjiJ ^ s poetical, \5ji being a term, of the 6th case in the higher 
 dialect] 
 
 (4.) rLa(Lp>L- (for /SLO(Lpsa)L-iu) our. [VTTLGAB.] 
 
 (5.) Losr^^-sssfrrresr the owner of the tree, ^L-Qssmrssr the house- 
 holder* Gomp. l#r [Loiru> + /nr- the particle ^jisgi being 
 
 inserted. 18.] 
 
 (6.) -sear LoSsorju /rSsir prriLi 
 
 Qu^fS Queo^ U^IT the blockhead who sends his wife to her mother's 
 house and does not afterwards support her is chaff. 
 
 (7.) sS^^jfflj/TeJr &jbfD ( 70.) .seuaS, 190. 
 The scholar's learning. 
 Lit. " the learning which the scholar has learnt." 
 
 It is very elegant and idiomatic in cases like this to use an 
 adjective participle instead of the 6th case. 
 
 (8.) ^SL/jerjs^ffluj ^sssr&JL-ffessr isis err her qualities and excellences. 
 
 ^ a.ffluj added on to the dative is often used for the English 
 possessive case. 
 
 (9.) rs&&i_6$6D Sjeaff jSuiS Louj/sSssr Lafr&^u9 a pilot bewildered, 
 who has lost his course, in the middle OP the sea [=in mid-ocean]. 
 
 NOTE ON SIXTH CASE. 
 
 1. The genitive of quality (e.g. a boy OF great beauty) must be expressed by the 
 aid of a_efr<srr, 133. Thus, ^$<& ^^(^fjff&r emuiLiser. 
 
 2. The distributh-e genitive requires the dative with a_gfr or the 5th case: 
 thus, he sent four OF his friends <gssr &Qf5Q<5$&} pirsyi QuiLHSB)ff 
 
 /r ; the elephant, is the largest OF animals 
 
 3. The objective genitive requires a periphrasis generally. Much unintelligible 
 Tamil has been expended in trying to put such constructions literally. Thus, 
 the love of knowledge must be ^nSsij QeussaLa srssrQnr) ^GE/ff and not by 
 any means ^ r$ sSl svr ^JSSTLJ ! Qun~(Tl)rrTes)& is covetousness. Many specific 
 compounds like this exist. He is eagerly desirous OF honour 
 
 4. For the determinative of in " the great city of Benares," see 
 
 sresr jp LO QuiflujiE<!rLG or sfr^Lorr/ssiTLCi. 
 
 5. Europeans use the genitive with g)^ too much. I have heard the fear of 
 punishment put into ^aJ5T!_s5ru9fiJr LJUJLO ; it should be ^sssri_^ssf SIJ<TKL^ 
 
 lUJiii. Thus, he is tormented toith the fear of punishment= ssssri 
 
 160
 
 LESSON 79. 
 THE SIXTH CASE. 
 
 248. 
 
 Tamil grammarians tell us that the form of the 6th case differs according to 
 the class ( >39) of the governing noun. If this is a noun of the s^iuir^l^ossr 
 (a personal noun), (1) the governed word, or its inflexional base must be simply 
 prefixed, or (2) the word 2_ss>z_UJ ( 185) must be used to connect the govern- 
 ing and the governed words, or (3) the 4th case must be used. 
 Thus, .jya/sar <g<3SLJU63r Ms father. 
 
 JT-fSsr the king of the country. 
 
 SssraS) his wife. 
 
 LO<3>S3r his son. ["Thus pater mihi.~\ 
 If, however, the governing noun is = gi;o oifISs3<jr (impersonal) the governed noun 
 takes the case-ending ^j^i (sometimes in old poetry ^ jj) or ^ j the former 
 when the governing noun is singular (ggsar/ossrL/rreu), and the latter when it is 
 plural. These are the only classical forms. 
 
 Thus, OTS5TJ5J <SO<fE my hand. 
 
 OT65T 66)&<95T my hands. 
 
 A comparison of this with 184 will show that here the /' genitive case '/ is 
 really a derivative noun in apposition to 6S)<S and 6o<s>cS;<oTr. Tsrjgi = that thing 
 ivhich is mine, STGZST = those things which are mine. 
 
 There is not, strictly speaking, any^genitive_case in Tamil^_ ( ^~-/ 
 The following table from the commentary~onthe Nannul illustrates fne native 
 idea of the use of the 6th case. The meaning conveyed by it is called 
 QurTQ^&T, where SL^&SILO is equivalent to a-fflsoui property, 
 connection, or GlfftT fc<s>Ln that which is one's own. 
 
 &L<S8)LC> PROPERTY. 
 
 I. 
 
 II. 
 
 intrinsic property. 
 
 1- usssr\-\ connected with quality. 
 Ex. i 6\) <5j &> ^ egy<3>6Uii) the 
 
 breadth of the land. 
 
 2. &_jr)]LJi_i connected with members. 
 Ex. ^ir^ssrja <saibr the king's 
 eye. 
 
 <gj_L_i_/i, combination of many 
 individuals of one species. 
 Ex. Qjs ev sS S5TJ2 @LJ6OLJ a 
 heap of paddy. 
 
 4. (Jeujj/L/eu <ff-4!-UJ ueosSlesr FFtL. 
 
 i_Ld, combination of many of 
 different species. 
 Ex. s&aoiB&eargi <5^LLt_ti a?. 
 
 assemblage of (various) beasts. 
 
 5. ^ifliSssr ^<ffi<SLc, transformation, j 
 
 Ex. Q^gugSasr^j Qufrfl 
 parched grains of paddy. 
 
 161 
 
 extrinsic property. 
 [Gen. auctoris v. possessoris.] 
 
 1. G)LJ/r0isfr, possession 
 
 Ex. 
 bow. 
 
 2. j)_ii, place. 
 
 Ex. 
 
 the Icing's garden. 
 
 time. 
 Ex. 
 
 the life-time of the son. 
 
 Sattan's 
 
 21
 
 249-251. EXERCISE 78. LESSON 80. 
 
 THE SEVENTH CASE. 
 
 249. VOCABULARY. 
 STsyjLbLj bone. i su/nu^cs/reu a watercourse. 
 
 vators. 
 
 a Reddy, a caste of culti- 
 
 a disciple. 
 
 an obstinate fellow. 
 
 Exercise 78. 
 
 250. 1 pssts 
 
 arrflujihj Q^/UUJ/TLDSO ^)n/r (o^QSlpG'npQuj Quif) 
 
 f/S6 
 
 (2<6rrrrp spssr. ' p IT lii su IT fr p on p 
 
 Lesson 80. , x ^ ^ ; - 
 
 EXAMPLES OP THE SEVENTH, OE LOCATIVE-ABLATIVE CASE. 
 
 251. .su, ^i-^^eu, are the chief signs! but (in the higher 
 dialect/ there are upwards of 20 particles denoting place or position 
 that may occupy the place of g)eu. Among these are Guseu above, 
 below, u/ffjii side, a. err within, (tpsar before, iSsar after, ^ILS place 
 
 , mayalsoj^e used. JQ /^/^ ^ 
 
 tgr Some"of "TEese^particles are prefixe* to verbs to form com- 
 pounds, which are in constant and familiar use. (Comp. 225. (7.)) 
 Thus: 
 
 (cLDJjQ^frsTTjgfj [(?iflu+Q/rri5, 56. (HI.)] overcome (obtain the 
 higher place). 
 
 [0ip+L/if, 56.] submit (sink to the lower place). 
 
 , 64.] ewfer in. 
 [(Lpszr-f- @, 68.] put before (give the priority). 
 
 j/r/Bgj, 62.] draw &acfc (take the place behind). 
 , 56. (II.)] sef o?*< (experience the outer place). 
 
 is inserted instead of the sign of the 6th 
 the river's bank. [Pope's III. Gram. 
 
 162
 
 LESSON 80. 251. 
 
 THE SEVENTH CASE. 
 
 ^sar, meaning place, is also used in books. These are all essentially 
 nouns and remain so, however compounded. (Pope's III. Gram. 
 63.] 
 
 (1.) ..gyjiJeu &GmL- urrtixsTOLj OT6usu/T/i iS i$- <& <g gi it caught all the 
 snakes that were found in it. 
 
 (2.) L//rjDffl9(o6u pirevrruQrrLci <su ff IT s^esr & Q<Bsrr^^rreyr he gave 
 4,000 pagodas in common. 
 
 (3.) )j3r eroo5i6u Q&K^ ( 3 1 ssr(this man's hand in I gave) 
 
 <^ssr(y6sr he immediately to the Muhammadan going, " I give," said he. 
 
 [(g of the 4th case added to ^f^^eu.] 
 
 (5.) j^rSfSU Qusm6Ssr(^Sl&} Q&<3rjp] (2 u 3 $SO)63r . 
 He approached the woman and spoke. 
 
 (Of the village near alone in the coming.) 
 
 When he was coming near the village alone. 
 
 Stroke on stroke if you strike even the grinding stone will be 
 (ffjii. (/5<(2)> 60. I., be moved.) 
 moved. 
 
 (8.) suiy.ujn'iLi ^jQ^&Slp i^n^irstfl L/^^^rreS =f$(CB)jy/ti> ^suesr epQf) 
 QurrgiLci @jj)rrn~<g : n'<5Li<sssr<oi D0<f5<56u ^str^ a deceitful minister, though 
 he be clever, must not be near a king. 
 
 (9.) .-gyojsBT <s/rg$6u sB^^Q^^ I fell AT his feet. 
 
 (10.) (*p/a)<s$Sa> QLZ&O The Bambu-leaf upon 
 
 Will sleep the dew- water.* 
 
 * There is a story worth telling connected with these lines. 
 
 Kamban, the translator of Jhe Kamayanam, and the greatest master of Tamil 
 rhythm, passing by a tank one evening, heard a cultivator, as he watered his 
 field, sing the line : 
 
 " On4fee leaf of the Bambu." 
 
 The man having then completed his number of buckets of water, ceased at 
 once his work and his song. 
 
 Kamban was struck with the line, and said to himself, What can be on the 
 tinv leaf of the Bambu ? Probably to-morrow morning the labourer will begin 
 his work with the next line of the song. I must be there to hear it." Accordingly, 
 with the dawn, Kamban stood on the border of the tank, and was rewarded by 
 hearing the man, as he drew his first bucket of water, chaunt the second line : 
 
 " Sleeps the-litye-arop of dew." 
 
 Moral. There is plenty of poetry and sentiment in the Tamil people, if you cow 
 only get at it. 
 
 163 
 
 <2c^
 
 252-254. 
 
 EXEBCISE 79. LESSON 81. 
 
 THE BOOT &(>. 
 
 252. VOCABULARY. 
 ? (56. III.) assert, maintain, 
 brass vessel. , 
 
 a tender shoot. 
 
 > odour (poet.). 
 rape seed. ^^ 
 
 <a/j3/5)ii3 poverty. 
 
 ) ear (5)^7 it is evil (poet.). 
 
 $05 prosperity. 
 
 eu (70.) learn. 
 
 Exercise 79. 
 
 253. 1 
 
 gjj, ic/r>Q(fl?(/5 
 
 u QuinLi&y 
 
 & IT js! p ^ IT esr . 3 r uu rriu rr si u 
 
 eii L ILJ IT & 
 
 //r 
 
 Q<sB//63arrsi/^<FQ^/r63T(OT)S37- (two vessels full, &c.). 
 O/5UJ<5Ei_63r (observe the compound) SU/T/EF 
 
 6T etr sifl <sv 
 
 10 ^/f eriflai & Gtr> rr (]> LD(O <s\) 
 
 em su pj gj] u Q u QK (Lp <f & 
 
 With-the-good-endured than poverty bad indeed, (isyivith-the-ignorant- 
 
 fj uiLi- ^(5.'' [ak before u becomes L..] 
 {enjoyed wealth. 
 
 <4^< 
 
 
 Lesson 81. 
 
 USES OP THE ROOT 38= leave, let, forsake, relinquish, release [ 68.]. 
 
 254. Many of the chief difficulties in the language are connected 
 with the peculiar use of this and the following .verbs. Each sentence 
 is a formula. [Comp. 77.] c fK^Uf^^ o^^-j 
 
 & It will be seen that where in English an inseparable preposition^ 
 or adverb is required after a verb, the Tamil often adds an auxiliary 
 verb. Thus, go away^QuiriL sS. ' 
 
 164 
 
 .^, /7
 
 LESSON 81. 254. 
 
 THE ROOT a9. 
 
 (1.) &-SVT @(T5/i<5TOL/ STSl 
 
 Your iron a rat lias eaten UP. 
 
 (2.) ^<5<5Qfj6XjJ{Q><80 
 
 At that juncture he came BACK. 
 
 (3.) UQijisjj] <5T^j2<fl>Q<s/rgi5br Qum'u 
 
 A hawk having lifted up, has taken AWAY. 
 (4.) ^jeusar stssr sSLL(Sl<s@u QumL sSliLi freer. 
 He his house to went OFF. 
 
 (5.) ^su/fcacforr ^^gyuiSl sSlLLi-trssr. 
 Them he sent AWAY. 
 
 He accompanied them a little distance on their way. 
 (6.) ,-gi/SL'iSrr ^l&sSfS^i flssr^i 'sSlL-iirdr. 
 
 She a/righted stood STILL. 
 
 (7.) ?C5 G^/iq jjrr (iptigajiLz sSlLL<$ ^^-aStq/i urrlglffi Q<?(yuSl 
 ufr&sS&jasv a vessel-of -water whole having LET OUT although 
 (you) washed, half the mud even has not gone. 
 
 (8.) (Spar QsinLujL aS/lt-^ the scorpion stung them (redundant). 
 (9.) gpssru^sOT ^uSjTii sujr/r<sSstsr }J5j8>U iSl miter &(3jf5 Q-SfrfSlsj 
 Nine-thousand pagodas to this child give 
 
 UP. 
 
 (10.) 25( 
 
 Q&iTtsssruj-t^js^tf?. sSli^-iL/jb asrreogij&l&J LQSTOLP 
 night INCESSANT rain descended. In the morning after the rain HAD 
 CEASED. 
 
 (11.) (LpfS^uLb suL-iy-iLjKi Gl<&[r<5Sji sSl@Sl(Srossr I ivill pay UP both 
 principal and interest. 
 
 (12.) ^frero.r snT6S)fnuiTiLi<s <&esvr6B$<3G>n" ^sSliL j(Lj>]Siresr he wept, 
 SHEDDING tears in drops. 
 
 (13.) ^<5S)^ SUiTKl&LJ UfTfT&Slp^j QuiT&JU USSS^^lQ&O ^LpL-L-LO 
 
 QurrL-iyL.(TK<s&iD Q/st^uiSQev QumL sSlL-irresr as though he would 
 take it to look at it, he threw it AWAY into a fire which was kindled there. 
 Comp. Lesson 61. 
 
 (14.) cgj/auear (sroa/ffi^sssrisussr ^SlsSlL-iiresr he became a Vaishnavan 
 (redundant). 
 
 (15.) STisar (oLaQev su^^^^sro^ eujr G^L-iirssT he CAUSED trouble to 
 come upon me. 
 
 (16.) .jy^j 'sSliLGlu Qun-uSl/bjg] [Qurr&ffi] it has got loose. 
 
 (17.) ^<sp sQiL eroQj let it alone. 
 
 (18.) g)^j ^sussr ^jrnsBiS-aSiiLi LorrLc = this the tree which he brought 
 to be sawn [LEFT to be]. 
 
 (19.) Q<$fliun-Lzd) D(i7> < c <psi9/lG > L_xJr I lived in ignorance (of it). 
 
 (20.) This verb is often doubled for emphasis : 
 i_,T/r he UTTERLY forsook me. 
 
 &>l 

 
 255, 256. LESSONS 82, 83. 
 
 THE ROOTS * 
 
 Lesson 82. 
 
 255. Uses of the root 4$ [ 62.] move, dance. Trans, 
 160. 
 
 (1.) ues)<suuir<sif\ (Sjiy.<oG)tLj 2-ro3urrtq.& Q<sj$3(o<suGmLD. 
 
 A hostile inhabitant feigning intimacy (you) must destroy. 
 
 ZTZSTJT)] UmnTlLu?- .Jl/SwSsBrS Q*6U,Tii.] 
 
 (2.) .-gj/QjSsoru L^LP/FJS Q<s/rss3ri_/r-(gy)/r he praised him and cele- 
 brated him (G)<s/rsjr, =^). 
 
 (3.) QevLLs! ^(SCDcSiiQgt) while he ivas hunting ( 143.). 
 
 (4.) JJ/QJSOT- ^160 uirt-eossifleu Sii 60 sv fflj sir he is a very clever fellow 
 
 n dancing and singing. [ 148, 184.] 
 
 5. euiriossfiiurr er <srr &i 'n 
 
 (5.) 
 
 $ StStfi} ) <J 3 60 ^6l>LUI51<SS&r /jl&jSLG 6U6VLQ <SU W ft, IT &) STSVT6BT '? What Will 
 
 it profit though you for ever go round about temples from the right, in 
 this wide world, like bullocks that go round the press in which oil-men 
 grind the rape seed ? 
 
 f $ igff -\- $6VLb = the icide land; @i!6VLb <3Urtij go round from the right side = LStr 
 ' 
 
 (6.) cgju&rrifl ^Qp^j (S)6V:gi&li5GrLD the conduct of a licentious 
 woman is a disgrace to her family. 
 
 (7.} ^,SlfO Lan~L-66)i <=gi^-<ffi <&ro&a QsussBrQiJci ; uirSfOLCtiTL-&!)iU 
 Lj,Tt^.<s<s/D<ffi<5 G'(5U5w(-b a dancing cow you must milk dancing, and a 
 singing cow you must milk singing. (You must adapt yourself to people's 
 humour.) 
 
 (8.) Q<sfT6viri<s @FE//TL> when the stick dances, the monkey 
 dances ( 168.). 
 
 (9.) u<sasT< > ji&<asiTl(rr esr he is very urgent for money. 
 (10.) ^L-[_iii=a movement, enterprise ( 190.). 
 
 ^jemcsr ^sbQ& Qun& ^L-L^LO ^S^ssr he keeps trying to go 
 
 there. 
 (3jjr/5/<E/rilL_to/nLJ like a monkey. 
 
 Lesson 83. 
 
 256. Uses of the root Qurr put [68.]. 
 (1.) $ULZ QUIT Q(ty eft she calumniates. 
 
 sren (o/x>6v uyS (oUfriLifresr on me he put guilt. 
 
 Q & IT afar i IT stir he took off his ear-rings 9 and put them in his own ears. 
 (3.) gy/5^<fE Si_/rifi <&&)] QufriLi^ that heifer has calved. 
 
 166
 
 / 
 
 LESSON 84. 257. 
 
 THE ROOT LQ. 
 
 (4.) ff L& IT & IT IT LCI <oT(if!<5luQurrL-!n'sr he wrote off the news. 
 
 (5.) tall (f^WfQSljir <(&} Q<S6UeU/TLQ <SF !T LJ LJ IT iL <P O^SDfil, 
 
 Q&&jisi]<s5(!orLCi j isi <s(S sfr QurTiL^ Q&iLuj QeusssTLa for all who come 
 you yourselves must provide board and all other expenses. 
 
 <<gn~6sr " Give me your hand upon it" said he ; so he gave his hand 
 upon it. 
 
 (7.) D<S5>;5 ^Ipp stfilif 6U (oU[nLsS!LL, ^QplT, 90 QptTUj- .jySTT 
 
 sSleo eu^^!sSlSlQfOosr I will just put it into that house, and be with you 
 in an instant. 
 
 (8.) .jjyi^-cF <fFL-Lty-'3>(=3jsh'G><ofr <sjro3srti> (oLJiTL-6i)[TLtoiT ? Can you malce a 
 somersault in the bottom of a pot ? [Compare also 106. 5.] 
 
 (9.) ^p^SlQ&j QtuiTL-in'syjua jysrr^jpCJu/r though you throw 
 (money) into the river, measure what you throw '. 
 
 (10.) jy^/D@ j5,T&)<J5<s- <sS QuiriL (vulg.) four or five doors OFF j 
 [perhaps for (SuinL aSil]. 
 
 A'GujT though so common in modern Tamil, is not found in the (g^gfr, , 
 and is retrete used in old writings. It does not follow the analogy of other ; 
 similar roots, j^, LJIT, frp.) tind nppfl'' a < h a corruption of 
 
 -.V STOKES. 
 
 It is not in Kan., which uses HAKKU ; nor is it in Mai. y<t""3e-^ > ^~ 
 
 Lesson 84. 
 257. Uses of the root iSl/n be born [66.]. &**<+* J ?-* J ?<5>" 
 
 (1.) SujfTLUIT j$LjQ<&(3)'S : ff fcQs&LQ iSfOS^l lO^JBff&f laLirrf Gl&fTGST 
 
 (gs)$3r the judge began to doubt and told him to come to-morrow. 
 
 (2.) ^j* ,T iu 5} ]$ eft is s$ sg0 su!T&(^u i3 ft) ft <s j> a voice was heard \ 
 from the sky. 
 
 and then a gracious word proceeds forth. 
 
 (4.) 6Cff) 2.i_SarLJKL<ffiTOi36S)UJLl/ iSl/D LJ L$ sSl gt^Ftf <& Q&ITS8GI ifTIT'S&T they 
 
 caused an agreement to be made (double causal, tS and a9 [160, 92.]). 
 
 (5.) ^susyr euiruSeSflJjjiig) iSlro^QfO Gutrn'<ff;<SG)<5 <oT&jevrrLa QumL every 
 word that comes out of his mouth is false. 
 
 (6.) OT^Lo/rssr a.^^js^ /_9 p p <$ tr ev G^tLUjeu/rti if the master's order 
 be forthcoming (you) may do it. 
 
 master took a great fancy to him. 
 
 167
 
 258, 259. LESSONS 85, 86. 
 
 THE BOOTS (oUtr, Q <& fT &T (gffj . 
 
 Lesson 85. 
 
 258. Uses of the roots GUT go, and GLJ.T@. [58, 160.] 
 
 (His .excessive lust not bringing benefit went.) 
 His excessive desire was utterly unproductive. 
 
 (2.) <g\$p Laj5G):5u u&s&eir sreusu/rii $)pJ5,) GuToSsar all the cows 
 in that herd died (went dead). 
 
 (3.) ^sijggi&wjff fflQuir&ruip. OTeuev/r/i Q#' do as stems good to 
 him. 
 
 (4."> Gto.T^tii QunQjoViLz we are cheated. 
 
 (5.) ^JSUSST TJr2o5r Gui/r^ti QuJss!gF)zcr he cheated me (Gu/r<ffi(3; 
 [56. II.] is a causal transitive verb from GUT). 
 
 (&j ! &[TStiii!&) Qu/T'd.^.js (curr&Sigsjsfr he wasted his time in gaming. 
 
 (6.) Quirs&ut- LSif ^^oTssr he followed his track. [G>urr&(3j 
 the step in which (he) wentJ\ 
 
 if anything is lost it must be acquired again. 
 
 ^GUjjgySftLUJ Gu/T^YKSTT OT 61) 6U /7" ii ^gj j$ UJ fT UJ LA fT lL LJ G-UiTuQ/bjpl all JlJS 
 
 substance unjustly was lost. 
 
 (&.} sr GST *(25 <sSfo &3>i5'&Lci Qutr&iT gj my friendship will not cease. 
 (9.) ^fcfFLJ (oLjffiSrLj GuiTtSLlOiL : QsuGfo QLJ&&-LJ QLJ^H- let that 
 i proposition alone : turn to something else. 
 
 [Gu,T means go, leave, be lost, depart, cease to be. Added to in- 
 transitive verbs it often gives the idea of completeness : 
 
 fiu.Tif u Gu/ruS^^u it is faded. (d^c^^ J ~/rfrTl 
 
 ^'u?^^ (oLjrruSlibj!)! it is destroyed.^]- - lv*- / *- a ^~^~7 
 
 (10.) c&ts/s jfjlevLb QLJJ& LbptD tslevLQ toTayr^neoLiLi^i setting aside 
 
 that land the rest is mine (that land to go). ^^ 
 
 (11.) g)(5LLsro(_LJ QU.T&&U}-&& sS&r&igj (5&&pg> there is a -%JW- 
 
 to scatter the darkness. 
 
 (12.) @jfl fs;r&(o<s QuirQLarT ? ^D<sG<a5 QunGlL&iT? 
 Shall I lose my tongue ? or my nose ? 
 
 j Qufl^ir<su Gu/ToS/Dp sresr^i (a^a/sar G <F ir ear <5)<r ^'J did it while 
 I looking at her, and so the vessel became too largest said the potter. 
 (14.) JUG ear ;&Q<as>tT Qun^&s he has gone to sleep. 
 [eomparoftloo-32, 58, 124.] 
 
 Lesson 86. 
 
 259. Uses of the root Q^/rerr^/ obtain, take to one's self [56. 
 
 (HI.)]- 
 
 (1.) eSiflpgia Q&iressrGi-ssr I awoke. 
 
 ^ m 
 
 JZ-
 
 LESSONS 86, 87. 
 
 THE ROOTS O<Sfrefr(Sr7i, </rsgbr. 
 
 260. 
 
 (2.) urrir4ggi& QcS/rernarr^ Gftreyr^sisr he told/me to beware, to watch, 
 look out. I 
 
 (3.) (Su[TL-<s Q<3S!rsssru.iT&!r he put it on (himself). 
 
 (4.) <ss>su<_^<5 Q&irG6sri$-(iit)jSfBiro* he had stobcLufL _ 
 
 (5.) Q&iT&jeSis Q&ire5sn({fr<&efr~Key werejtalking (among them- 
 selves). 
 
 (6.) {J5&& <L-(rifl<ssr sfD^^jQair0sa-iy.Q^^feBf those heifers were in 
 milk. #> ^ /*'> } t^ t_S-'J~ ~^'^^> ^=^ <3^X- 
 
 (7.) egy^sarGPLoeu ^GSi&Q&rrstxirtrTesr he placed his desire upon it. 
 
 (8.) <j<sii$5Gru(aun-(]>&j (gum Q/rR5TL-/rs3r he assumed a shape like 
 him. 
 
 (9.) ^Sa> ^roisiS-s Qs.TsssrQ ^Lau^tr Qf)iBp(resr he was silent, hang- 
 ing doivn his head. /X*-/^-/v>^ / 
 
 (10.) Q&ITUKS Q<ffi/rs5ari_/Tff- he became angry. 
 
 (11.) sfli_/riisLBUJ/rLj QuiLgi Qsn-swrtf (trjpjSg) it was raining 
 
 (12.) tiSf&jtgp susysrss^^iQssr (3<3SLL& Q <asrr &SBTL- ir ssr he askedwith 
 much respect. 
 
 (13.) ^sussr ^sa^f Q&[T<Kr<ssr i gi (Lp^eoQs.rsssr ^^usuesn-u^^/LQ 
 from thetime he said that until now. [(LppeoQ&rrtssr having (that) for 
 a beginning=from that time.'] 
 
 (14.) LofTisisssflss)aj^ esis&Q&iTGSst ^iwQ<s <su^^irssr taking in his 
 hand the mango fruit he came here. 
 
 (15.) .ji/ajrr aSfflj/rsLb uessnsssfi^ir he married (as a minister). 
 ^GUIT -sii)iau(T*ii usmeGtfisQ'&n'Gssrin'rr he got married. 
 [Compare also 106. (4.)] 
 
 (16.) ^j<su<5o^ff )<3y<SLD LJsd5r0sgfiQ<s/refrG > fflJs<5r I will cultivate his 
 friendship. 
 
 Lesson 87. 
 
 260. Uses of the root sir sin see [70.]. 
 (1.) MJ5^ 's)syjr/E/<fE!terr<5 <ssxr& 6(5 &-L-6Jruiq-<<SG)< 
 they made an agreement in which these particulars were included. 
 
 (2.) ^Ld6S)LaUJrTiT JIT/blp ^IT&J pa/@)<7$_U <>><5G>(T (GjfT 0^ _ 
 
 rr<6S5)ji) the thread which the old lady spins will not suffice for a waist- 
 string for the old gentlemen. <n mr-f) ^ . 
 
 (3 ) g(7K Lbjs65)4j A i-^^-^ CJu/riL ^sroi_iijSs5r<ffi (S555rfc', ' LJ<ST 
 (?ffl;sOTriX ^auuGluiK '' &^(yrr&r they went to the flock and said to 
 the herdsman, * TFe wowf a cow, can, tf be had ? " 
 
 ' How can I find it? [See and takejt.] 
 
 he got a cold andfevei; and was very poorly. 
 
 22
 
 261, 262. LESSONS 88, 89. 
 
 THE BOOTS STOSIJ, LJ. 
 
 (6.) <s<$ egysu/r eroaoSeu Qstr<g]< asssr Q/rxru/r 
 & w your hand and go to visit him. 
 
 (7.) OTscrSsors <s/r<633)La6u QfLpirGsr he did it when I was not there to 
 see (lit. not me seeing he did it). 
 
 (8.) OTSOT-SBF SIT^ILO ! What is that! (an interjection [214, 193.]) 
 
 Lesson 88. 
 261. Uses of the root MM place [64.]. Vd ''' <^>" LA - t ~^' 
 
 (1.) OTsarSssr* <$ iLu^esxsu p jjj /f C?Lj/r fie me up and go yourself 
 (redundant). 
 
 (2.) Qufr^KStLirr es)w^^& QfBimssr L9&<s&<!u QurresTfiJciuis 
 pLotriL ^(f^sSfo^j it is like the man who stored up his wealth in sacks 
 and yet went a begging. ffe^t^^ 
 
 (3.) ^su/TtScterr* ^fruLSiL euQfjLnuup- ^^/ut-SsroiajiLiii send Jtim to 
 eat [probably a corruption of ^^j/ui_/a9d]iL, the causal (160.)]. 
 
 (4.) ]$ uS^f tsseu^^rr&^Lo U6s>s uQ^ff eaxsus&evir&iTg] although 
 you allow fire to increase don't allow hatred to increase. 
 
 (5.) OTSST (ouflQev Q&ITULCI sosussirQ^ don't be angry with me ! 
 
 (6.) ^eussr sffil*^ ji/^t <sa)siJ&Qp$e\)(!ev I shall not tread his 
 threshold. }&??&, 
 
 (7.) ^L-<50)L-<5S)UJ OT^J5J 0/J3^S5)^a96U (STOOJ & $ [T &# Lb O <PfS*?6 UU <f 
 
 Qfff)6G>jr)S6)Uj tsiTLb though you take a wood-louse and put it on a bed it 
 will seek the rubbish heap. 
 
 (8.) j)j^^<s<sBfr(fliu^ioS>^ gLpi^-sroau^^/reu QsueiftuuirrQprr ? If you 
 cover that affair will it not come abroad ? 
 
 (9.) <gl3SOrL-<<6G)<g& <5G)&a3QJ <oS)<Sl}^^[TL-<Sll!T^JS(;f <SFSWr60i_ 
 
 /riu QLa<$,5uu[rjrLc>[r? To him who bears the globe in his hand and 
 moves it, is a chunde fruit a great weight ? 
 
 (10.) isroisu^^freO @/j9, ^s^ir^^ireo QLDITL-ISSI if you preserve it 
 a tuft ; if you shave it baldness (=1 am in your power). 
 
 (11.) = gya/ < ga/<s@ Qsuif ss)SiJ^^(^sSl(y<ssr he is lying in wait for him 
 (lit. a shot he has placed for him). 
 
 (12.) ^fiuSsrr <ss)^j^^Qf,&Sl(rysyr he keeps her (improperly). 
 
 Lesson 89. 
 
 262. Idiomatic uses of verbal rooftj suffer [56. (II.)]. 
 This Lesson is supplemental to 92. The use of u in forming a 
 passive voice is seen in the following (Tiru. xi. 5) : 
 
 an assistance is not measured by itself: it is measured by the worth of 
 those to whom it has been done. 
 
 170
 
 LESSON 90. 263. 
 
 USES OF (|). 
 
 For <si/<sro.!rdjjD and .jyssrjjy compare 184. 
 
 (1.) ^>]G>UJrT<jlUJtn 
 
 SjIffLCKSirrrirffssr Harischandra, the great Icing, son of Trisangu who 
 reigned over Oude. (^muuiLi for ^<sssri, as in Latin.) 
 
 (2.) L]puuiL[j Qun-<<sv)ir<5<5rr they set out. (u with what we 
 should call an adverb : 
 
 (3.) G > <ffi<sfra9uLJilG ) /_<3r J heard it. (u with a noun.) 
 
 (4.) ^(sussr sttfev c gjLnLi3&&j6SlG>&j uiL &-<as)L-i$fi his head struck 
 
 against the grinding stone and was broken 
 
 (5.) <gl<p(&> cgysy/T'Ssrr a_L_<s<3ri_/Lli_n'/7"csefr they agreed to it. (u 
 with what is equivalent to a preposition.) 
 
 (6.) (Ds_-jyi$L $ uiLGl&Qarrdr you shall suffer twelve stripes. 
 
 (7.) 2_jrffSsl> ^suuL-i<ss)<SLi s_eucssro ( ffi@^ ;&ULjLBn~ ? Can the things 
 which have got into the mortar escape the pestle ? 
 
 (8.) LoSsisraSeer sy/TLgQia/s^gg//-/} suSsuuSeu 'sSlQ-^jsgi Lnrr%5sru(SurrJ 
 vr like a hart caught in the toils he has fallen into the net of 
 
 LJ with a verbal root=L9tf s<SLJUiLi[reor. 
 (9.) (ffi/rexj^L iSlLLL-dJ$<3o uLc>uuf-UJiT& ^i^.@)iS5r he ran so that his 
 heels touched his hinders. 
 
 (10.) &-Uirm<J5Jil<!oG)@o sreueu/rii <s^s<su<s : uuLct all may be accom- 
 plished by stratagem. (6rouSjs2/<oroi_<iJ jffjfcjjj)($6i) LJ/i.) 
 (11.) In phrases, thus : 
 
 i a mortal wound. 
 b a dead tree. 
 
 (12.) <siJ6sfiL-l&o ir} fflJ^sr srssresr u/r 
 
 r ? If these four are in him, what will he not suffer? 
 [Compare 92, 161, 171.] 
 
 , 
 
 Lesson 90. 
 
 AUXILIAEY VEEB FOE ADVEEBIAL EXTENSION OF PEEDICATE. 
 
 S 263. Uses of the verbal root @ ^?ace, pw, give [68.]. . In 
 idiomatic expressions it is hard to say whether the verb is $) or 
 afl. 254. 
 
 Cl ) UIEI&L-(I<$ Q&n-efrsfriLGlLz let them divide it among themselves. 
 
 a part to give. 
 Qatroir&r gives the idea of among themselves. 106.] 
 (2.) pen G)LJS3r<F/r,@sroitJ ^iLsQsirem Qurr^^r he took hie wife 
 away with him. , , . 
 
 <ir LQcsSscr @) iLGl <su <5 < T &* he brought his son with, him. 
 [Here @L is used for takvnfwith one, giving the hand to one.~\ 
 
 in
 
 LESSONS 90, 91. 
 USES OF @, <>l<Tfj<S(r. 
 
 (3.) Qu<Tf)<si}i&QiL<5 : Qffreo^&jSff&efr you are making a great 
 complaint of it. [Here )L! = making, giving outJ\ 
 
 (4.) ^jsvfr .jyLJLJtp. ot sssr assr to ):!> QajTsasr^L^-saDiSuSeu while he 
 was thus thinking in his mind. [Here $L-.=tuming over, giving it 
 his thought.'] 
 
 (5.) t-S ssr ssfi /.I u (o LJ ;r . 25 ii _/(. Qffiii-grresr he made (them) turn back. 
 
 (Lpsargoflili-cs/TSsuLJ L$ KIT 6tsfl iL < ^(^LdL^^esT withdrawing the foot 
 that he had advanced, he turned back. 
 
 (6.) uSgjfi^ &L.&&&) @:li_rsjr he made a great outcry. 
 
 (7.) QpflL-t <suy9s5>u-/LJ uppSiLj QuiT^irserr he went in the way that 
 first presented itself. (Qisfr opposite.) 
 
 (8.) s^sroa/^Lp^LLJ ^tLis^iL QeusiftuQeo a^^/rajr. 
 
 He shiit the door, locked U and came out. (y^- @) 
 
 [Here $iL seems redundant, or else=p : he locked it up. This 
 is very common.] 
 
 (9.) ( ID JO fa @<5H)UJ 
 
 50. 168. 
 
 &_ m /D GII (off ! ^.s&s 
 87. 74. 
 
 0, thou, who possessest grace by which my faults diminish, and good 
 dispositions increase within me ! God, kin of my soul ! 
 
 [G > L>6u + ^) increase. s-jbrDsuir from a. *$ be, possess. Not very 
 common, (geasriii used for ppgjGssrLa. ^.ps^ relationship, used for 
 &.psussr a relation.^ 
 
 (10.) ^snjg (Lpssr<5sFlL-QsiTsssT ^suffii-^^eu QufrQeussr I will 
 make that a pretext for going to him. 
 
 (11.) ^earssric, @tLt_ e^LLifeu <ffjr5Z5rii> @i_6u/7-Lo/r ? Is it right to 
 steal from a house where they have supplied (us) with food ? 
 
 (12.) 6T63T LO / 6K / ^u9G?6U ^(flj LJ f 6S)0L$ 13)-$ S QlJ^eofi @L-if- 
 
 In my herd a cow has picked up flesh and in- 
 
 creased in size. [Here L9i. also is used idiomatically.] 
 
 (13.) @LJU<. ilL-2err ^iLi-^^Lo ! [68.] Grant me this ! (Thus 
 
 graciously give command.) 
 
 (14.) gro<s jsi5iS, QuniJ jsisiSl, GurriL @ipf8, sSflL-t-Qpgj Q&irsssr 
 
 j_/rofr with trembling hand, and trembling body, and stammering lips, 
 
 she screamed aloud and wept, [stf/r, a mere imitative word.] 
 
 
 
 Lesson 91. 
 
 264. Uses of the verbal root jyoen- grant, vouchsafe. (62.) 
 (1.) }$s8reBfl(TTjUL3i-;5$jr)( 6T(Lpj5.gqrjgiftigs)!r he ascended benignant to 
 his seat. 
 
 172
 
 LESSONS 92, 93. 265, 266. 
 
 USES OF 
 
 (2.) <&J!nl ! erser&tg) 9(5 ts&o GUVS ^(T^&rQsuss^^ sir, you 
 must grant me a favourable reply. 
 
 (3.) Ljgifiljr&jfi'&rresrLD .jy^srrG'sysaar^ srssr^i ^suiL usdbrsBsfi^ssr 
 he performed penances praying for male issue. 
 
 (4.) ^iiiLQ/T^sOT^^eu sff/D fSl (TjjjsffTT) sifl&ssT he arose and seated him- 
 self on his throne. 
 
 (5.) <s-sufTuS^i<suiTs&r <5n)LSl,$!S(njGiflujuty-Q>tLi jsL-js^Q&rrstssr QUIT 
 stTjjI&trQrDssr as my Lord shall please to direct I will conduct myself. 
 
 [Here (Surr^rr jBzisrG!rr)ziir=<oi]{t ) QG>rD6&. The verb is Quir^-Siro^i 
 but the strictly poetical form, (Sun^ir ts3rQrr)svr=(aU[rgjiG>rD6gr, is 
 used. Comp. 33.] 
 
 Lesson 92. 
 A KIND OF PASSIVE. 
 
 265. Use of the root SL^OTT eat (56. III.). This is from a. err, 
 and signifies take in, receive, and thus eat, suffer. 
 
 (1.) QsuL_GBri-iTiT<35<sfr they were cut down. 
 
 (2.) ^p-sssfieu <5LlsOT_susfr she who was tied to a pillar. 
 
 (3.) ^(LpfLd g-sssr&ro j5iT-sS<!oG)(o&) sblstyLo ^.sssTUfrQ iriT ? Will they 
 eat poison with the tongue that eats ambrosia ? 
 
 (4.) <ss)Lb QstTL-Qessr QutTi&rbg)! the ink is spilled. 
 
 (5.) (LpiLstssr (6afttLnrG^ don't stoop after you 've hit your head. 
 
 (6.) ^sro^QcS/rswr ^Saiiqa&r $fll(y3r he goes about distracted 
 by his desires. ^^ *- ? 
 
 [2. em is either =(1) there is (43.), or (2) having eaten , verb. part, of 
 2-jgr e at [56. (III.)], or (3) it is used for the passive, and so equivalent to uiL. 
 In this last case 2.swr is add ed to the root. Comp. 133.1 
 
 266. Uses of the verbal root ^uf. beat (64.). The primary idea 
 is down, from S. Comp. Eng. idiomatic use of strike. 
 
 (1.) LALpesr)} QuetstriLiLct Qi>/r/lsroi_ ^^-^^^ r gur<til sSiQeusssr 
 LD shave these three persons bare and send them away. 
 
 (2.) ^ji^-iuiTff fstr ui^.ujn-^1 a country which has not suffered, will 
 not team. - ^^y . 
 
 (3.) g)OTgro/r)<s/rLL/i w/r2srr</r<5LL/i 
 to-day ! to-morrow ! saying, he causes me to dance attendance. 
 to wander ; ^(^.<sQ(ys^ he knocks me about; iu omitted.] 
 
 (4.) ^su- LSjf#J*%WD 
 
 173
 
 267. LESSON 94. 
 
 ENLARGEMENTS OF SUBJECT AND OBJECT. 
 
 <6SS)t>6u ...gyip.^jjju Co u IT <sn IT ear by his preaching he shuts the moidhs of 
 gainsayers. , 
 
 (5.) Qu(CfjL&<5mLp ^q-sSlfoQurr^ (Vjeiflrrir^ ; $,gz/ giribpei) ^/rpii 
 Quirgi @srfl(/5<i> it does not grow cool ivhen heavy rain falls, but when 
 gentle showers fall. 
 
 (6.) @!gl6S)rr<5G)uj& fsurrifl ^ly-s Si (year he rides the horse. 
 
 (7.) p(5 ffr&o ^i^-uQusor ^rressr <TFITJ ^Lp-uQussr, <frLciLCirr 
 Lni&Q LD/_) ^tf <& Tssr(65)6u ^siTgi I will plough the land once, 
 or even twice ; b^lt uselessly again and again I cannot plough it. [Here 
 jyi. probably refers to the bullocks that draw the plough.] 
 
 (8.) .jyajfiuerraiy ^^^(iptL &rl<mj* ^ffsssrQ sutruSQeo ^jrireumu 
 jyif^^uCJu/rilL-rrgar all that rice and curry in two mouthfuls he 
 ate up. 
 
 (9.) <$\J5&& &<oG)L-6iu 
 
 rr they robbed that bazaar. 
 
 Lesson 91 
 ENLARGEMENTS OP SUBJECT AND OBJECT. 
 
 267. Some idiomatic uses of the relative and adverbial parti- 
 ciples. [25.] 
 
 (1.) ^tsiissr eaQ^Qp (f8uL-i the sign of his coming. 
 
 (2.) j @)<56)p&Qp typpiz the picota with which you are drawing 
 water. 
 
 (3.) Loesafl L%> arnressTLn eresresr ? Why do you tie the bell? 
 
 (4.) ^swSsor ^uf-pp jyif DJ /rilif @)6ar he showed the stripes he 
 had suffered. 
 
 (5.) uireo&fDJBp uffi a cmv in milk. [Ellipsis of subject.] 
 .) 
 
 (6.) pisQ/o GeuSai eruui^iLjio jst-s^ua an affair which is pre- 
 destined will happen any how. 
 
 (7.) ^jsp eS 1 SL-up-etsr uoSSTLc, g)OTns?sr@ Q^eueusfleuSsu the money 
 
 expended in building that house is not yet paid. 
 (8.) ^i<5G)<s ^jfSlSp ^fSlsy the knowledge 
 
 of that. 
 So e-sscr^fiff) a-isacrn-fi^ the feeling of a thing. 
 
 (9.) @a.ar <a;0/r> Q,g$ the day of his coming. [This is quite 
 idiomatic.] 
 
 (10.) ^esTQ-p^eSev ^Jg-s^j Qfevsuir&pg] <pifluj&}&} it is not right 
 that the expenditure should be greater than the capital. [ f % > <sisr= which 
 has become; (ip< &j = capital .] 
 
 (11.) L9efr3srrerr 0^^J ^euQ&ezresr ? What is the use of their 
 existence. [For ^^^^^^eo. It is a gerund.] 
 
 (12.) U/T6U Q<5iTL-iT@ sr^gTOLosSsrra struuirrrifSlu ueo&sr 
 Is there any use in keeping buffaloes that yield no milk. 
 
 174
 
 LESSONS 95, 96. 268, 269. 
 
 USES OF =f$-(<5. IDIOMS. 
 
 (13.) g)LJ(_/[$-LJLJL_L_si/sr ^j(t^^(ol ^ssrssr ? (ourrQiLissr'oGr? What 
 matters it whether such a creature live or die ? [^)/F^J as above. 
 Q u [T ih = Q> u rr eu jl ss) eo . ] 
 
 Lesson 95. 
 
 268. Idiomatic uses of the verbal root ^-@ [58.]. This 
 resembles very closely the Latin FIO. This is to be read with 
 Lesson 44. 
 
 (1.) Q#iuiu(?fiussBri$uijQ ( #6U6u/riJ3 Q&dj<n~uSlpj!)i (O^tu^/r^^) all is 
 done that was to be done. \_^\&p)) = (Lpiq-i5<*i$ is finished, completed ; 
 
 Q<* .^LusSlL-i^i the time is up.} 
 
 fstsun &LS Ljssbriassreu =f$/rj72 before knowing a man's disposition to 
 associate with him is unfit. //"/ //%y 
 
 So, ) ()$,<& 6v IT .S/TJD it ought not to be, 103. [Here =!$<fl~j2= 
 jS&trgi it is not proper, fit.} 
 
 Q <ff IT &J SV) 60 ir LQ IT ? Q & !T &J 61) 6\J IT LD ; (ol & IT &J SO 6U fT 3! [T ^ . 
 
 May one say ? One may say ; one may not say. 
 
 Why did not you redeem it as soon as the date was expired? 
 
 x"i\ 7 SI 7*7 Jl _ . 7 I"-..* 
 
 (4.) sirpcyiiju up^^ireer he flew like the wind. [^Cu + ^Sl verb. 
 part. See 40.] 
 
 (5.) ^f6; Q^/reroa the sum totalc / 3 6 } 
 (6.) ^&iLLz let Toel ( /<<*j , 
 
 [Comp. Lesson 43 for f Enlargement of Nouns.'^] 
 
 Lesson 96. 
 
 269. Idiomatic use of the tenses. In rssvr^ur&j this is called 
 &ireusu(Lpaj&)Loui-l=8anetioned anomaly of time. [III. Gram. 146- 
 149.) 
 
 (1.) .jysusfr (gji$.,<s6Br< pern LA ^elieu/r^swsrr OTSOT-JJ; ^/Sl^ 
 " She (is) domestic a/airs' ability one who is without," I have 
 
 discovered (=1 am aware). 
 
 God is everywhere. 
 
 (2.) ft g)uutf # QfiLeuinu ^,<^)eo QffairJu^ you do so you are 
 a dead man. (Past for present : absolute certainty.) 
 
 (3.) $ QSL-L- &jn^/s& Qsirfj&Qpeor your request is granted. [No 
 delay.]
 
 270. 
 
 LESSON 97. 
 
 POETICAL FORMS. 
 
 I will find it out 
 
 I will 
 
 ^T'in coming.~\ 
 
 (4) OTL! istT'&rruStQ) 
 for you in eight days. (Present for future.) 
 
 (5.) fSfr&sr Q^iiS^ja GUQTjSKojrjevr <si ssr (ty <sisr 
 quer and return," said he. [Com. fflj/rGV>jr, 
 
 (6.) (STssrSsBr^ <&zitr La/5<sa)@66)iLiu UiTfT^^fB 
 he tells me to mind his herd. (Future to denote custom.) 
 
 (7.) <oTLj(oLJfr^Lb c-gtjjSjI&UJ fj<dS)JLJ USTfT jjjg)& <Sn"S35T jjl (fl <2U IT GST he is 
 
 always going about seeking the wonderful. 
 
 (8.) (LpsjJr(o@)/risfr jyuuqL^ Q^/reujy/aj/r/fssfr our ancestors said 
 (were wont to say) so. 
 
 (9.) ^uLj^LcF QfiLwiriL do this! (Future for imperative.) 
 
 ^ (a.) The past is used for the present in some few cases 
 idiomatically -asd-to indicate certainty. 
 
 (fe.) The present is used for the future to indicate certainty. - 
 
 (c.) The future is used often to express a habit, *&?- anything 
 customary. 
 
 (d.) The future is used, as in English, politely for the imperative. 
 This is especially common in poetry. [Comp. 140. c.] 
 
 Lesson 97. 
 SOME POETICAL FORMS AND IDIOMS. 
 
 270. The object of this work is to teach the common Tamil, as 
 spoken by all classes of the people. There are, however, certain 
 poetical forms which must be understood before the learner can read 
 the two little works called ef^.g^qt and Qsireisretop QsuiLrspzw, by 
 the poetess Avveiyar.* These will be illustrated here. All other 
 poetical forms and idioms must be reserved till the learner is able to 
 
 * A very valuable edition of these was published by the Rev. J. Sugden in 
 Bangalore. It may be added that a most scholarly edition of the rjjslQiEfSl 
 sl<sir&<Lto by Mr. Stokes, M.C.S., is one of the best helps the student of high 
 Tamil can use. 
 
 The traditions current among the Tamil people regarding the " wonderful old 
 woman " are very numerous. 
 
 She was one day sitting in the porch of a temple with her feet stretched out 
 straight before her not considered to be a very respectful position in the 
 presence of a superior. 
 
 The officiating priest rushed out to her with the question, " Are you not ashamed 
 to stretch out your feet in the presence of the SAmi? 
 sireo j tl/_fii/L 
 
 To which she replied : 
 
 <s [T sssnSl J f fT &} ^tsiQ&GluiTUJS'&neo fiLGlQQrDGsr : Very true, sir! if you 
 will shmv me where the Sdmi (Lord) is ngt, I will go and stretch out 'my feet 
 there." 
 
 <3=inl
 
 LESSON 97. 270. 
 
 POETICAL FORMS. 
 
 read the Illrd Grammar, where he will find a full explanation of 
 every poetical form and idiom. 
 
 (1.) In beginning the study of Tamil poetry, the learner must 
 remark that the signs of the cases are very commonly elided. This is 
 called (osy/o^/rysroa}^ Q<S(T<O$ (Qsnp^ioS>Ld a casal termination, Q^/r 
 ems ellipsis. III. Gram. 152.). 
 
 Virtue to do desire. 
 
 Cultivate in the season. 
 
 from uQfjGULb a season, is prepared according to 18. 
 for the reception of the casal sign, which is omitted, and < emphatic 
 inserted.) 
 
 (2.) Letters are constantly omitted whenever the rhythm requires 
 it. In the above Q&tu is for Q&t'uiu.* Comp. III. Gram. 41. 
 
 (3.) Participial nouns and appellatives (185.) are very frequently 
 introduced. 
 
 ^^isu^i )ssTL) (=^J3/, 56. II., grow cool, fut. part, noun, neut. 
 sing., 88.) that which will (must) grow cool (is) anger. 
 
 v&L&sLzgi sirQsii&j (a neut. appellative for mc-ssia energy) hide 
 not that which belongs to energetic action. 
 
 (4.) A negative imperative is often found, which is not at all used 
 in common Tamil. 
 
 t sjr(2'<a/eii ($jr hide -\- en 4-snsu), sSlioOsQ&ev ('sSlsi><S(^ remove), a9srr/-o 
 Queo (stiarLoL-i reveal), sSl^t-tv (sS leave], ^^Qipeb (g)(y> despise) 
 do not hide, remove, &c., &c. 
 
 <&&o (a lengthened form of MSD not) is added to the root of verbs 
 which form their present with Sl^u, and those which form the present 
 with sQgi insert <. [III. Gram. 92.] 
 
 (5.) The root of a verb is frequently prefixed to a noun and forms 
 with it a compound. This is called .sSt%mpG);$[T<c& (a98sor verb, 
 llipsis, an ellipsis of the inflection of the verb). 
 Sssr f$Q$is<gff Q^tu (Q&uj, the root used for QfftLSlp or 
 i, 74.). [III. Gram. 153.] (The work which you do, to be 
 accurate, do.) What you do, do well. 
 
 Sometimes a letter is introduced for the sake of euphony. 
 
 * An amusing story turns on this : . . , 
 
 A learned man presented himself before ^il<&ffff!TLc> uirsssTLSf.iLiesr^ a cele- 
 brated king, himself a poet of no mean ability, and when the king demanded the 
 reason of his coming, he replied : 
 
 'Your Majesty a senseless man knowing I came. 
 
 The courtiers stood aghast. The king, however, smiled and liberally rewarded the 
 risitor. But why ? g)eu/r^ffl/Sr=^)6U6U/r^fiyar one who is without, and thus 
 $ei>8vrr<euesr one w ^ ^ s senseless; but also LJ &$ o9 eu = in sense, and 
 OT = a sun : a high poetical word. 
 
 177 99
 
 271. LESSON 98. 
 
 CAUTIONS. 
 
 ir (G^/r, QJ, g)i_iL ; here the <su may serve to 
 express a future idea). (The place to be approached, having known, 
 ap'proach)=having first ascertained the fit place for youto be in, take up 
 your abode in it. 
 
 This is a very common idiom. Thus, euiT^jsirerr (for sun-QpSUp or 
 eurrofLd^rreh'} life-time. 
 
 (6.) The ffn-tfl-Goiu or particle <)\J5i$ is used instead of a casal 
 termination: thus, 
 
 <pirssrG(yrr @)ssr:53(tfj join thyself to the assembly of the worthy. 
 (&iTscrGrri?(-K<5S)L-tLJ, ^jssr^^i=^)ssr^^l6sfl!-^^Q&}, g).) [III. Gram. 
 108.] 
 
 (7.) &Z3T is inserted euphonically before the termination of a case : 
 thus, 
 
 65)LJ QutTQTjISSTGBftssr QiOiLu Q U /T (Tjj 6TT <S6U5)S. 
 
 Hand wealth than, true wealth (is) learning. 
 
 Here, for Q urrQTj sift ssr= than wealth (21.) 
 used (err and p coalesce in il). 
 
 Lesson 98. 
 
 271. Cautions useful in translating English into Tamil. 
 
 (1.) Your perishing body is not 2-sar ^^^^(currSfo <SF/Pjrii, but 
 egyyyayerrisrrs-ssr.ga/sroL-UJ ^/FjLa or ^/L^ioiysfnsrr^/rSuj 2.s?jr ^/Fjii. 
 
 The adj. pronoun comes^before its noun. 
 
 (2.) Do not think you mav use the passive form (LJ) wherever it 
 occurs in English. Thus, 
 
 (a.) He ordered it to be given to her. Not 
 &LJUI& O^,TS3r@)/r, but cgj/sy^cSgj cgyss 
 
 (6.) <9rau(f?6U ernpjfclU ^^^JLQ QuiTGU 
 
 6ujj2;/53 &etrpgi(rfj45U u/rt^.(S5)srr ZiA;e a picture painted on a wall, not 
 moving in the least, she sang so that a stone e&en would be melted. (Not 
 
 ' 
 
 (c.) <[TiJouiflj5<& L-i&,ui5i<sT fiowers whose stalks are cut off. (Not 
 
 (3.) Do not think it necessary always to try to find a word, for 
 "a," "an," or " the " in translating. 
 
 This is a tree )i tniTLQ ^rrsor, not $jp 9(5 L&jrt-arruj jD^-sS/o^j/ 
 
 This is the man I spoke of tsrrsisr Qerrsyresr L>safi^ssr ^sussr^imsr. 
 
 (4.) " His," &c. may often be omitted, as in Latin and Greek, when 
 emphasis or distinction is not implied. 
 
 The boy learns his lesson enuiuGor utriLa uL^.'sSfyssr. Not f $>jp<5u 
 
 She is gone to her house ^SUJIT ^L-S(^U Qun'uj-sSliLiir&r. Not 
 178
 
 LESSONS 98, 99. 271, 272. 
 
 CAUTIONS. 
 
 (5.) I fawe. Not generally flj/rsir a.sro_ajau@)iu g)0SG > /csar, but 
 
 scrcffi@ 2.SOT. "Est pro habeo," &c. 242. 
 
 (6.) Be fod me lofto i was that did so uuu}.& Q^iL^sussr g)sar 
 rssrjj; OT<SCT@ ^fSeSf^ir&r. Not $uui$. < Q&tugeussr ^/r 
 OTSST^P / CONSIDER THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN DIRECT AND INDIRECT 
 QUOTATION. 
 
 (7.) .He saicZ Ae would come eu^Qeussr srssrjg] Qffrrear^esr or ^rmsr 
 <si!QjjGij<rr<5& QtFiTssr^ssr. Not ffl/(fl)ffl//r5r (oresr^i Q^rresr^ssr. 82. 
 
 (8.) A new nominative must not come in between the verbal 
 participle and the finite verb that completes a sentence. Thus, 
 
 The lawyer stated their case and the judge acquitted them 
 
 This is incorrect. Eender it rather thus : 
 
 &[5J<5Jil8)ILILJ Qu& (or G U & GST L$ S8T Lj OT 
 
 &c. 
 
 RULE. Whatever number of verbal participles may come in a 
 sentence they have all the same nominative as the final verb. 77. 
 
 (9.) Idiomatic and figurative expressions must not be rendered 
 literally, in general. " A watery grave " is good English ; 
 Q^err&r L3G>jr<5<(&)L$ is ridiculous, ^swrsssfrfleu 
 is Tamil. 
 
 (10.) He told me how to act. Not ruuu?-& QfLuuj(o<au<sssr(blLc> 
 but 
 
 jgrnr or (old 
 
 (11.) It is not always sufficient to translate the English infinitive 
 mood by the Tamil infinitive. [Comp. 168.] 
 
 Thus, OTssrSsBTcS <5/rs3cr <sw a; <s IT /r <s &r they came to see me is correct, 
 implying intention ; but " it is not right to do so " is not ^juui^-ff 
 Q&iLujff <!Fifl j-gygvGu, but ^LJui^-f GffiLsu^i <pf) ^gyeusu : to do soothe 
 doing so. When it is an infinitive noun-phrase translate it accord- 
 ingly. 87. 
 
 These cautions might be multiplied indefinitely. There is but room, 
 however, to add one general piece of advice : analyse well whatever 
 you wish to put into Tamil. Break it up into shorter sentences if 
 necessary. Transfuse ideas rather than translate words. Never 
 be content till the whole meaning is fully brought out in your 
 version. Then reconsider your MS. with a view to abridgment and 
 condensation. 
 
 Lesson 99. 
 
 272. Hints regarding translation from English into Tamil. 
 Beschi well says, " seepe dicimus Latina verba, non latine ; et saepius 
 European! linguam loquimur TaWlicis verbis." We often use Latin 
 
 179
 
 272. LESSON 99. 
 
 HINTS ON TRANSLATION. 
 
 words without the Latin idiom, and still more frequently do we clothe 
 European idiom in Tamil words. The mind must be to a great 
 extent imbued with Tamil habits of thought before a man can speak 
 idiomatically. When the learner has with great labour and study 
 acquired the habit of thinking in Tamil, he may hope to speak the 
 language well ; but not till then. Extensive reading and constant 
 intercourse with natives are essentially necessary to him who would 
 excel. 
 
 A few examples may perhaps serve to aid the learner in trans- 
 lating. 
 
 (I.) " Heaven is that fold of the Great Shepherd into which no 
 enemy enters, and from which no friend departs." Bishop Home. 
 
 And, first, as to the words: " Heaven " is best rendered here by 
 uffLcxsGGTL-eoLz (the other sphere) ; for this indicates a place, which the 
 sense requires, and not a state, which QLairtL&Ln (liberation) signifies.* 
 
 Fold Laj56,s, Q<$n-Qf<suiJo. The former means the herd or flock 
 rather ; the latter that in which they are enclosed. 
 
 Great, Qufltu means this; but /z><s/r, ujn&, ffKajriLi-., ^earesr^, t_9jr 
 siTssr are all words not inapplicable. 
 
 Shepherd, GLaiLuuir one who feeds. Not ^Gni-iuevr a name for the 
 caste. 
 
 Enemy &<5gsQ$ or ue&<auzor (sQQffir$ an opponent, <zr!sirn-eift an 
 adversary), u&n&fB&msveBr. 
 
 Enter s.iLiSlrrQeu^ (56. III.), q (56. H.), ^jsrotp (56. I.), creep in, 
 GV0 (56. I.) draw near. 
 
 Friend ^Qjs8^ssr (I^^^Q^ is opposed to ^^7(75 ; .jysw-qgrnprra/sar 
 to u<G8)<6L-esr), Qis&sQrr)6i:sr. 
 
 Depart aSil<aSI. QuiriL'sS, L$fl<iGurr, sL-uGuir sflil 
 (56. II.). 
 
 Then, the construction, if exact, will require the relative participle, 
 and will run thus : 
 
 " Heaven . . . no enemy entering, and no friend departing . . . of the 
 great shepherd . . . the fold . . . is." Otherwise, " Heaven is the fold of 
 the great Shepherd. No enemy enters it ; no friend departs from it." 
 
 1. uinbsssneoL&irisisri ") suii ( uS 
 
 * The number of pairs of words for this world and the world to come is sur- 
 prising. These are a few : ^iLsOLo, Lo < tfy5)/_o ; D<sii, ujrii> ; LQSSST, 
 
 180
 
 LESSON 99. 
 HINTS ON TRANSLATION. 
 
 2. uiTLasisaneoLcirrtosrgi Quifliu QLCHJUUUQ^OS)IILI usgrsro^. .jy^eu 
 @su3a>. Q/s^-sSfDevesr iSfljsg} GLJ/TQJ 
 
 . 
 
 3. QLDfTLL&LQ UJTLCi G> LO LLJ U U fl SST LO p 6S) <5 IU IT LCt : ^jl5lQ< U<3S)<SESUSOT 
 
 4. QLofriLfLofresr^i &&><&) epu utissnu IT u* eresr&ei), Quifliu 
 
 UQJjG&llIU QJ& IT Q<Sl) <&$&(&) BU1_//T@U3. <5T LJ LJ L$-G) UJ Soft J , 
 
 (II.) " He is the freeman whom the Truth makes free, 
 
 And all are slaves besides." Cowper. 
 
 WORDS. Freeman &IU[T !&& = one who rests on his oivn founda- 
 tion. 
 
 who has obtained release. 
 sl3Q<!B<95uuL-i<3L'6sr=one who has been released. 
 3r = one who lives as he likes. 
 
 Slave ^L$-6Lz=a bond slave. 
 
 & L- sssr i_sij ssr = one who is bound. 
 $d0s)ro=a captive. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 By truth made-freeman freeman is ; all else slaves are. 
 
 i <&L-(Q soar i euir& sir, 
 
 2. &<siiuLo srauSsor sSGlpfa) ^SesrQ^ir ^euQesr a)^8su QU/D 
 
 3. 
 
 LD &!<5G>pUUlLL- SUITS &Tjf IT eST. 
 
 4. s.s35rLD 
 
 (III.) Vanitas est, longam vitam optare, et de bona vita parum 
 curare. It is vanity to desire to live long, and to care too little about 
 living well. 
 
 WORDS. Vanity LbtTiLens, ^/ZU^^LD falsehood, <s<z3sr vain, eSsttrsrr 
 iuiJD a vain thing. 
 Life @3Liesr, ^(L/<Sr. The former, life itself; the other, life-time. 
 
 ^aj<5/rguii) life-time (but not pure Tamil), eun-Lpptrdr happy 
 
 days. 
 Long !<sirLD<r<5Gr, /GSSTL-, ijiLu-Larrssr, Q/s^-tu, Qp, 
 
 , Sanskrit long life, yir&sr ^u3*=/ttfl age. 
 
 181
 
 272, 273. LESSONS 99, 100. 
 
 HINTS OX TRANSLATION. 
 
 Desire afl^iiq (62.), ^ (64), <2fiusr (62.), (Sairjpi (62.), 
 (64.) ; care ssu^souu (56.). 
 
 Well issnQyaj, <FiiLo(ij/nL' ( / /Fol)6usi/ i ss)(ij^=as a gfooa* man), 
 L^uSeu w a grood way. Here you will have to paraphrase. 
 
 To live rsi- (66.), ^<y> @ (64.). 
 
 CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 About a good life, or living well not caring a long life (to live 
 long) to desire is vanity. 
 
 au/rtp (Jsyssjjr^ STssrjpi (may be omitted) 
 
 2. 
 
 @(5ULj^j LamLana. Here jsfzr(yiL.u LSeoLpss is literal and, in Tamil, 
 almost unmeaning. 
 
 3. y,,Tss5r ^i^<sf 
 sS((f)<5[reiJxu>. (Bather foreign.) 
 
 4. fsesreoLn rSes)rD^>s ^/rsrr/nu 
 
 ; OT / 
 
 jF< is still ambiguous (as in the English tceZ?), and may 
 refer only to material prosperity. The "fruits of good living " is a parallel case.] 
 
 The learner will find that this may be varied and amplified almost 
 at pleasure, but the first expresses the meaning. The following verse 
 embodies nearly the idea. 
 
 It is a Kurral venbd. 
 
 QufiQpn- 
 
 " Are many days great if a man does not 'virtuous deeds ? One day 
 spent in doing good is great." 
 
 ^PLJD virtue ; g)6UBr=g)a>6u/r i ffffl.jr one who is not; Q^uj^evesr one 
 ivho has not done ; <jj if; JSGVLCI goodness. 
 
 Lesson 100. 
 
 273. Imitative words like the following are in very frequent use 
 in Tamil. Their use varies considerably in different localities. 
 
 sieisrjgj Q&ir^&Q/D^ the rice-pot boils with a bubbling 
 
 182
 
 ,J to 
 
 LESSON 100. 273. 
 
 IMITATIVE WORDS. 
 
 (LpsvrutTSuGurruj ^syr(ryssr he went direct 
 and stood before the king. 
 
 <\J5& /smii su/refra/n-Oerrfiarji/ &5gilp3j] that dog Tceeps up a hotvl. 
 &&<srr<gG:< iSgySlQfDzsrjpj ffiLpfSl&)esr Tie turned round the wheel 
 with a whirl. 
 
 L9e?r3sir@<ffi gy^Q^siirji; GirtLffev ^u^sQro^ the child has a 
 strong fever. 
 
 wept aloud. 
 
 8fr>^] the water is icy cold. 
 
 LJ utr'SoGrsauju y,sffr LdtLdQL-svrjpi tL(^L.i^.sQiLt^ the cat 
 rolled over the pile of pots with a crash. 
 
 ^szssrsssf/r Lc,i-L&Qt6vrjri] <oQp^ the water runs on with a mur- 
 muring sound. 
 
 ^jeueiir LarofrLdQsrrssrjp (Su&^)ssr he spoke very loud. 
 <surruj&<9S[re3(3j fgsssrextfir tflsyj &fj\y srssr^u ^S/D^j the water runs 
 in the channel with a gurgling sound. 
 
 rEtsimQu uiu/sgi <a_a9@)<fr he cried out fearing and trembling 
 greatly. &t^ ^ n / rp 2rr7 &> & ^- -^rr ^- ~-V *- -^) <~ <S) *-; * ?+~r ,^j -^ *> n^_j 
 
 the body trembles all over. 
 
 rr if you let her talk she will get up a terrible quarrel. 
 
 i Lo0yjzrji/ 9(ip@S)/r)^3 the water runs 
 freely from the ulcer. 
 
 Q&ITL^I L6\$ iSQ&Jssr^i L\fDuuiLi^s the fowls came forth with a 
 rushing noise. 
 
 S-iLbLi &p<&Q<$6srf6l ()&$ {Dgi the body is hot with fever. 
 tmsTOLp Q^frerrQcfF/rOsrrssr^ Qui'u^^i the rain came down in torrents. 
 ^JT/O/DSU QurTQu!rQissr^i ^ir^iSlfO^i the shower comes rattling 
 down. 
 
 ^l<suesr GTjsQ/sffQ-pLa ff'Wff&r srsk^i Qu^enir&sr lie keeps up a con- 
 tinual chatter. 
 
 <uuu)-&l(y!r lie keeps up a drumming noise. 
 
 n-t'u@rn^ the body is hot with fever. 
 
 (5(r ) 'r ^>u)-<sSifDff^ the heart palpitates violently. 
 @Q5^^ir/bQurr(S&} @w^j uiuQi-esrga tosrotp euisgi-s&il.L-g) the 
 rain came pattering down suddenly (other things continuing as they were). 
 urrfrjs^LJn utrffUL^eo uLuQi<ssr^i Qu&^iiir&sr he seeing saw not, 
 but spoke rashly. 
 
 L9errSsrr<ffi<sfr &)<sQj<siir)] ui$-&Q(yn-<$r the children are reading in 
 full chorus. 
 
 TL-sxJr '^QL-SST.P epqL^svr the thief scampered off sharp. 
 
 si&Qi<osr^3 QufrQfD^i the bandy goes rattling along. 
 (Q&eireifl) uajuevQgiiGvrjp] Qfir^&^Slfo^ the lizard is 
 chirping. 
 
 183
 
 273. LESSON 100. 
 
 ONOMATAPOIEA. 
 
 <s/T6u ens sreusu/rti Q<3U6uQ<syQ GO sisr $$!)& p> gi the arwis and legs 
 are all cramped. 
 
 ^ QLarr^QLan~Qrr)ssr i r6l(tij-&lrQgi the thin biscuit is very crisp, 
 the rain beats in violently. 
 
 the ivhole body is parched up. 
 the throat is parched. 
 s_i_iLi_/ Q&trgiQ&irQpsgrjpi s{ribQp^\ the body is dry with fever. 
 <3yuS/i) ( fl9 1 sff)C? > 6u Qs^^QsirQ^ssr^i QuirQrr)^ the bowels are violently 
 disturbed. 
 
 the hot water is steaming. 
 
 c, (gjg>Qf_s5/\p ^GlSpgi the vilam fruit rattles in Us 
 shell. 
 
 eruQuirgiLo jysuOT Q<s5;T&iTQissrj])i (ous-Qtyssr he always speaks 
 hastily. 
 
 srHsrk ScGsriireo ^SQL_sgr^j/ s8(ipQ(yztr he always falls foul of 
 me when he sees me. 
 
 aM(SZ5>LpUULpL> Qff.T LpQ 
 
 the plantain has gone quite bad. 
 
 jtjppu UL- <sii LpsuQigsyr /$)! fo^i that silk is very soft. 
 jysusar s/r.flujiii srsusu.rii GUL^SUL^ QsfTLpQsfTLp his affairs are all 
 disordered. 
 
 3>l!5;5 sSpgj 4<flrL/O^=Brj OT^^^jSu/rS/D^j that firewood has burnt 
 up all at once. 
 
 ^{ppjs ^jszssfl Qu/rQufl-Q<FS8rjp tp^jjCJu/r**^ that cloth has 
 torn (being rotten before). 
 
 &p<$ssrixi aLoaQLosJrjj; L&sisarslSpgi the sandal yields a fragrant 
 odour. 
 
 ^rzpuQftuujtt (^(^Q^eJrjj/ ^^.uQuirtLsSlLLin'sor that boy has run 
 off sharp. 
 
 ^jS^uLji ens*} pssr(yt.u QLbrrfQLafrQ&sBrfolgrj&QrDgi that cloth is 
 very strong and well woven. 
 
 ffir&QirsBr^r)} urTLaL) ^QQfO^i the snake glides off with a rustling 
 noise. c 
 
 <STS25T@ QjpiQQrozsrj!)] eu^Slfo^i I am quite bewildered, my head 
 whirls round. 
 
 ^]6gj&(&) a_L_tibq <5T63resr(oL&[r sS^iaSQnoearjStT^-sSro^ his body is 
 somehow rather fat (he wants a thrashing is insolent). 
 
 gffKi(gj<56)3u$(o&) u&)^svQ^^}jQ/s(a)fDsyr^)i'Si^.'s8(yesr he grinds his 
 teeth in his sleep. 
 
 sresrssr, JK-LQL&IT Qsrr&Qsn-Q'ffssrjpi Q^/Teujy/S^scr what! he is 
 always whispering somewhat (buzzing in one's ear). 
 
 OTeugufl-^LQ QLarr&QL&frQ&ssrjr)] eujsgi Q LQ IT iLi^ g&Q SKGGSTL- IT fr <ST 
 they all came clustering together thickly. 
 
 ^(i^i-SasruG'LJ/TeD ^jyJsQ/rjearjy 39L$<&Q(y>sor he looks askance like a 
 thief. c 
 
 e_i_ti>i_| QffirjjjiQ&nQpesrfSliTfj&QtDgi the body is all rough. 
 
 184
 
 LESSON 100. 273. 
 
 IMITATIVE WORDS. 
 
 Qufr<^)iT<serr they dragged 
 him away violently. 
 
 T63TS5r(eUJ/r, (Lp jg] (LpQ &XJT SST }] S <35 &$ UJ L& IT UJ U Qu&^)ITSefT they 
 
 talked about something or other in a low mysterious way. 
 
 for two hours he talked on incessantly. 
 
 T, (tpsii uS^jyvuSQ'oGrzsrnSQrj&QfD^ the face is somehow 
 glistening. 
 
 Q<s/T3?5r0<5/rG)s33rs5r^jj Qu <&&(/ GST he talks thickly (as one who has 
 a cold). 
 
 {$& s%>@ ffigua-Qpssrg)} srifiojfifieu&u that firewood does not burn 
 briskly, 
 
 if you put tobacco into your mouth your tongue will be burnt. 
 
 is a 
 
 s.ui3 ^(i^&QfD^ the stomach is much swollen. 
 <5mLi-rT6v QpfncfrQpirQ&rssrtflQj&SirDgi if you touch it, it 
 is soft. 
 
 e glJ5<3> Larrey Q&rrroQ&n'QnoGsrfQlQj&S'iiDgj that flour is coarse. 
 Q&jpi QiLdir^QiLctnQ^&rfSlQ^s&ifD^i the mud is thick and makes a 
 noise when the foot is put in it. 
 
 fr u&ruQ&rssr^i Lear^u@rr)^! the jewels glisten very brightly. 
 afaQf6arj8(tfi&&jDgi the noise is very great. 
 
 c L&Q&[T<o35{ @jr)}@Qfr>svrjj (L.L$<&Q(y6sr (sSt^ffiS^sw-) he 
 i is caught and looks afraid. 
 
 ^^^ stfilifG'eu G^0uq ^(^^Qjiscr^p L^tf.^^?, u-suQeear^i 
 upfSl, LQ/_LDL_iJr c ff3J <oTf6ljs t gj(ourr<9 : &-gi the fire seized that house briskly, 
 burned brightly, and the house is burnt up. 
 
 toiear suuS^j/ ^l^^lQ-ssor^i zrfl&pg! my stomach bums. 
 Lo/ricjr^^Coeu i_/tp/i GuirevQurTQeuesrjpi QlfBfrL-^bt'Sssr&^i^i from 
 the mango tree the fruits are falling. 
 
 Qeun-iQeuirQi-Gsrg] @^iuuf-&w<Ty<zisr he beats the drum with a dull 
 sound. 
 
 LSsrrSsrr ($j)g($Q6UCBrjpu Sfi&Qpg] the child smiles cheerfully. 
 <oT6srQesrff(LpLo Q<SLj(biQeuQi-esr^i Qusi-8(yser he is always speaking 
 sharply. 
 
 srou-ssTfis^^^ uetSGTKi&'fofTU QurrpQun-Q&esrjp] fifi-gpirear he 
 poured out the money from the sacks in heaps. 
 
 that way 
 
 Qai/sfnsrrtii QLntrtgjQi-ciiTQ&esrjpi su^Sfogi the water comes 
 doivn in the river. 
 
 LQSTOLP tfofrffQisfresrjpi QsfTiLQfD^ the rain is coming down in 
 buckets-full. 
 
 (r^sS(ysnr he is very wild. 
 
 185 24
 
 3 
 
 274. LESSON 101. 
 
 IDIOMATIC SENTENCES. 
 
 u Qutng. jsrD/sQfOsyr/S^-sS'fO^i that powder is very coarse. 
 QuSi^)rr<s&T they spoke secrets. 
 
 Q<s/rL_Qcs/TQt_ <srr fl (ffj &Q p ?~j the bracelet is slack on 
 the hand. 
 
 uQffssrroflsSfojFti the body is itching all over. 
 >sSljr^]<ss( Qi^frimQ^iTQ&rsisrrSlQ^sQp^ the ring is loose 
 on the finger. 
 
 La <SULO(O) eu svrj!)] <ss<ossT6S<^iT 'sSl L-i(LpQ (yefT she is weeping abundantly. 
 <s$Qi6u6V[TLc> Q&rrevQ&rTQeuesrjpi Uftp/gHriLu Quirf^^i the house is 
 all tumbling to ruin. 
 
 <KGvQy-<sv<5uiTLn S-uuujL,^^ Qu[r6uQutrQ<sv6srjpi E-^djfi/oja the whole 
 wall is crumbling away with the salt air. 
 
 ^gyta/SsOT^ <ffi53arL_freu Q'&iQi&sr^ /5"/5J@S(y/f0r they all fear the 
 sight of him. 
 
 ^j/SfS pss><s <<&;g(o)&ssrjru L^ssr^i'&lrf)^ that jewel shines very brightly. 
 ^ISUSST OTsarSssr^ (Sssorirreo <s<sQi<ayr^ Qu&'&lQysisr when he sees 
 me he speaks angrily. 
 
 gaeaxsLi <s <s (osua^LjL QLorrroQLciirQfDssr^Q^sSlrri^ the newly-washed 
 garment is stiff. 
 
 .jyajOTr psvr(n?LLi<5 <si_<$Qi-srjr)] eutr9l&Sl(y&sr he reads fluently . 
 LOSTOLP Quiu<5L$zisr Ljeuggi u&uQ&Garg)] (Lf^3<r^^lQ^&&lfD^i after the 
 rain the fields are green with grass. 
 
 Many nouns are formed in this way : 
 
 Srjpi&jiplULj diligence; U&U&ULJ an itching sensation; <SCSUL^ 
 severity; ^oSl^usSl^ui-j a numbness of the limbs ; ^^.^IUJLLJ LI palpitation; 
 giddiness. 
 
 Lesson 101. 
 
 274. Idiomatic sentences. Each of these is a formula. 
 
 (1.) UL$urr <&<&}<& &<r>#rr& jpffl^L dr 4k&wretch who feared neither 
 guilt nor sin. (UL^S^LC Lineup 3ji@Lo ^j^^rr^ ^ja^LOT.) [Here 
 s-ti> is omitted.] 
 
 (2.) <$IEl&Slfll<!J5l6i)$IUUL$- 'ShlsSSTSSSTUU^ Q & LLJ tU SV IT Q <o$T <SST I haV6 
 
 thus made my petition to your worship. [Q&t'uuj6\} the doing, ^QsGrsvr 
 I have become.] 
 
 (3.) In the conclusion of a letter $uui$-&<yj stands for "thus 
 writes," &c.,=the old form " this from your" (loving friend, &c.). 
 
 (4.) $jj)djslrrGGsr(E> QuQ^&^ia Qutrutr$liuir&A ^ ^ ' ^^ 
 to each of these two persons half. 
 
 (5.) 
 
 Has it come to this that my goods should be so estimated. [Qpir right 
 in the way, direct; @ give, be; Qp$ = to come to pass, happen.] 
 
 186
 
 LESSON 101. 274. 
 
 IDIOMATIC SENTENCES. 
 
 (6.) & 
 
 wnrQlGL &sr if the complainant prove it by witnesses I will be subjected to 
 punishment. [2. err within, under; ^Qsuear I shall become.] 
 
 (7.) <siEi<35&r sfl^ero^aSjgpsroiUJ ^(6 LA QuQ^f^LCxss^strs <3sn~sssrL3^ 
 ^rrffsetr they showed off the rareness and greatness of their learning. 
 [,jy(/5<5rou> and Qu([Tj<asiL& joined together, and the plural termination 
 added to the latter.] 
 
 Thus, &-&^&<esrsi<35<srr joys and sorrows. 
 
 (8.) $)J5&<& @S)sro/rgrr ersareer aSSst) ? What is the price of these 
 horses. [An ellipsis of the 4th case.] $)<< (^^e^irs^si^ . . . 
 
 (9.) cgysro^^ Qffrreo&j <sufTLU<surrirLB6\} LajTiiGu/rgu jS 'sar (y m he stood 
 lilce a tree, unable to say it [lit. the mouth not coming]. 
 
 (10.) C ) L>jyj<5(3j<ff : ffLDLa^l^^eu^osru CoLj/rsucF 'oiffY&sr/^syr he spoke as 
 though he approved of it. [QLosyjS{<B) outwardly.] 
 
 (11.) ^rrjb^i s3Q>&sq=Lnn~<95 QsefTsSuiLL-irn' he heard it reported. 
 [atTrbjri] sSlG&styL&n-iLi as a thing borne by the winds.] 
 
 (12.) (XpsronD (Lp<5S)rouj[T& respectively, in order. [Repetitions of this 
 kind are frequent : thus, ^eirp&rjpi (j^srj!)i, tS-.&rjru) day by day] 
 
 (13.) Q<pj<suLn ujireiJiflL-< i l\LQ ^Ssuuj/r^j, Q<5K&<&treo (ouireii Sip 
 Qu^eotrujeuQ^LB prosperity stands not still with anyone, but like a chariot 
 wheel turns upside down. 
 
 (14.) In l-5fD ^tf put to rout (56. HI.), up&sisf. put to flight, and 
 similar forms, there is a contraction : 
 
 (15.) utrrf&su urrir&s u^Q^irLauSujLan'aj ' (aeuup-<s5ea)aujiriLi 
 @ii the more one looks the more the spectacle satisfies the mind ( 
 infinitive doubled, 168. Thus, SUIT <suir=by degrees.) 
 
 (16.) ^{BjS LCXS/T u/TjSseitr @ear@)6ar sresr^u -<5or&(&j (tpsarG 'esr 
 
 J" That great sinner such an one" saying to thee before 
 _,, jsQjgevr egjeueusurr ? 
 
 I told did I not ?] I told you before, did I not, who was the 
 great sinner ? . 
 
 she feared, not being able to point out the husband. 
 an one.] ^-^-0^^^- 2^-^ 
 
 (17.) $) js <$ rs IT six <LZ epQfjeuGaniigjiiiev ^QfjJBfitrev ^eiiesr srearesr 
 If all these four be with a man what will he 
 
 not suffer f 
 
 (s.LD=all.~) iJS" The idiom here is English. 
 
 (18.) c>j p ;S u iS &r'&s(r &%eir ^ <sevr oS'ilcS@ ^j6S)Lp^^isQ<35msssTQurr 
 he took the children home with him. (Observe the use of .jysroip.) 
 
 fi 6roc5<ffii_ itreSiLL-irggui QuQ^&sLDeuQf/L^ all must meditate great 
 things ; if they are unattainable, still greatness will be the result. 
 
 187
 
 274. LESSON 101. 
 
 IDIOMATIC SENTENCES. 
 
 (20.) /IT Q&rrssrssruut-Quj Q&L-Qusvr I will obey you strictly. 
 [Q>&L-(oussr I will hear. To hear is to obey, in Tamil.] 
 
 (21.) jfgistrfiiULo (for ^JB<<& sirfiiLiLz) that affair. [Here ^^ 
 and -sn-fltuLa are put in apposition.] 
 
 (22.) ^eu^ifs^ G>j<5&La iSu^^^i sSl^ssr^^L-Q&sr uj5Jgs{B Q&trstssr 
 tte deep distress seized him and he lay down with grief. [Both 
 56. I., and GT<>, 56. I., are used idiomatically. OTew^.^u u 
 fog! I am hungry.^ 
 
 (23.) ^>j<sps<suiT<s&T Q&trssriosr^ : STE/@5*@c5 G><$tfliurr#ji. 
 
 (To this that which they said is : We don't know.) They said, 
 We dont know. 
 
 (24.) au6ujijcS/r^/ the right ear, @i__^ s/rja the left ear. 
 
 sueu^isroffi the right hand, very commonly Q^irfl^isems the rice 
 hand. 
 
 @L_jjo<oE>; the left hand, very commonly L$&&<fB<sm& the hand used for 
 baser purposes. 
 
 (25.) 0c5/T(Lpu Qun5luSi(Tr)&lo^ it is grown fat. [Qsn-Qgui-i <&n51u$ 
 (ffjffslfDgi fat having ascended is.] 
 
 sirfliULD tsL-JEQjSfSl <a/(75<ffil/r>42 the affair is prospering. [>5ijsgi 
 ojfSlw^Qpgi going on ascending it comes.'] 
 
 (26.) egya/Ssor jj/sroip^^^/LJLS^ssrdr I sent for him. [Here the 
 adverb, part, ^-gysroip^js seems to be used for the infin. 
 sent to call himJ] 
 
 So Q<5LLigguuL{ send to 
 
 (27.) @(/5 S 
 
 77 (b.) 130 106 (2.) 
 
 [Having taught, was become as soon as.~] 
 As soon as the Guru had finished teaching. 
 Qutflujeussr ^esr L3n)(&j after he was grown up. 
 
 END OF THE LESSONS. 
 
 188
 
 GENERAL INDEX TO PART I. 
 
 [The Niimbers refer to the Paragraphs.] 
 
 A. 
 
 Case absolute . 106 (6.), 
 
 144, 169 
 
 
 
 Cases .... 21, 
 
 233-253 
 
 A or an 
 
 . 1, 8, 271 
 
 Case 1st .... 
 
 0_,1 
 
 223 
 
 OQ 
 
 A bbreviations 
 About .... 
 
 . Int. viii. 
 . 230 
 
 ZDCl . . . 
 
 3rd . . . 
 
 Zoo 
 
 . 239 
 
 Absolute case 
 
 . 144 
 
 4th . 
 
 . 242 
 
 Abstract nouns . 
 Active and neuter verbs 
 Adjectives . 
 
 . 184 
 . 15 g, 160 
 12, 130 
 25, 271 
 40, 136, 170 
 . 251 
 . 43 
 . 225 
 
 5th 2*0 
 6th 248 
 7th 251 
 Causal verbs . . .92, 160 
 Cautions to be attended to in 
 translation . . . .271 
 Change of LD into /Q, &c., . 29 (e.), 51 
 Changes of letters . . Int. II. 
 
 Adverbs 
 
 Affirmation and negation 
 After .... 
 
 Agastya's Sutrams . . Int. I. 4 
 Alternative, how expressed . 205 
 Although, &c. . . . 100, 217 
 And 7 
 Appellative nouns . . 180, 184 
 Apposition . . . 130, &c., 233 
 Articles ... ft 
 
 Cognate languages 
 Common forms and idioms, 35 
 Comparative degree . 
 Comparison 
 Complement of predicate 137, 
 Completeness expressed by 
 Qun 106, 124, 
 
 Int. I. 
 , 50, 123 
 . 196 
 199, 227 
 139 note 
 
 Ouflr, 
 
 256, 258 
 
 Auxiliary verbs . 
 Awaiyar's works. 
 
 79, 254 
 Int. I., 270 
 
 Compounds, how formed, 106 
 251. 
 
 (1.) 131 
 
 
 
 
 Concerning . . 
 
 . 230 
 
 
 
 Concession .... 
 
 . 100 
 
 B. 
 
 
 Conditional mood 
 
 95,98 
 
 
 Conjugation of Tamil verbs 
 
 . 15 
 
 
 _ Consonants .... 
 
 . p. 8 
 
 Before 
 Benedictive forms 
 
 Continued action expressed 
 
 by 
 
 106, 4 
 
 Beschius . . Int. I., 4, 5 
 Boundaries of the Tamil country, Int. 
 !.,!. 
 
 VO/CDM >OM (JOI^ 
 
 Correlatives 
 Corruptions . . 
 
 . 205 
 . 123 
 
 c. 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 . 103 
 
 Decimal notation . . 
 
 . 174 
 
 Canarese 
 
 Int. I 2 
 
 Declension of nouns . . . 
 
 . 21 
 
 189
 
 GENERA 
 
 .L INDEX. 
 
 Defective verbs . . 117 
 
 Gerund 77 
 
 Demonstrative forms ... 25 
 
 Gerundial inf 143 
 
 Desiderative forms . . . 140 
 
 Grammars of Tamil . Int. I., 4 
 
 Derivative nouns . . . 180 
 
 
 Dilemma 205 
 
 
 Distinction between 15 nib and 15 nib 
 sfr 11 
 
 H. 
 
 : active and neuter verbs . 15 
 
 Habitual action . . . .106 
 
 * and (c\\i Ps^i 44 
 
 Have 43 241 
 
 y^ jL%_ a.6zsr 
 
 Hints regarding translation . 272 
 
 108. 
 
 His, &c., may be understood . 272 
 Honorific terminations, 11, 31, 108, 151, 
 219. 
 
 6&LUJ 108 
 
 
 Double accusative . . . 238 
 
 
 Double letters . . . . p. 22 
 
 I 
 
 Doubling of letters . 4, 18, 25, 29 
 
 
 Dravida . . . Int. I., 1 
 
 Idiomatic sentences . . . 274 
 
 Devanagari character . . Int. II. 
 
 Idiomatic use of the tenses . 269 
 
 Dual 11 
 Duration of time . . . 211 
 
 Idiomatic uses of the root ^, 136, 
 268. " 
 
 
 
 E. 
 
 a9 . . . . .254 
 u 262 
 
 Elision of final a. 15, 18 
 
 Q/r<srr<g$ . . 259 
 
 Ellipsis 233 
 
 - _S33r 265 
 
 of the pronoun ... 5 
 signs of the cases . 50, 270 
 
 QUIT . . . .256 
 
 COQJ ^61 
 
 verb " to be " . . . 6 
 
 
 verbal inflections . . 270 
 
 LJ/D ..... 257 
 
 Emphatic <& . 23, 108, 121, 273 
 
 ^(Jjefr .... 264 
 QUIT 258 
 
 Enlargements of subject and object 130 
 Etcaetera(&c.), how expressed, 151 (e.) 
 
 arrsssr .260 
 
 Euphonv . . . . 18, 23 
 
 Imperative mood ... 27 
 
 Ever 217 
 
 negative . . . 121, 270 
 
 Exception 202 
 
 Impersonal verbs 39 
 
 Extent 211 
 
 
 
 Infinitive mood . . 41, 168, 271 
 
 
 used as adverbs, prepositions 
 
 TJl 
 
 and conjunctions . . 170, 171 
 
 
 
 Finite verb 77 
 gtrssr used for . . 108 (c.) 
 
 not useu as a noun in xamn. 
 Inflexional base of nouns, 21, 131, 248 
 Initial ,jy, g), sr . . .25 
 
 Foreign words in Tamil . . 187 
 Formation of verbs from nouns, 163, 
 
 LLJ, 6U, H . Int. II. p. i. 
 Insertion of & . . . .58 
 
 Ac. 
 Future tense . . 55, 72 
 
 of ay, tu 18, 46 
 /S\ 15 22 
 
 perfect tense ... 80 
 
 (jg/SZJT J-O, ti 
 
 Future tense used indefinitely 81, 269 
 
 >{<> 18 > 248 > 27 
 
 
 pm 270 
 
 
 Intention, how expressed . . 157 
 
 G. 
 
 Interchange of tenses . . . 269 
 
 
 Interjections .... 193 
 
 Genders 2, 29 
 
 Interrogatives ... 46, 126 
 
 Genitive case . ' . -. ; 248 
 
 Irttegnlar verbs . . . ? . 117 
 
 190
 
 GENERAL INDEX. 
 
 K 
 
 Kamban (story of) . . Lesson 80 
 Karmma-dharaya compounds . 131 
 Kodun Tamil . . . Int. I., 4 
 Kurral .... Int. I., 5 
 
 L. 
 
 Like 227 
 Limit 211 
 
 M. 
 
 Masculine terminations . . 2 
 May 103 
 Middle particles .... 15 
 Middle voice . . 106 (4.), 259 
 Must, must not . . .39 
 Mute sign or L/errgrfl, (3)3jaji P- 10 
 
 N. 
 
 Naishadham . . . Int. I., 5 
 Naladi-nannurru . . . Int. I., 5 
 Nannul .... Int. I., 4 
 Nasals 51 
 Negative nouns in ^STOLO 154 
 Negative verb . . 110, 116, 121 
 Negatives S)6u2su and JJJSLISU 43 
 Neuter gender .... 2 
 
 Oblique case . . . .248 
 Omission of the signs of cases 50, 233 
 
 Onomatapoiea .... 273 
 Optative mood .... 140 
 Ordinals . . ..:.'. 175 
 
 Ought. . . .' . . 140 
 
 P. 
 
 Pairs of words . . p. 180, note 
 Paradigms of noun . . 21, 29 
 of pronoun .... 37 
 of verb . . 34, 70*, 72 
 of negative verb . . . 110 
 Participial nouns . . 87-91 
 Participial nouns added to the nom. 
 case 151 
 govern the same case as their 
 verbs 89 
 Participle relative, or adjective . 74 
 verbal or adverbial . . 77 
 
 Particles used instead of the termina- 
 tions of cases . . . 151, 251 
 Particle <g\f5^ inserted . . 248 
 ^ia inserted . . 250, 237 
 Past tense .... 55-70 
 used for the present . . 269 
 Passive voice . 92, 271, 265, 262 
 Passive nouns . . . 190 (&.) 
 Perfect tense .... 79 
 Permission, how expressed, 103, 140 (d.) 
 Personal nouns . . . 30, note 
 Pluperfect tense .... 79 
 Plural .... 29, 30, note 
 Poetical idioms . . . .270 
 Polite forms of address . . 108 
 Possessive case .... 248 
 Possibility, how expressed . . 103 
 Potential mood .... 103 
 Predicate with ^(L' '. . .137 
 Preposition expressed by a verb 254 
 Present tense ... 31, 34 
 Pronouns . . .10, 11, 25, 37 
 omitted in Tamil . . 5 
 Pronunciation . . Int. II., xi. 
 Purpose or intention . . . 157 
 
 Q. 
 
 Qualifying words . . .130 
 Question .... 46, 214 
 Quotation, how marked . 82, 271 
 
 Nominative not to be introduced 
 between a sflSoffr torff&La and the 
 finite verb . . . . . 27l 
 Notation in arithmetic . . 174 
 Nouns formed from verbal roots 190 
 
 nouna 180 
 
 
 Nouns declined .... 21 
 Nouns implying negation . . 154 
 Numbers 172 
 
 0. 
 
 Object 236 
 Objective case . . .18, 236 
 Objective genitive . . . 248 
 
 191
 
 GENERA 
 
 L INDEX. 
 
 
 Telugn Int. I., 2 
 
 
 TembAvani .... Int. I., 5 
 
 . 
 
 Temporal particles . 15, 55, 110 
 
 
 Than 196 
 
 Ramayanam . ... Int. I., 5 
 Reduplicated forms . 123 (j.), 273 
 
 Tolkappiam .... Int. I., 4 
 Tonnul .... Int. I., 4 
 
 Reflexive signification of verbs, 106 (4) 
 
 Transitive meaning of verbs (Qu/r), 
 
 pronoun 108 
 Relation to 230 
 Relative 74 
 Relative or adjective participle . 74 
 
 106 (s.). 
 Translation, principles of . . 100 
 Transmutation of letters, . 51, 70 
 
 idiomatic, use of . . . 267 
 
 
 Resemblance . . . .227 
 
 
 Riddle in Tamil . . . .216 
 
 
 
 u. 
 
 S. 
 
 Universality .... 126 
 
 Sanskrit words in Tamil, Int. II., xii. 
 
 
 nouns in Tamil . . . 190 
 
 
 Sen Tamil .... Int. I., 4 
 
 
 Signs of cases omitted, 50, 233, 270 
 
 v. 
 
 Signs of tenses ... 15, 55 
 
 
 Singular .... 30, note 
 
 
 Sivaga Chintamani . . Int. I., 5 
 Soever 217 
 
 Verbal or adverbial participle . 77 
 Verbal nouns in G 144, 7 
 
 Stokes' edition of t !$Q p $ s& T & & LG 
 
 m* 
 
 in ^eo, jgev, &c. . 148, 150 
 
 * 
 Story 105 
 Subjunctive mood . . 95, 98 
 Sugden's edition of Avvai . . 270 
 Summing up .... 136 
 Superlative degree . . . 196 
 
 negative . . . .154 
 Verb, the Tamil conjugation of, 15 
 Verbs formed from nouns . . 163 
 Vowel-consonants . Int. II., iv. 
 Vowels . . . Int. II., ii. 
 Vulgarisms 123 
 
 Supplication . . . 39, 214 
 
 
 Surds .... Int. II., p. 10 
 
 
 T. 
 
 W. 
 
 Tamil language . . . Int. I. 
 Tat-purusha compounds . . 131 
 
 Withandby 239 
 Why? 214 
 
 rfyV. 
 
 
 London : Printed by W. H. Allen & Ce 
 
 ., if Waterloo Place, Pall Mall. S.W. 
 
 
 i 
 
 192